/4^-
JiLh.
t^^^Mm^^
^n m-
^'^m^^1t<<k
5^- . 6
— ^ ^ .r ./
^\»•«:
'j?s^^:
Digitized by tine Internet Archive
in 2008 with funding from
Microsoft Corporation
http://www.archive.org/details/arabicgrammarparOOsocirich
PORTA
LINGUARUM ORIEUTALIOM
INCHOAVIT
J. H. PETERMANN
CONTINUAVIT
HERM. L. STRACK.
ELEMEISTTA LINGUARUM
Hebraicae, Phoeniciae, Biblico-Aramaicae,
Samaritanae, Targumicae, Syriacae, Arabicae,
Aethiopicae, Assyriacae, Aegyptiacae, Copticae,
Armeniacae, Persicae, Turcicae, aliarum
studiis academicis accommodaverunt
J. H. Petermann, H. L. Strack, E. Nestle, A. Socin, F. Praetorius,
A. Merx, Aug. Mueller, Friedr. Delitzsch, C. Salemann,
Ad. Erman, V. Shukovski, Th. Noeldeke,
G. Steindorff, B. Bruennow, Dav. S. Mueller, G.Jacob, aiu.
PAES IV.
ABIC GRAMMAR
BY
A. SOCIN.
SECOND EDITION.
BEELIN,
EEUTHEE & EEICHAED
LONDON NEW YORK
WILLIAMS & NORGATE B. WESTERMANN & Co.
14, HENBIETTA STEEET 812, BROADWAY.
1895.
ARABIC GRAMMAR
PARADIGMS, LITERATURE, EXERCISES
AND
GLOSSARY
Dr. a. SOCIN
PROFESSOR ORDINARirS IX THE UiaVERSITY OF LEtPZIO.
SECOND ENGLISH EDITION
TEANSLATED FEOM THE THIED GEEMAN EDITION
BY THE
Rev. arch. R. S. KENNEDY D. D.
PROFESSOR OF HEBREW ETC. Df THE TTiaVERSITY OF EDtNBITRGH.
OF THE
IVERSITY
LONDON, BERLIN,
WILLIAMS & NORGATE REUTHER & REICHARD
1895.
roioL
All rights reserved,
including that of translation into other languages.
in
PREFACE fH't
TO THE
SECOND ENGLISH EDITION.
The aim of the following pages is to furnish intend-
ing students of classical Arabic with the most import-
ant rules both of the Accidence and of the Syntax
in the briefest possible form. The present edition, the
second in English, is a translation of the third German
edition of 1894, to which, save for a few corrections
and additions, it in all respects corresponds. Its
German counterpart has been considerably altered
compared with the second edition because of the
publishers' intention to issue a separate chrestomathy
of Arabic prose. Professor K. Bruennow, a scholar
of approved ability, was entrusted with the prepara-
tion of this work which appeared in the year 1894.
The connected narratives which formerly composed
the chrestomathy of the grammar were, according to
arrangement, incorporated in Bruennow's work, and
consequently had to be dropped from the new edition
VI Preface.
of the grammar. On the other hand the latter was
now extended, more particularly in the part dealing
with the syntax, with the result that it will now be
found, with few exceptions, to be sufficient for the
understanding of the new chrestomathy. At the same
time,, the fact must again be emphasised that the
present work does not pretend to take the place of
any of the larger treatises ; the English student who
wishes to advance beyond the elements of Arabic must
have recourse to the latest edition (the third) of
Wright's excellent grammar. For this reason the
author has deemed it his duty to adhere to his former
view and to decline, in a book intended for beginners,
to enter into the technical terminology of the Arab
grammarians — which may safely be left to the larger
grammars; still the Arabic specialist will easily dis-
cover that their views have been taken into account
even in the present elementary work. The best intro-
duction to this department of study will be found to
be the reading of the Agrumiye, which Bruennow has
printed in his Chrestomathy.
In order to lighten the first lessons in grammar,
the exercises consisting of short sentences and anec-
dotes have been increased by the addition of a few
short stories, by means of which a sort of stepping
stone is provided to the prose chrestomathy.
Preface. YII
The passages for translation into Arabic have been
retained unchanged along with the appropriate
glossary. Experience has shown that this part of the
chrestomathy has unquestionably been of service; and
although I am strongly of opinion that this class of
exercises is of real value in such systematic instruction
as is necessary at first, I am in no wise blind to the
difficulties which the correction of such exercises entails
even on the teacher of Arabic. In order to meet such
difficulties, I have selected single sentences and anec-
dotes from Arabic authors, and have so arranged both
notes and glossary that the student, who in any case
will have to make diligent use of grammar and dic-
tionary, is so to say compelled to reproduce exactly
the Arabic original. From what has just been said,
it is clear that this part of the book, at least, presup-
poses a teacher, for I am convinced that the grammar
of Arabic as a whole, and the syntax in particular,
can only be mastered with extreme difficulty by self-
instruction. I would add, however, that translation
from English should be taken at first in the smallest
possible doses, and even in this way only after the
student has read a part of the Arabic texts.
The synopsis of Arabic literature has also been
extended. Strictly speaking, this section is out of
place in an elementary work; still it may afford a
Vni Preface,
stimulus to a beginner here and there, and supply an
occasional hint to those pursuing the study of Arabic
by themselves, or at a distance from the larger seats
of learning.
The present English edition is an entirely new
translation. This difficult and tedious work has been
undertaken by Professor Archd. R. S. Kennedy of
Edinburgh University. To him and to his late assistant,
Mr. W. B. Stevenson B. D., Vans Dunlop Scholar in
Semitic Languages of the same University, who has
rendered us great assistance in the reading of the
proofs, I cannot omit to express here my warmest
thanks for their co-operation.
A. SociN.
NOTE BY THE TRANSLATOR.
I have only to add to the foregoing, that my
responsibility as translator does not extend to the
English-Arabic exercises and the relative glossary.
A few verbal changes excepted — chiefly where the
"violence done to the Queen's English" (p. 57*) was
greater than seemed absolutely necessary — these
have been reprinted from the first edition. I have
also inserted an additional reference here and there,
and in the bibliographical section I am responsible
for one or two additional entries.
I wish also to express my personal indebtedness
to Mr.Stevenson, without whose generous co-operation,
owing to my absence in the East, the book would
not have been ready in time for this winter's work.
20*li September 1895.
A. K. S. K.
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
GRAMMAR.
I. OflTHOGRAPHY AND PHONOLOGY (§§ l-ii).
Page
§ 1. Consonants 1
§ 2. Long Vowels 6
§ 3. Short Vowels, Nunation, Gezma 8
§ 4. Hamza 9
§ 5. TesdTd 11
§ 6. Wasla 12
§ 7. Medda 15
§ 8. The Syllable 16
§ 9. The Tone 17
§ 10. Pause 18
§ 11. The Arabic Cyphers and Contractions 18
II. ACCIDENCE (§§ 12—96).
Chap. I. The Pronoun (§§ 12—15).
§ 12. Personal Pronouns 19
§ 13. Demonstrative Pronouns 21
§ 14. Eelative Pronouns 23
§ 15. Interrogative Pronouns 24
Chap. 11. The Verb (§§ 16—54).
§ 16. Groundform 24
§ 17. Conspectus of the derived Stems 24
§ 18. L Stem 25
§ 19. n. Stem 26
§ 20. III. Stem 26
§ 21. IV. Stem 27
Contents. XI
Page
§ 22. V. Stem 27
§ 23. VI. Stem 28
§ 24. VII. Stem 28
§ 25. VIII. Stem 28
§ 26. IX. and XI. Stems 29
§ 27. X. Stem 29
§ 28. The Stems of the quadriliteral Verb 30
§ 29. The Passive 30
§ 30. The Tenses 30
§31. The Moods 31
§ 32. Imperative 32
§ 33. Inflexion for Person and Number 33
§§ 34—36. Verbs mediae geminatae 34
§§ 37—38. Verba hamzata 36
§ 39. Weak Verbs 38
§ 40. Verba primae 3 et ^ 38
§§ 41 — 44. Verba mediae ^ et (3 39
§§ 45—48. Verba ultimae 3 et ^ 41
§ 49. Doubly weak Verbs 44
§ 50. The Verb J^J 45
§ 51. Verbs of Praise and Blame 46
§ 52. Forms of Admiration 46
§ 53. The Verb with Pronominal Suffixes 46
§ 54. Sign of the Accusative 47
Chap. HI. The Noun (§§ 55—90).
a. Formation of Nouns.
§ 55. Primitive and derived Nouns , . 48
§ 56. Summary of the simple Nouns 49
§ 57. Nouns with Preformatives 49
§ 58. Nouns with Aflformatives 50
§ 59. Quadriliteral Nouns 50
§ 60. Participles 50
§ 61. Infinitives 51
§ 62. Verbal Adjectives 53
XII Contents.
Page
§ 63. Intensive Eorms 54
§ 64. Nomina loci, instrument!, specie! 55
§ 65. Nomina relativa 56
§ 66. Nomina deminutiva 57
§67. Nouns from Stems mediae geminatae 67
§ 68. Nouns from Stems with Hamza 58
§ 69. Nouns from Stems primae ^ 58
§ 70. Nouns from Stems med. ^ and ^ 59
§ 71. Nouns from Stems ultimae ^ and ^ 60
b. Gender of Nouns.
§ 72. Masculine and Feminine Gender 62
§§ 73—74. Formation of the Feminine 63
c. Inflexion of Nouns.
§ 75. Number and Case 65
§ 76. Formation of the Dual and Plural 66
§ 77. Case-endings of Singular. Triptote and Diptote Nouns 67
§ 78. Diptotes 68
§ 79. Inflection of the Determined Noun 68
§ 80. Shortening of Dual and Plural in the Construct State 69
§ 81. Inflection of Nouns in in and an from ult. ^ and ,3 70
§82. The Noun with the Pronominal Suffixes .... 71
§ 83. Vowel Changes in the Pluralis Sanus 72
§ 84. Proper Names compounded with ^^\ 73
§ 85. Vocative 73
§ 86. Collective Nouns 74
§ 87. Broken Plurals 75
§ 88. List of the principal varieties of the Broken Plural . 76
§ 89. Broken Plurals from Quadriliteral Nouns .... 78
§ 90. Nouns of irregular Formation 80
CM^. lY. The Numerals (§§ 91—93).
§ 91. The Cardinal Numbers 83
§ 92. The Connection of the numeral with the thing numbered 85
6 93. Ordinal Numbers and Fractions 86
Contents. XIII
Page
Chap. v. Particles (§§ 94—96).
§ 94. Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunctions 88
§ 95. Inseparable Particles 88
§ 96. Prepositions and Particles with Suffixes .... 89
III. SYNTAX (§§ 97 — 160).
Chap, I. Tenses and Moods (§§ 97—104).
§ 97. Perfect and Imperfect 90
§ 98. Use of the Perfect 91
§ 99. Use of the Imperfect 92
§ 100. Subjunctive 94
§ 101. Modus apocopatus 95
§ 102. Modus energicus 95
§ 103. Passive 96
§ 104. Participles 96
Chap. 11. Government of the Verb (§§ 105—117).
§ 105. The Verb and its Compliment 97
§ 106. Accusative 97
§ 107. Accusative after verbs of coming &c 97
§ 108. Verbs with two Accusatives 97
§ 109. The Absolute Object 98
§ 110. The Accusative as Predicate 99
§111. Accusative with ^i 100
§ 112. Accusative with ^ of Concomitance 101
§ 113. Accusative of nearer Definition 101
§ 114* Accusative in Exclamations 102
§§ 114—116. The Verb with Prepositions 103
§ 117. J in Dates 104
Chap. III. Government of the Noun (§§ 118—134).
§ 118. The Noun with the Article (Determination) . . 105
§ 119. Apposition *106
§§ 120—122. Qualifying Adjuncts . 107
§§ 123—130. The Genitive Relation 109
XIV Contents.
Page
§131. The Construction of the Infinitive 112
§ 132. The Participle and its Object 118
§ 133. The Nomen Regens undetermined 114
§ 134. Improper Annexation 114
Chap. IV. The Simple Sentence (§§ 135—151).
§ 135. Distinction bet. Nominal and Verbal Sentences . 115
§ 136. The Verb in the Verbal Sentence 115
§§ 137—138. Indefinite Subject 117
§ 139. The Predicate in the Nominal Sentence .... 118
§§ 140 — 146. Connection bet. Subject and Predicate . . 119
§ 147. The Particles Hnna and ^anna 122
§ 148. Subordinate Sentences 123
§149. More than one Predicate 125
§ 150. Negative Sentences 125
§ 151. The Particle of Exception . 126
Chap. V, Compound Sentences (§§ 152—161).
§ 152. Co-ordinate Sentences 127
§§ 153—156. The Relative Clause 128
§157. The Circumstantial Clause 131
§ 158. The Temporal Clause ......... 132
§159. The Conditional Clause with the Perfect ... 133
§ 160. The Conditional Clause with the Apoc. Impf. . . 134
§ 161. The Particle \3 in the Apodosis 134
APPENDIX.
Computation of Time (Names of the Days of the "Week, the
Months &c.) 136
LITERATURE.
A. Bibliography 139
B. Introduction and general 144
C. Chrestomathies . 144
D. Grammars 145
Contents. XV
Page
E. Lexicography 147
F. Koran, Islam, Life of Muhammed, Bible &c. ... 150
G. Jurisprudence 153
H. Philosophy 154
I. Natural Sciences and Medicine 156
K. History, Biographies 157
L. Cosmography, Geography, Ethnography, Travels . . 163
M. Poetry 166
K. Belles Lettres, Ethics, Eomances 169
PARADIGMS.
I. Suffixes and Prefixes for the Conjugation of the Verb 3*
IL Strong triliteral Verb Act. 1 4*
IIL Strong triliteral Verb Pass. 1 6*
IV. Quadrinteral Verb, derived Steins 7*
V. Strong triliteral Verb, derived Stems 8*
VI. Verbum mediae geminatae Act. 1 10*
VII. Verbum mediae geminatae Pass. 1 11*
VIII. Verbum mediae geminatae, derived Stems . . . 12*
IX. Verba hamzata 13*
X. Verbum primae radicalis 3 et ^ 14*
XI. Verbum mediae radicalis ^ Act. 1 15*
XII. Verbum mediae radicalis \^ Act. 1 16*
XIII. Verbum mediae radicalis ^ vel ^ Pass 17*
XIV. Verbum med. radicalis ^ et (3, derived Stems . 18*
XV. Verbum tertiae radicalis ^ (Jj-ii) Act. I. . . . 19*
XVL Verbum tertiae radicalis ^ ( J-»3) -^-ct. I. . . . 20*
XVII. Verbum tertiae radicalism vel ^^ (jlsii) -^^t I. . 21*
XVIII. Verbum tertiae radicalis ^ vel ,3 Pass. I. . . . 24*
XIX. Verbum tertiae radicalis ^ vel ,3, derived Stems , 22*
XX. Nomen generis masculini 25*
XXI. Nomen generis feminini 26*
XXII. Nouns in "in" and "an" 27*
XXIII. The Nomi with Pronominal Suffixes 28*
XVI Contents.
Page
EXERCISES AND TEXTS.
I. Exercises on the Grammar
A. For practice in Beading 30*
B. Exercises on the Accidence 32*
C. Exercises on the Syntax . 35*
II. Connected Extracts 48*
III. For Translation into Arabic 57*
GLOSSARIES.
A. English- Arabic 79*
B. Arabic-English 104*
PAET I.
GRAMMAR
AND
BIBLIOGRAPHY.
Socin, Arabic Grammar.
GRAMMAR.
I. THE ARABIC CHARACTERS. PHONOLOGY
(§§ 1-11).
The Consonants. The Arabs at first used the Syriac 1.
characters and the Syriac alphabet, in which the order ^'
of the characters is the same as in Hebrew. A relic
of this earlier order is still preserved, in the employ-
ment— afterwards seldom resorted to — of the letters
of the alphabet as cyphers (cf. pages 4 — 5). At an
early period, however, the Arabs distinguished by
means of diacritical points a number of sounds which
were not so distinguished in the older alphabet.
By a process of curtailment, moreover, a number of
characters became so like each other that they had
to be distinguished by similar diacritical signs. The
next step was to group together in the alphabet the
characters which in this way had come to resemble
each other. Hence the Arabic alphabet now consists
of twenty-eight consonantal signs, the usual order and
TABLE OF CHARACTERS.
Fonn I Value
II
5 "
ti}to
O m 1
■^ a
-a fl
■*' a \\
0
Names
.a
« o
^§1
9
o
P4
Is
.2®
^
o
o
Is
K. ft
-2.2
Pronunciation
S5
"
G ^
1
1
oUI Alif*
1
L
—
—
cf. §§ 2 an
14
1
^
2
sLrBa
o
V"
A
1
J 1
b
b
2
n
3
gljTa
^:i>
OA.
X
j*
t
t
400
n
.^^
English hard th. as
t
500
4
jli- Tha
v£j
vi^
X
i-
in thing
J,
1
\ orig. g hard ; later
^
Aji,^>^ Jim
E
t
^
fi*. j V gin Italian ^iorwo;
|| J English j
V
g
3
a
) strong h with fric-
b
8
6
gll Hha
c
t
:SV.
^
> tion of larynx as if
n
J wheezing
h
600
7
glXKha
0 ^
t
t
^!l
^
ch in Scotch loch
d
4
"I
8
J|5 Dal
t>
t\
—
d
d
700
9
: JlS Dhal
(>
tX.
—
—
soft th, as in this
r
200
n
10
l^lj Zai
)
7
>
r
11
—
—
Z as in zeal; soft s
as in rose
z
7
T
12
\^j^*^ Sin
(J*
LT
MJ.
AM
hard S
1
s
60
D
13
l^jc^ Sin
u
LT
^
jsh
s
300
tJ
* The termination o i. e. un (see § 3 b) is neglected in the translitera-
tion, as in the modern Arabic pronunciation.
TABLE OF CHARACTERS.
Names
Form
Value
g?
bo OS
'^ S
<D O
O IH I O a
l-S ft ! 1-3 <s
O tfi
.9 o
Pronunciation
i^
14 SLo Sad
15 ! oLi Dad
I
16!&Lb Ta
17,gLb Za
18 ^jlc: 'Am
j
19 ^jjLC Ghain
20 , %\S Fa
21 Jli Kaf
22 JiyXaf
23 ll^ Lam
24 ' ^ Mim
25 (j*j Nun
26 ili Ha
27 ]|^ Waw
28 ^a Ya
e
o
o ^
^
J
^ 15
.«a
^
^
^
k
is
k
ib
«
*•
^
A
i
a.
s
a
<
JL
s
•*•
JO
A
j
■i.
56
X
J
empliatic S
(emphatic d(tongue
pressed against the
gum)
emphatic t
emphatic Z C/^
\ pro d uced h y a tight-
ening of the vie
lently compressed
glottis
guttural r
f
deep emphatic k
k
1
m
n
h
w
y
90
800
9
900
70
1000
^
80
100
20
30
40
50 3
5
6
10
THE VOWELS, HOW INDICATED.
forms of which are exhibited on pp. 4 — 5. These
signs are written and read from right to left. Some
are joined, to the letters preceding or following, others
are not, as indicated in the table referred to.
b. When 8 (No. 26), at the end of a word, indicates
the feminine termination (§ 73)^ two dots are placed
over it to show that it must be pronounced as t (Nr.
3) ; thus : H.
c. Very frequently, especially at the beginning of
words, certain letters, instead of being written along-
side of each other, are placed one above the other
this is particularly the case with the letters _ _ •
(Nos. 5—7), e. g. ^ for ^xj (Nos. 2 and 6), B?: (Nos.
5 and 6) for ^v^, :^ (Nos. 18 and 5) for ^sjld &c.
Instead of U (Nos. 23 and 1) the Arabs write !^ or *^
(the Lam in the latter form beginning at the left
of Alif).
2. The vowels^ how indicated. In the earliest times
^' the Arabs indicated only the long vowels a, J, ?7, and
the diphthongs au^ ai (whose second element they
regarded as a consonant); this was done by employing
the sign | (No. 1) for «, . (No. 27) for u and (with a)
au, (No. 28) for z and (with a) ai. In cases where .
and ^ indicate the sounds au and ai, which we pronounce
as diphthongs, Sukun (see § 3 c) is ordinarily placed
THE VOWEL SIGNS.
over these letters, to denote that they have no vowel
of their own. Examples: JU kala^ "Lkmj sira, 155-^
sukun, ^ bafun, ^yj naumun.
In the oldest writing, the long a was not uniformly 5.
represented by I, but was occasionally left unrepre-
sented. This omission has continued to be observed
in a series of very common words; in such cases,
however, an upright stroke is usually placed over the
consonant that is to be pronounced with the long a,
e. g. I j^ (for I6U0) hddd^ »}\ Hlahun (God), \ji'^\
rahmdnu. Frequently, however, in our printed editions,
we find this long a represented by a simple JL, thus:
l3ki hddd.y
In a few words a . after an a does not indicate c.
the pronounciation au but a long «, originally no doubt
an obscure «; in this case, too, the upright stroke is
I
the usual sign, e. g. 5«-jy2*. (alongside of sLx^) haydtun
life (but I with Suffixes: auLx:^ haydiuhu his life).
At the end of many words (^ is likewise employed d.
to represent a long d\ in such cases (like the . in c)
it does not receive the Sukiin (§ 3 c\ e. g. ^* (or
^C) ramd (he has thrown); in the middle of a word,
on the other hand, | takes the place of this ^^ ; thus
with a suffix sLo. ramdhu he has thrown it.
THE SHORT VOWELS.
Note a. In a few rare cases, in the middle of a word, we
find a denoted by j^ _!_, as in the foreign word *i)j? taurdtun Torah.
Note b. Should ^— be preceded by a j^, f is written for the
former in order to prevent two ^ coming together; e. g. tJj
dunyd world fiir ^^j (§ 74a).
e. Occasionally an | is added to a final u or «m, but
it is entirely left out of account in the pronunciation ;
e. g. SyjuiS' kaidbu^ Lxi. ramau (§§ 33 and 53).
3. The short vowels were originally, as a rule, left
^* unrepresented^; afterwards the following signs were
employed to represent the short vowels, and (in con-
junction with the signs discussed in § 2) the long
vowels as well:
1) k^Ci Fatha^ (also ^>JCi Fath) JL for a (in
certain cases to be pronounced like e in men, also
like German a in Manner), e. g. jJcS katala^ Jli kdla.
2) slwy^Kesra (also IsI^Kesr) ^for ?, e. g. vJa-*9-^
gadiba, «juo yabfu.
3) jC-*S Damma (also I^ Damm) _i_ for xi^ e. g.
v^^^jcXj yakiubu\ ^:y«-ftj yafutu.
h. When these signs for the short vowels are written
1 Many books, particularly those printed in the East, are
printed without these vowel signs.
2 The terminations « ^-, 8— are here represented in the trans-
literation by a, as in modern Arabic.
4. HAMZA.
twice at the end of a word, they are to be pronounced
with a final n (called by the Arabs j^.j^o Tanwin,
by us frequently Nunation, from the letter nun), e. g.
(j*fc4«Cw samsin, Jl^^ ragulun. The Nunation an receives
as an additional indication the letter I, but the pro-
nunciation remains unaffected, e. g. ^iLo malan. This
I is omitted only when the Nunation accompanies the
feminine termination 5 (see above § 1 2>), e. g. XjJyo
markuljatan ^ or in cases where the word already has
a final |, or in its place a ^ quiescing in «, e. g. G^ /
riban, ^jjo hudan (§ 2<f). The same holds good in //
most cases after Hamza (§ 4). The vowel of the Nu- ^
nation is always short.
When a consonant has no vowel of its own, this c.
is indicated Ixy the sign _1_ xiyi- Gezma (also called j
^^ JCw Sukun [Rest]) e. g. v:ijwiU« safartu^ ouuiJo mr/-
sflrZ/rt' (cf. § 2). On the omission of this sign see § 5.
A"' consonant which is thus pronounced without a
vowel following is said to be "resting".
Hamza. In order to distinguish the cases in which 4.
! was employed to denote a (§ 2), from those in which ^'
it had (as originally in Hebrew) its proper force as
a consonant, the Arabs gave it the additional sign
10 4. HAMZA,
hCjd Hamza ^ (in form a modified c 'Ain). I accord-
ingly denotes the closure of the larynx by which the
breath, engaged in voice production, is turned on or
off, according as the Hamza precedes or follows a
vowel. It is best heard in English before the second
of such pairs of words as "sea eagle", "mine eyes".
Its effect may also be noted by comparing the two
following pronunciations of Kuran, viz: Ku-ran and
Kur-'an (the latter with Hamza). In the translitera-
tion we indicate | by ' except at the beginning of a
word where no indication is required. The sign s> is
placed under the |, when followed by an /-sound.
Examples yoj ^amrun^ Jo! Hhilun, 4^\ ^umamun\ jUw
sa'ala^ ju-L ra'-sim; Iwb'l ik-ra\ In the last two exam-
ples Hamza closes the syllable.
Before or after an i- or w-sound, the signs . and
^ are generally employed instead of | as the bearers of
the Hamza, in which<case ^ is written without the two
dots: e. g. ^^j Wnsa, y^yj yu'taru, wj'lo yu^atjiru)
vi^As. gi'ta^ CA^ saHha, ^5^L1j yubdrfu.
After a long vowel, and in most cases after Suktin,
Hamza as a rule has no bearer, but is written on or
above the line, thus: eLoJ Hrda'un^ Eo (or jo)
bar'un. After a vowelless consonant in the middle of
5. TESDID. 11
a word, Hamza with its vowel is placed over the
connecting stroke (except, of course, when no such
connection is possible, as after . in 'i^yX^jo mamlu'atun),
thus: x-^iai^ hatVatun] in the same way Ljui sai'an\
On the other hand, in cases like sLd/sl 'imdd'an no
Alif is written at the end, cf. § 3 &.
Tesdid. That a consonant is to be sounded twice 5.
6 " ^ a.
is indicated by the sign of doubling *, named Jo Juiwo
Tesdid or jLi Sedd (from the initial Jjj of this word
the sign " has been derived), e. g. .^^^^u; 5«&&«, S^r>
tarahhulun. This doubling of a consonant is either due
— as in the examples just given — to the essential
nature of the form, nominal or verbal (as for example
the verbal forms corresponding to the Hebrew Ptel
§ 19), or is the result of assimilation.
When one consonant is assimilated to another, the h.
assimilation is further graphically represented by the
removal of the Sukun from the assimilated consonant.
This applies to the / of the article J I, when the latter
precedes one of the following consonants: ^:y, vi^, t>,
'^' )'> y LT' U*"' u^' U^' ^' ^' J' ij (^^^^^ ^^» dentals,
sibilants and r, /, n). Examples: Is^LJ I attdgiru^ ^^^\
attalgu^ (jjw^mxJI assamsu, (the sun), but ^iiUI alkamaru
(the moon). From the fact that the two last examples
12 6, WASLA.
are stereotyped those consonants that may be assimi-
lated are technically called solar letters, those that
do not admit of assimilation, lunar letters.
Note a. The word &)[ Hldhun, God, when joined to the article
drops the first syllable and becomes &U I (§ 2 b) alldhu.
Note b. The words ^ min, Ijs. 'an, ^] 'an (and ^| 'w), when
followed by a few words beginning with * w or J ^ are usually
combined with them into one word, the final ^^ n being at the
same time assimilated to the following consonant, e. g. l*-o mimmd
from U ^ min ma, V I 'alia from V ^I ^an Id.
6. Wasla '^. A. word beginning with two consonants
receives in Arabic either a full helping-vowel prece-
ded by Hamza in accordance with § 4« (e. g. ^ Jc^i I
Plato), or merely a vowel which is heard only when
the word is standing alone., but which must be given
up when the word in question comes to stand after
another word in the sentence. Thus in the latter
case we find Jj^'t uktul instead of Jjo ktul. The I
which is prefixed in this and similar cases is, however,
still written although the.helping vowel accompanying
it is given up, and it then receives over it the sign
a
o-o
aULoT wasla e. g. >->vZJI \::/J^ hintulrvaziri. The two
words thus united together are also to be pronounced
as if they formed a single word. Such an Alif Waslatum
or Wasla-bearing Alif is called a connective Alif in
6. WASLA. 13
contradistinction to a disjunctive Alif, that is, an Alif
hamzatum or Hamza-bearing Alif (cf. § 4).
Note. The sign ■* is a modification of jo; wasla or sila deno-
tes "close connection".
When a connective Alif has to be employed at h.
the beginning of a sentence, a full vowel must be •
pronounced, but, as written, only the proper vowel
sign may accompany the Alif, never a Hamza. Thus
we have J«»wJ! arrasidu, ^yi^\ uhrug but -,-yi*'! JU
pronounce kalahrug.
In the last example the division of the syllables c.
is now kd'lah-rug , If the vowel preceding a connec-
tive Alif is long, it must now be pronounced as a
short vowel, since it stands in a shut syllable (see
§ 8). Thus viJUliJI ^^, properly fi-lfulki^ has now the
following syllables fil-ful-ki] so too aJUl ^^n rida-llahi
(§ 2 rf) = ri-dal'ld-hi^ v;^ I t^<> (§ 2 e) da-ta-hul-iwazza.
If the word before a connective Alif ends in a d.
consonant which has no vowel of its own, the conso-
nant receives a helping-vowel. The most natural
vowel in such a case is e, e. g. jJjLI I oowo dardbati-
ra&^« (for oowo); so JLjLLwI istikhdlun with the ar-
tide J I: JLlftAAw^l alistikbdlu, in syllables thus: «-/w-
tik-ld-hi. In certain cases original final vowels that
14 6. WASLA.
have been dropped reappear before the connec-
tive Alif, e. g. ^^yi\j3\ *.fl> hu-mul-kd-fi-ru-na. The
first word is otherwise uniformly *jd hum (§ \2a). —
The Nunation (§ 3 h) is also treated as if it ended in
a consonant; the favourite vowel in this case is ?, e. g.
iLMwl Jc^s pronounced as if written x^^j j^JL^> r«^w-
lunismuhu, in syllables: ra-gu-lu-nis-mu-hu.
Note, Before a connective alif the preposition ^c "away
from" becomes ^JC, the preposition ^-o, "from" becomes ^ja, but
before the article qa.
e. The same rule applies to a word ending in a so-
called diphthong (cf. § 2) ; the consonant (. or ^)
forming the second part of the diphthong must receive
a helping vowel before a connective Alif, which vowel
is u or I according as the consonant in question is .
or ^. Thus we have aJLJI JihSajo mus-ta-fa-ivul-ld-hi
in place of xJLJI ysdij^, sJuJI J^zs^srig-Ia-yil-ba-ka-ra-
^« for 5 Juj I J^ V (So, too, with the termination L_:L
NoTE. The particles ^I "or" and ^' "would that!" take i as
helping vowel.
/. The connective Alif is altogether omitted in the
following cases:
7. MEDDA. 15
1) In the article J|, when it receives as prefixes
the particles J^ li or J /«; e. g. |S..^vJU, lil-hak-ki for
;3^3J!^, tXsc^JU lal-mag-du for tX^xJ^.
Q O
2) In ^1 son, in apposition to the proper name
of the son and followed in the genitive by the name
of the father; e. g. JuJlll ^ *JLLo mus-li-mub-nul'
rva-U-di Muslim, the son of al-Walid. At the beginn-
ing of a line, however^ even in this case we must write
S o
3) In the word ^^^\ ismun, name, after the prepo-
sition lo bi in the oft recurring formula aJU! *-wkO bis-
mil-ld-hi^ in the name of God.
Medda. Inasmuch as the Arabic orthography 7.
cannot tolerate two Alifs side by side, in such a case ^'
only a single Alif is written, over which is placed a
G C5 ^ -_
idJo Medda or Medd, (a sign derived from Joo). At
the beginning of a word or syllable the Medda carries
with it the force of a Hamza; the vowel sign Fath is then
also dropped, e. g. J^l 'd-ki-lun for J^t |, ^\js kur-d-
nun for ^llo; so ^\ 'd-ma-na for ^jct I, since the
Hamza of the second Alif disappears as explained
§ 38«.
16 8. THE SYLLABLE.
Note. ^I^ ra'a may be taken as an example of the rule just
given. With suffixes it ought to appear, according to § 2^, as
811^, which, however, is written 81^ in syllables ra-a-lm.
b. Since a ^ after a long a |I__ is written on the line
(§ 4c) without receiving an Alif as bearer, the | pre-
ceding the Hamza in such cases likewise receives
Medda, as a rule, although the latter has no effect on
the pronunciation of the word, e. g. ^\^ gd-a (for
ILi.), SJ^tXjiS ta-fd-a-lu] and the same where • or ^
appears as the bearer of Hamza 5. UL^I a-Mb-ba-u-
hu, Jo Li' kd'i-lun.
Note. Arabic orthography has also an objection to two Waws
appearing side by side, if the first has a Damma (even though
the first may be only the bearer of a Hamza, as expained in § 4 c).
Thus ^;«*55) tu usun is often written j-5).
8. The Syllable. An open syllable ends in a vowel
short or long; a shut syllable ends in a consonant.
Every syllable begins with a single consonant, not
with two or more (cf. § 6). A short syllable consists
of a consonant with a short vowel, as in the second
syllable of c^lJo md-td (with two open syllables); a
long syllable consists either 1) of a consonant with a
long vowel, like the open syllable md in the above
example, or 2) of a consonant, a short vowel and a con-
sonant (shut syllable) e. g. both the syllables of
9. THE TONE. 17
J^x5 kat-lun (so too v^y^ mau-tun § 2«) j^w sar-ran^
or 3) of a shut syllable with a long vowel. This last
variety, however, is only found (exclusive of pausal
effects § 10) when the following consonant has been
doubled (§ 5) and is preceded by a long «, as in jblo
dab-da-tun (rarely after ai as in RajIJ du-rvaib-ba-tun
which is derived according to § 66 from ddbbatu?i).
Such a syllable may be described as doubly long.
Other syllables of this sort are shortened as Jjb ijakul
from JjJb yakul\ o».x)^ ramat from ^:i>Uoj ramdt.
Note. A word consisting of but one short syllable, if it stands
alone, either receives an addition at the end (see §49a6), or is
joined to the following word. The latter method is adopted in a
series of particles (see § 94), which notwithstanding the connec-
tion are still regarded as more or less independent words. The
principal stress, however, rests on the words with which the par-
ticles are connected.
The Accent or Tone. The accent in Arabic is thrown 9.
backwards towards the beginning of the word till it
meets a long syllable, or if there is no such syllable,
till it reaches the first syllable of the word. A simple
long syllable at the end of a word, however, does not
receive the accent. Examples of words with a final
short syllable: C>^Li daraba^ •SjXjmS istdnkara\ with
a final long syllable: Ujc^-^J tamdmtumd, 4>^ fdrdun,
xXJUjo mdmlakatun, IjJwo ddrabu, sjj lidatun.
Socin, Arabic Grammar.* 2
18 10. PAUSE. 11. NUMERICAL SIGNS. ABBREVIATIONS.
Exceptions: A syllable with a connective Alif (§ 6),
"jo'
as in Joi'l (see § 6«), cannot receive the accent; the
pronunciation is therefore uktiiJ. In the same way
monosyllabic inseparable particles, like : and ^ (cf.
§ 94), prefixed to words, do not affect the accentuation
of the latter ; e. g. ^-coii famdsa.
10, In pause final short vowels are dropped. Also
the Nunation un and in\ the Nunation an is changed
to a, the feminine termination k " to 5^ (with the h
sounded): thus ^oJsb ndzilun for (OjJsLj ndziluna\
Jls..^ ragul for Jkir ragulun\ IJliw.jo marhaM for Lla.*^
marlial)an\ }s,^\S Fdtimah for H-ilbLi-
11. Numerical Signs and Abbreviations. The usual Arabic
cyphers are the following:
♦, t, t', t", 1^, e, % V, A, ^
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9.
The tens, hundreds &c., are written to the left of
the units &c. as H 19, tA^d 1895.
The following are a few of the most frequently
occurring abbreviations :
^ = *!^LIlJI xjJLi V/to'^/-55«/<2mw Peace be upon him !
*.*JLo = aJLwI itJJLc aJU! Jlo salla-lldhu ^alaihi
wasallama God bless him and give him peace (said of
Mohammed).
12. THE PEOXOUN. 19
n. ETYIMOLOGY (§§ 12—96).
Chapter I. The Pronoun. (§§ 12—15.)
The personal pronouns are either independent or 12
suffixed. The independent or separate personal pro- ^'
nouns have the following forms:
I. Pers.
11. Pers. \
III. Pers.
XoTE 1. The second syllable of the pronoun of the first pers.
singular, although written with I, is short. — The forms in pa-
rentheses (2^^ and Z^^ pers. plural) are used particularly before
Wasla (§ 6d); these final vowels are originally long.
Note 2. When joined to 3 and i»3 (see § 95) the pronouns of
the 3^^ pers. sing, may lose their first vowel e. g. 5^3' \J^'
The suffixed personal pronouns^ which joined to a h.
noun indicate the genitive, joined to a verb, the ac-
cusative, are the following:
Sing.
Plur.
Dua
masc. ,::»S|
fern, oi 1
30^
i''A\ "'A
U^l
masc. ye
fem. Ip
(^)^}
^
Ui
20
12. THE PRONOUN.
Sing.
Plur.
I.
Pers.
[ with nouns ;^-j-
1 with verbs ^ —
Q
II.
Pers.
masc. 0 —
fem. 0 —
III.
Pers.
f masc. 8 —
fem. be —
Dual
IJ-
Ui
Before a connective Alif (§ 6 d) the suffix pron. of
the 1. pers. singular may receive as helping-vowel the
a which belonged to it originally; thus we may write
CjUXJI (c^Ua^^t oi' i-jUjOI ^lii£:|. After 6f, F and
ai the nominal suffix of the 1. pers. sing, has the form
^ ya. Occasionally (in the Kur'an particularly) the
suffix of the 1. pers. sing, is indicated by a simple i,
of which the sign is Kesr , as Cj^ my lord! In
the same way the corresponding verbal suffix may
be only ^ ni.
After an immediately preceding i or ai the suffixes
», Lii, Aifi, J^ substitute the vowel i for w, thus
assuming the forms s, U^, I^, J^; e. g. ^JLo instead
of aJUo. Before the connective Alif Is^ generally
becomes ^. — The suffixes 15 and li resume
13. THE DEMONS TRATI\TS PRONOUNS. 21
their original forms J^emd ^ before a connective
Alif.
For further information regarding the affixing of
these pronominal forms see § 82 and the table of
paradigms No. XXIII.
The reflexive pronoun, when carrying a certain e.
amount of emphasis with it, is generally expressed
by the word j^Ju nafsun soul, to which the proper
suffixes are appended. In many cases, however, the
personal pronoun suffices to express the reflexive.
The demonstrative pronouns are the following (with 13.
their inflexion compare § 76«).
The simple pronoun (rare) a.
Masc. Fem.
Sing. Vo ^b, 5J; ^S iu; Ij
Dual ( ^°'"- ^t ^H
I Gen. Ace. ^^j j ^jjlS
Plur. j^l iuUi) or £^f^| (iiUCi)
This simple pronoun combines:
(1) with the demonstrative particle Li, generally
f
written defectively (5> or less correctly i § 2&). The
result is the usual demonstrative pronoun to indicate
that which is near at hand {this, these):
22 13. THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
Masc.
Fern.
Sing. (^tXiO
( " '
Norn. ^ItXso
Dual \ y^ ^ ,
Gen. Acc./^cV.«
Plur. i
The simple demonstrative
combines (2) with a
suffix of the second person. Only in the older Arabic,
particularly that of the Kur'an, however, does the
suffix vary according to the number of persons ad-
dressed (e. g. plur. Ixlo, dual UXJ(^), elsewhere it
appears uniformly as vil. There is also a form with
J before cJ. The result is two forms of the demon-
strative pronoun to indicate that which is more remote
(that, those)\
^-^asc. Fem. _^
Sing. dl j,(^Jp(4!lS, ^iS) / dU (^0 (^ilW
Dual
Nom. dbf j, diSt j vjjlj, vii}LS
Gen. Ace. dUoD, vJCoo *i*4-v^*j ^^'
. i
Plur. k^^^\{^i^\), rarely dJ^;^
(i. Among the demonstratives we must also place the
article J I (see § 5 &). When the noun, in the circumstances
14, THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS . 23
detailed in § 6/1, begins with a J, this letter has a
Tesdid placed over it and the J of the article is drop-
-■(,53 ^ (J a -o ii>
ped. Thus we get XJLvJiJ for xJLJJ^; so too xJJ for
dib (§ 5 note).
The relative pronouns are the following: 14.
^(Xi\ who, which, that, — originally a compound a.
demonstrative with the article as one of its elements
(hence the connective Alif) — declined as follows:
Masc. Fern.
Sing. 00^ C^y^
[ Gen. Ace. ijjJJJI ^^^4^'
piur. (^^.4jjy/^^-ijC^^i;Ij1
/^<jjo (indeclinable) one who, such (a one) as, he h.
who, those who.
^Lc (indeclinable) that which, something which.
Among the relative pronouns may also be included c.
j<|, fem. RjI he who, she who. This word is declinable
in the sing., but the masc. often takes the place of
the fem. It also combines with the prons. in & above
to form ,!mjI every one who, whosoever; and U-sj
whatsoever.
24 15. THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 16. 17. THE VERB.
15. The interi'ogatlve pronouns are:
/y ^ who?
I Lo what? Frequently strengthened by the addition
of the demonstrative 13: 13 Lo what then?
^1, fern, abl what sort of? which?
Note. U after prepositions is shortened to * e. g. J why?
"With this interrogative U is also connected the interrogative
particle iT how much?
Chapter II. The Verb. (§§ 16-54.)
16. The great majority of Arabic verbs have three
radical letters ; only a small minority have four radi-
cals. The ground-form of verbs, according to which
they are arranged in grammar and dictionary, is the
third person singular of the perfect. The verb JJti
(to do) is used as a model paradigm.
Note. Since all Arabic dictionaries give the verbal and no-
minal derivatives under their respective root-forms, it is necessary,
in order to find the three radicals with ease, to note carefully what
consonants are employed in the formation of verbs and nouns as
prefixes and affixes to, and as infixes in, the stem.
17. From this ground-form or root, which is named
by grammarians the first stem, other stems are deri-
' ved by a series of uniform changes, represented by
18. THE FIRST STEM. 25
modifications of the verb Jkii, but usually referred
to by their respective numbers in the series. Thus
we speak of "the eighth stem", (indicated in the dic-
tionary simply by YIII) not as in Hebrew and Syriac
of the Piel, the Afel &c. The following stems, the
order of which must be carefully noted, are those
most frequently met with:
I Jii
IV Joiil
VII Juuli.
^ — 0 - 0
X jL»ii«,l
II Jlii
V S^
VIII JixM
XI JLiij)
II jiu
Vljilii'
(ix jobr
Note a. Of these No. IX and especially No. XI are of less
frequent occurrence; still more rare are XII Jcj*5|, XIII Jj^^I,
XIV JiS^^I , XV ^JU*il. Which of these derived stems are formed
from any given verb, and to what extent the meaning of the ground-
form is modified by them, will be found in the dictionary under
each verh.
Note b. In many cases the verb is used to express the idea
that some one wishes to do something or has something done;
thus «JU5 "he killed him'' may also signify "he wished to kill him",
J^O s ^ ^ ^
and iAiic s^yh "he cut off his head (prop, neck)" may mean "he
had (ciiravit) his head cut off."
The ground-form I, in the majority of verbs, takes 18.
the form Jkjii, e. g. JcajJ to kill; there is also — mostly
with intransitive verbs — a form Joti (cf. 153), e. g.
^jyi to be sad, J^ to do (transitive), and also a
26 19, 20. THE II. AND III. STEMS.
form J,*i (cf. p])) , confined to intransitive verbs, as
^jumj^ to be beautiful. Sometimes both the transitive
and intransitive forms, J^ii and Juti or J.ii, are
found side by side in the same verb. One and the
same verb, again, may have both the forms J^«i and
Ski.
19. The II. stem J^ii (corresponding to the Hebrew
Pi"el) usually denotes a greater intensity of the action
expressed by the simple verb. This intensification
may affect the subject, object or qualifying adjunct,
as Jlr to kill many people, to massacre (intensi-
fication of the object). In the majority of verbs,
however, the IL_stem is causative as lli to know,
^a ^ ———————— I
IJLi cause to know, to teach. It is also declarative —
as in ^j^ to lie, v.^J^to take one for, declare one
to be, a liar — and denominative, as in ^J;^xs^ to collect
an army (jio-v^).
20. The III. stem J.^li expresses an attempt or effort
to perform the action of the simple verb on some per-
son, to influence some person or thing. Thus JociJ to
kill, but JoU* to try to kill, to fight with ; ^Uc5^to
write, v2^J*L^ to correspond with (with accusative of
21, 22. THE IV. AND V. STEMS. 27
the person corresponded with). This stem also means
to exercise some abstract quality on a person or thing,
e. g. rjNf to be soft, gentle, ^Twj^ to exercise gentleness
on some one, to treat one kindly.
The IV. stem jjtit (the Hebrew HipVil) has a 21.
causative signification, as ^JLo to be in good condi-
tion, ^JLol to bring into good condition. Very
frequently we find, with this stem, denominative verbs
which appear to us as intransitive, but to the Arab
as possessing an implicit transitive force, and which
express the idea of action in a certain definite direction,
as ^jwwu^j^l to do good. Frequently, too, verbs of this
stem c_onvey_the idea of going to a place, of entering
upon a certain period or condition; e.g. CjZ^I to go
towards the West, ^-ye! to enter upon the period of
the morning, to be something in the morning, OwCij
to reach the top^ to be high; lUi (from lU* rise up,
stand) to halt, to stay.
The V. stem Jii^ (Hebrew Hithpa'^el), a sort of 22.
middje. voice is formed from the 11. stem and has both a
reflexive and a reciprocal meaning, e. g. llio to make
one's self great, llij to let one's self be taught, to
learn. Sometimes a verb in the V. stem conveys the
28 23, 24, 25. THE VI., VII. and VIIL stems.
idea of giving one's self out as something, e. g. Llli*
to give one's self out for, to conduct one's self as, a
prophet.
23. The VL stem jiLb, derived from the ITT, stem, is
the reflexive form oi the latter, and has a reflexive or
reciprocal signification, as l^L^* to show one's self bold ;
JjLftj* to fight one another (usually in the plural).
Another signification is seen, for example, in JLij, VI
form of ^Lc^ to be high, which means to exalt one's
self and then simply: to be exalted.
24. The VII. stem Jiiil (the Hebrew NipVal with
the connective Alif ace. to § Qa), derived in most cases
from the I. stem, is a middle or reflexive form of the
latter. Its signification may also be described as
quasi-passive, e. g. 1^ to break l^Ljol, to break or
be broken in pieces.
25. The VIIL stem j^ixil, (with connective Alif § 6«)
is likewise a middle and reflexive form, for the most
part of the I. stem, as (jiljCfi^l , to oppose one's self,
object to; sometimes also with reciprocal signification
as |V-oJC^J, to dispute, contend with each other.
Note. In the case of verbs whose first radical is jo, j5, b
or 15, the Cf of the VIII. stem is changed to the emphatic h, and
26, 27. THE IX. AND X. STEMS. 29
is even assimilated to the first radical, when that letter is a dental
as (r.;hot, instead of j-^ol from j^; JUil or Jls] for JUI3I from
— * -• . " *'''''- ..s
Jll3; kl> is sometimes assimilated also to a preceding ki», e. g. C-Mjf
or C*-Jl from C^ properly wUaXiI; after J, o and 3 C* is changed
into the soft o, e. g. jIj^I for JU3I from J\'y, ^yj\ for ^^Jl.
The IX. stem Juiif (as also the XI. stem JLiil,26.
hoth with connective Alif) is used of verbs which
denote the possession of inherent qualities such as
colours or bodily defects, e. g. from the stem uuo:
ljJa\ to be or become yellow; from the stem .^: Tl^l
to be one-eyed; from the stem 5-*^^: ^Li^l to be red.
The X. stem JutA;:**.!, (with connective Alif) is 27.
primarily a reflexive of the IV. Jmi! (otherwise a
reflexive, formed on the analogy of the YIII. stem, from
a stem JolLu; with a prefixed 5), as from the stem (ji^^«
IV. ^^^\ to grieve: X. ^^iw^yuJ to grieve (ones
self). Very frequently the X. stem denotes also to
wish or to beg something for one's self, e. g. from ^Jl^S
to pardon, X.: wA*a*w[ to ask for pardon; or to think
that something is so, as vIa^Z to be necessary, IV:
^jwrs^jl to make necessary, X: .^^^jijJi to consider
something as necessary for one's self.
30 28. THE QUADPaLIT. STEMS. 29. THE PASSIVE. 30. THE TENSES.
28. The quadriliteral stems are denoted, for tlie verbal
and nominal forms, by the paradigm jJui (that is
by the addition of a fourth radical to Jkii), and con-
sist for the most part of two stems, of which the first
may be said to correspond to the second stem of the
triliteral verb (for Joii is in reality JJtii), and the
second Jiiij to the fifth, e. g. vJ^Xls to overturn,
cast down, v«JCaXj fall down.
Note. The stems III JJU^I and IV Jlx^l (the last corre-
sponding to the IX. stem of the triliterals) are rare e. g. ^jUbl, to
be quiet, from a stem ^^W^.
29. In addition to the active^ the Arabic verb has a
passive voice. This passive is formed in the perfect
in such a way that in place of the «!-vowels of the
active we have the order u-i-a (i with the second, a
with the third radical); thus the act. of stem 1. is
Juti, the pass: Jjii. The additional formative syllables
of the derived stems also receive the vowel w, e. g.
pass. V. J^iftj, VIII Jk*JCi! (with connective Alif).
30. The Arabic verb has two principal tenses, a. perfect
^' which, generally speaking, denotes a completed action,
and an imperfect which in general denotes an uncom-
pleted action.
.SITY
31. THE MOODS. Vs,^;^^^^
The imperfect is formed by adding the prefix S ya h.
for the active of the L, V., YL, VII., YIII., IX. and
X. stems, and the prefix j yu for the active of the
II., III. und IV. stems, and for the passive of all the
stems without exception.
In the case of verbs of which Juti is the type, the c.
s^cond^dical, in the impf. act, of stem I.^ may receive
one or other of the vowels w, i, a. Which of the three
must be used for a particular verb will be found
indicated in the dictionary under that verb (e. g. Jlo
impf. u) and should be taken careful note of. Those
verbs, on the other hand, of which Joii (with e-vowel)
is the type, together with all passives point their second
radical with a only, thus impf. act. I. JJLa.); pass. JJtij.
Those verbs, finally, of which Joii (with 2/-vowel) is the
type, take u with the second radical for the imperfect.
As regards the active imperfect of the derived stems,
the second radical takes i throughout, with the excep-
tion of stems V. and VI. where it takes «; thus impf.
II. Jlxaj but V. JJtlo.
In the imperfect various Moods are distinguished, 31.
namely the ordinary mood which we call the indicative,
the dependent mood or subjunctive, and a modus apo-
copatus (sometimes called the jussive). These are
32 32. THE IMPERATIVE.
distinguished as follows: in the indicative the last
radical, when final, always takes u, as impf. I JJtAj,
III. JlcLL; in the subjunctive always a^ as J^*ij,
while in the apocopatus the third radical is vowelless.
In addition to the above there is a double modus
energicus, which is formed by a^Dpending the syllables
anna or an (in some forms only 7i) to the impf. as
' a -^"i^ . T-^-
jjJ.JUlJ or ^Xxsu.
Note. As the modus energicus is of comparatively rare
occurrence, it is given in the tables of paradigms only in the case
of the ordinary strong verb. From the examples there given it
may easily be formed for the other verbs,
32. The imperaiive agrees with the apocopated imper-
fect as regards vocalisation and termination, except
that the prefixes ya or yu are wanting. In the imper.
of the I. stem a helping vowel (therefore with connec-
tive Alif § 6 fl!) is prefixed in all cases where the first
consonant is without a vowel of its own. This vowel
disappears, however, in pronunciation as soon as the
word ceases to stand alone, e. g. JJiil but ^\ jU'.
The same applies to stems VII. — X. The imperative
has the same energetic bye-forms as the imperfect.
IstoTE. In the imper. of stem I the prosthetic vowel is u when
the second radical has u, as ^y3], but i when it is pointed with
a or i, as Jx^I, ^31.
33. NUMBER, PREFIXES AND AFFIXES. 33
Note b. In the imper. of the IV. stem the prosthetic T, which
is characteristic of the stem, is retained, although it disappears
after the prefixed i of the impf. Hence impf. J^ (for J*JVi),
but imper. J«il.
In the perfect, imperfect and imperative, there 33.
are, in addition to the singular and plural, dual forms
for the second and third persons. Verbs are inflected
by the addition of modified and abbreviated forms
of the personal pronouns, and of the dual and plural
terminations of nouns, to the ground-forms J^xi and
JJLftj (for the terminations ani and una of the impf.
indie, vid. § 76 «). The terminations just named, along
with the ending ma of the 2. pers. fem. sing.,
drop the syllables ni and na in the subjunctive, the
apocopated imperfect and the imperative. The I, which
appears in the paradigm after the final . _!_ in the
perf. and in these shortened forms of the impf. and
imper., has no phonetic value (cf. § 2e).
As to the prefixes of the impf., it is to be noted
that in place of the prefix j of the 3. pers. masc, we
have s as the prefix of the 2. pers. sing, and plur.,
and of the 3 pers. fem. of the sing., | to indicate the
1. pers. sing., and j the 1. pers. plur.
The affixes emplo^-ed in the inflexion of the verb are given
in paradigm I.
Socin, Arabic Grammar^. 3
34 34. VERBS MEDIAE GEMINATAE.
Note a. In the V. and VI. forms of verbs whose first letter
is a dental or a sibilant, the formative prefix occasionally drops
its vowel and is assimilated to the first radical of the verb, in
which case the perf. and imper. have a helping vowel (§ 6) prefixed
6. g. yJl wrap one's self up, impf. y>^.
Note b. In the impf. of these two stems, the prefix 5 may
be treated in such a way that instead of the two syllables S?
only <f remains, e. g. from JX9 2. pers. msc. impf. V. j:^ for J^^a^.
Note c. In the impf. VII. and VIII. stems the tone remains
on the same syllable on which it falls in the perf., contrary to
the rule laid down in § 9 ; thus J^Saj J!^ yankcitilu, ydktatilu.
For the conjugation of the strong verb with three radicals
see paradigms II, III and V, for that of the quadriliteral verbs
see paradigm IV. In the paradigms the participles and infinitives
are also given, although the discussion of these forms has been
deferred to §§ 60 and 61. -
34. Among the ordinary strong verbs must also be
reckoned the so-called verbs mediae gemindtae^ i. e.
verbs whose second and third radicals are identical.
A contraction of these last two radicals takes
place in all those cases in which
a. 1) the first, second and third radicals have each
a short vowel; in this case the vowel of the second
radical is always dropped, e. g. ^i (to flee) contracted
from Tli (which statement is not to be understood
as implying that a form Tli once really existed in
Arabic) 3. p. perf. pass. I. Is from Iwi; 3. p. impf.
VII. ^ji-o from .^^;
35j 36. VERBS MEDIAE GEMIXATAE. 35
2) When the first two radicals have each a short, h.
and the third a long, vowel, e. g. 3. p. dual masc.
perf. Ci from CCi;
3) Generally also when the first radical has a long c.
rt, e. g. 3. s. m. perf. of the III. stem Xi contracted from
rrU (which is also found), passive ^sys-
When the first radical is vowelless and the second 35.
has a short vowel, then contraction takes place and
the vowel of the second radical passes over to the
first. Thus 3. pers. impf. act. ^aj for .Ju, ; pass. Ju
from »^.
When the third radical is vowelless, there is no 36.
contraction in the body of the word: e. g. 2. pers. sing.
masc. perf. act. visli; 3. pers. plur. fern. impf. act.
^ O " ^
..^jL). But when the third radical stands at the end
of a verbal form with no vowel following, as in various
forms of the apocopated impf. and the 2. pers. sing.
masc. of the imper., we find the full forms ;vAj, ;vil
only in the dialects. As a rule contraction takes place
and an additional vowel is assumed at the end in
order to preserve the doubling of the radical; thus
we have ^aj, ji, from 4>. imper. jy
36 37. HAMZATE VERBS.
Note. In the case of verbs of the forms J^ and J^ the
vowel of the second radical appears only in the uncontracted form
6. g. J^ to loathe, 1. pers. perf. oJULo; hence the vowel a of the
impf. J^..
For the conjugation of verbs mediae geminatae see paradigms
Nos. VI— VIII; model verb p to flee.
37. Those verbs that have a Hamza j^ as first, second
or third radical are for the most part regular, as 31 to
> ^^ -^-^ ^^"^
make an impression, impf. wjL>; |^* to read, impf. |^.
In certain cases we find, according to § 4&, * or ,^
(without points) as bearers of the Hamza, or ^^ may
stand without a bearer, thus 3. s. m. perf. act. »1aa5^
to be sad, yjw«j to be brave; 3. s. m. impf. passive of
3*1: yJjj; 3- sing. masc. perf. act. \n^ to err, fem.
c^A^i; 3. s. m. impf. act. of JLI to ask: J^J!o. Oc-
casionally an I takes the place of two Alifs, according
to § 7; e. g. 3. s. m. perf. III. of pT: 3 for 3||; VI.
of l!^ (bind up a wound &c.) 1:&^S".
38. While in all these cases the j> may easily be distin-
guished as the third radical of the verb, there are a
few forms in which the verba hamzata are more diffi-
cult to distinguish, inasmuch as the * sometimes
entirely disappears; from this point of view these
verbs ought rather to be reckoned among the weak
38. HAMZATE VERBS. 37
verbs (§ 39 ff.). The most important of such cases
are the following:
1) After !, I, I (also after a connective Alif |, |, I a.
at the beginning of a sentence) ^ gives up its power
as a consonant (cf. § 7); hence, in place of 'a\ V, Y
^-^ —
simply '^, \i, % e. g. 3. s. m. perf. IV. of Ji\: >.j| for
^-^^ --.^ . ^ ^
IjII; 3. s. m. perf. pass. IV. of yj\ is ^i* | in place of
J>^ I. So also imper. I. J^j,[ for wiSj.
2) In the imper. of the I. form the verbs J^( b.
take, J^l eat, ^^1 order, drop the ^ altogether: JLi&-,
Jl^ yjo ; in the same way, from JLw to ask, the impera-
tive is either JLuj or JlL &c.
Note. Should 3 or 3 come to stand as inseparable particles
(§ 87) before one of the imperatives under a, the prosthetic Alif
is dropped and the radical Hamza reappears, receiving, as its
bearer, an Alif on account of the preceding Fath, as in p\}. The
same holds good in the case of two separate words: thus 4^5!
i -
3. s. m. perf. pass. VIII of ^^^I connected with a preceding word
becomes Q^^) ^jJI elladi-tumina.
3) In the VI. form the ^ of verbs primae ^ is c.
sometimes changed to ., as wo!i> in place of CoU
(for^lb).
4) In the VIII. form the > of the verb ^<L^ is d
38 39. THE WEAK VERBS. 40. VERBS PRIMAE 5 AND ^.
assimilated to the following 5, the result being j*, as
4\i*| instead of an original jk^SJ, impf. tX^o, but
" ^ ^^ -
from wil, to order, w.ajI
For the conjugation of the verba hamzata see paradigm IX.
The Weak Verbs.
39. The weak verbal stems are those having a . or
a j< as first, second or third radical; under inflection
these semivowels in some cases resolve themselves into
full vowels, in others they are treated as consonants.
40. The Verbs primae . and ^ differ from the strong
verbs in the following points:
a. 1) In the impf. and imper. of the I stem a number
of verbs primae . surrender their first radical and
take the vowel i with their second (cf. ^b']), as jJ.
to bring forth^ impf. jJLS, imper. jj.
h. 2) Under the influence of a guttural a few verbs
take a in place of i with their second radical, drop-
ping the ., however, like the others, as i.^^ to lay,
impf. «^j; so *i^ to fall, C^^ to give and others
(see the dictionaries).
c. 3) In verbs primae (^, jj_ is changed to i7, e. g.
the impf. IV of iaiG to be awake, properly Joajo, be-
comes iaio.
41, 42. VERBS MEDIAE 5 AND ^. 39
4) In the VIII. stem the first radical of verbs d.
primae . and ^ is assimilated to the following ^^^
e. g. from ji^ to promise, Juij] for Job'^l (cf. § 38<?).
Note. A few verbs of the form ^yti also give up the first
radical in the imperf. as >^f^ to inherit, impf. >l»yi (cf. § 18).
For the conjugation of the verbs primae 5 and ^ see para-
digm X where will be found the principal forms of the verbs
J-tf3 to arrive, ^J^ to leave, ^5 to be dirty, Ja-^ to be anxious,
jj*-3 to be sleepy, ^-*i to be easy.
Verbs mediae ^ and ^. In the II., III., V., VI. 41.
and IX. stems, . and are treated as consonants,
and the inflexion is the same as that of the strong
verb; thus 3. s. m. perf. II of JIS* (to say) med. ,:
J^", 3. s. m. perf. Ill of *Lww (to travel) med. ^: oLL.
In the other stems these verbs are inflected according
to the following rules:
Long a takes the place of the middle radical: 42.
in the perf. active of the I., IV., VII., VIII. and a.
X. stems, as Jli, Jlil, JUlj, JUciJ, ^\JCk1\\
in the impf. passive of the same stems, as JLL, JL1>, h,
in the impf. active of VII. and VIII., as JLsij, JLiL ; c,
in the impf. active of the I. stem of verbs of the d.
form Joti e. g. oL^ to fear, impf. oL^.
40 43, 44. VERBS MEDIAE ^ AND ^,
43. Long J takes the place of the middle radical:
a. in the perf. passive of the L, IV., VII., VIII. and
X. stems as Jur, J^a^I, J-aajI) J-^'I? J..>s3^Cwwl5
^). in the impf. active of IV. und X., as Juaj, Jl^axa^j ;
' c. in the impf. active of verbs med. ^, as ^.juao.
The corresponding form of verbs med. ., on the other
hand, takes long ?/, as J«.iij.
Note. The nature of the phonetic changes just detailed will
be more readily understood from the standpoint of the strong •
verb if it be noted that 5 , i , 5 , i ; 5 , i pass
into a; 5 , 5 , ^ , f^ into *; j into m. It is not
meant by this that the corresponding strong forms were ever
really found, in these verbs, at any period of the language.
44. The whole of the long vowels mentioned in
§§ 42 — 43 are shortened (§ 8) in a shut syllable, e. g.:
2. s. m. perf. act. IV. of JIS* and TLl: v:;Jj| and
ojAwl;
^i 0^9
3. sing. masc. apoc. impf. pass. I J^L, y^^ (with
the tone on the last syllable as if contravening § 9).
2. pers. masc. sing, imper. I. of oLi> (§ 42</):
(but plur. !^l^);
2. pers. masc. sing. perf. pass. oJ^;
3. pers. sing. masc. apoc. impf. act. IV. Jiaj ;
T " V
2. pers. sing. masc. imper. I: wa«, Jo.
45, 46. VERBS ULTIMAE 5 AND ^. 41
In the perf. acthe of I, verbs med. . take u where
-we should expect a, (cf. pipj?) as iJU, while verbs
med. ^ take 2, as iiv«- ; « is also found in verbs of
the form J^xi, as owi^ from ^L^ (for a theoretical
J-
Note a. Instead of the apocop. impf. ^J;Xj> &c. from jjV,to be,
we sometimes find the still shorter form JO.
Note b. From a few verbs med. % and ^ strong forms
are found in stems I., IV., YIIL, X.; e. g. IV. ^ja.) compel; X.
k^y^a:iml to find correct, a denominative form from ^]ya correct.
For[^the conjugation of these verbs see paradigms XI — XIV.
Verbs ultimae * and ^. Verbs ultimae . pass into 45.
ultimae ^^ in all the derived stems, and in the perf.
and impf. passive of the 1 stem; thus from .ya we
have 3 s. m. perf. II ;^Lc. The same applies to the
active of stem I of the form JjJ; thus'LoT becomes
^^r (to have pleasure in).
If the second radical has «, this vowel is changed 46.
in every case into a long final a. In order to distinguish ^'
the stems ult. ^ from those ult. . this final a is in the
former case indicated by (^, in the latter by ! (this
applies only to the 3. s. m. perf. act. I). Thus SI to
throw, iCjt carry on a war ; but II. ^T, ^\is. &c. Similarly
42 46. VERBS ULTIMAE ^ AND ^.
in the imperfects (cf. § 45), e. g. indie, and subj. pass. II
^1) (in place of a theoretical j^^ols and Zi^vj) ; impf.
act. I of ^s, (^v:>; impf. act. V. ^aJk^^.
Note. With the same reservation as mider § 43c note, we
would call attention to the fact that the combinations 5 , ^5 ,
5——, y£ all pass into long a.
h. In all the cases mentioned in the preceding sub-
section, a diphthong (§ 2 a) appears before the in-
flectional additions that begin with a consonant. Thus:
2. sing. masc. perf. act. I \^/jo\ ; from lyi : vci.Cc ; II
c. In the case also of the inflectional additions 2?,
una, ma (and its shortened form «), the a of the second
radical, (after the elision of the third radical) unites
with their initial vowel to form a diphthong. Thus:
3. pers. masc. plur. perf. act. I. \yos, ^V^' ^^* ^^P^-
pass. II. i^Joyj), subj. I^^l); do. act. I. ^y^J>, V.
(jyowicj; 2. pers. fem. sing, of the last ^j^lx.j, subj.
d. Before the dual terminations a and afii the last
radical of this class of verbs is treated as a strong
letter, e. g. 3. pers. perf. act. I. LCvoT, Ijy^; impf. pass.
II. ^Cv^^ ^^' -^y ^^® addition of the termination at,
47. VERBS ULTIMAK 5 AND ^5. 43
the 3. pers. fern. sing, of the perfect must originally
have ended in dt\ this ending, however, has now become
at in accordance with § 8, as v^^; ^SL. According
to the analogy of the above is also formed the 3. pers.
fem. of the dual; thus we find LiX, Ij^ (where we
should expect liUoT, LSlyc.).
• In the impf. active of stem I, verbs ult. . of the 47.
form JoiS take an w, those ult. ^ an ?", the third
radical quiescing in these vowels. The ending u of the
imperf. is lost, e. g. ^\Ju, {S^r?.- "^^^ imperfects active
of the derived forms (with the exception of V and VI)
are formed on the model of the last mentioned forms,
as II ^o, (^Cij and so on.
Note. With the same reservation as under § 43 c note, it
may be pointed out that ^ passes into ii, ^ into %.
Affixes beginning with a consonant are appended &•
in every case to the i or the u just mentioned, as 3. pers.
fem. plur. impf. 1. ^\juow>, r^<>3L^,\ similarly in the
peif., e. g. 2. sing. masc. perf. pass, vi-uyox; do. from
Jaj I. cy^> ; from J^ I ^^.wl;.
If the second radical has i or w, the third radical c.
is dropped and the terminations ?7, una^ ina added to
the second, e. g. 3. plur. masc. perf. pass, lyo^ (not
44 48. VERBS ULTIMAE ^ AND ^J. 49. DOUBLY WEAK VERBS.
l^s), l^yt; 3. plur. masc. impf. act. ^jyoo, ^j^yb
(not ^yLolj, ^^ylkj); 2. pers. fern. sing. impf.
d. Before the dual endings a and d?ii, as also before
the terminations a of the 3. sing. masc. perf., at of
the 3. sing. fern, perf., atd of the 3. fern, dual perf.,
and a of the subjunctive, the third radical is treated
as a strong letter, if the second has i or u, Exx: 3. pers.
masc. perf. act. ^^y\yL\ do. pass, "^h, j^yi^; 3. pers.
fem. perf. ouyof, ^^Su\ 3. pers. masc. dual Lup;?
fem. UloT; 3. pers. subj. act. I ^^J, ^7*?.' ^* P®^^*
dual impf. ^LLo^j, ^i^yiJ-
48. In the apocopated impf. and in the imper. every,
final a, i and u is shortened, as 3. pers. sing. masc.
apoc. impf. yivJ, *o, yiS; 2. imper. ^J, j» J, yi.|.
Eor the conjugation of these verbs see paradigms XV — XIX
where various forms are given of the verbs !)fi to carry on war,
^^ to throw, ^j to be content, ^^-loi to carry out, accomplish.
49. Of verbs doubly weak the following are the
principal varieties:
a. Verbs primae . and ultimse ^^ as S^ to take care
of; impf. according to §§ 40 and 47 ^J, apoc. |^.
50. THE VERB jJJj. 45
The imper. is properly ^v-, for which, however, when
the word stands alone, i. e. in pause, we write xi*.
The verb ^L to see, which in the impf. elides I.
the Hamza, throwing back its vowel a to the first
radical. Thus j^o yard for ^^lo yafd\ 3. pers. pi.
^.Is; imper. \ (ace. to a s^), fern. ^7. The IV. form
* in the sense of 'to show' is similarly inflected: ^^
for ^\s\, impf. j^o for ,^few>; perf. pass, ^^sl for
-- o
j^&J and so on.
The verb -i to live, properly ^^i ; impf. LI^ (cf. c.
§ 2 1? note) like a verb ult. ^ or ^k like a verb mediae
geminatae; perf. IV Ll^l, perf. X ^x^LwwI^or LxsLwj
also contracted ^^C^S (be ashamed).
The verb jlll 'there is not' (compounded of the 50.
negative ^ and an obsolete Arabic noun corresponding
to the Hebrew t:^^) is inflected as follows :
Sing. Dual Plural
3. masc. J^ LLIf ^y^
3. fem. o^AwuJ L£1aJ ^-uJ
2. masc. o^-ygJ ^ I ^ .'. " 1 (W^*«J
2. fem. ci^ ,jJLyJ
1. com. v.:iJLl LLlJ
46 51. VERBS OF PRAISE AND BLAME. 52. ADMIRATIVES. 53. THE SUFFIXES.
51. The verbs of praise and blame, 1*3 to be good
and fjjj^j^ to be bad, which are rarely conjugated, are
written as above.
52. The Arab grammarians adduce as special forms
the so-called admirative forms, that is, forms expressive
of admiration. These are strictly the 3. s. m. perf.
and 2. pers. imper. of the IV. stem, but have assumed
a special signification; so I Jo\ Jo^l Lo properly 'what
has madeZaid excellent', and Juw Ji-*dil prop, 'make
Zaid excellent' both mean: how excellent is Zaid! —
The verbs mediae , and ^ may in these forms take
the inflection of the strong stems (§ 44 note &) as
fjjo ^^^ ^ ^ow easy this is I
53. The addition of the pronominal suffixes (§ Wb)
alters the form of the verb only to a slight extent.
a. The 2. pers. fem. sing. perf. with a suffix receives
a long final vowel as ^LyCjlo.
h. The I, standing after ._L u (§ 2^), is dropped as
s Jui* from I Jui* with the suff. of the 3. pers. sing. masc.
c. The ending ^^ of the 2. pers. pi. perf. becomes ^j*
(cf. § 12«, note 1), as ^^^jjci* from j^jdjci* with the
suff. of the 1. pers. sing.
d. Before the suffixes to the 1. pers. sing, and plur.,
54. THE PEOXOUN AS OBJECT. 47
^ and LS, the final net of the 2. fern. sing, and 3.
and 2. masc. plur. impf. is sometimes dropped (so that
these forms become identical with those of the sub-
junctive and apocopated moods).Ex.: j^^^^* alongside
of the more com^mon ^AJuowid3* thou (fem.) strikest
me; LS«jw«dj alongside of the more common US^jwoJ
they strike us.
When the object of an active verb consists of a 54.
personal pronoun, and this object is, for the sake of ^•
emphasis, made to precede the verb, then instead of
the ordinary suffixes appended to the verb the sign
of the accusative bl (ns, nfc<) is employed with the
suffixes of the noun (with the suff. of 1. pers. sing.
^Q); e. g. JujiS ^i)Cl to thee we pray.
The Arabic verb may have two suffixes appended b.
at the same time, in which case the pronoun of the
1. person precedes those of the 2. and 3. persons,
and the pronoun of the 2. person that of the third,
as xjoUaxI he gave it me; frequently, however, in
place of the second suffix— more particularly when both
pronouns are of the third person — we find the above
mentioned periphrasis with Gt as LiCl 2t^«\ he married
him to her.
48 55. THE NOUN.
Chapter III. The Noun. (§§ 55-90).
a. The Formation of Nouns.
55. Nouns in the wider sense comprise 1) substantives,
2) adjectives, 3) numerals (§§91 — 93), and 4) pronouns
(§§ 12 — 14). The noun, in the narrower sense, is
limited to substantives and adjectives.
Primitive substantives is the name given to such
substantives as cannot be derived from a verb. Accord-
ing to the usual arrangement of Arabic dictionaries,
it is true, the primitive noun u^K, head (un affix) for
example, is found under the verb iw-ls, but this verb
is in all its significations denominative. On the other
hand, it may fairly be maintained that a noun like
yj^t » goes back to a hypothetical triliteral root ^ + | + ^.
— In contrast to these primitive nouns, we find a
large number of nouns which are derived either from
verbs or from other nouns, that is, which are either
deverbals or denominatives. All the forms of the noun
are indicated by paradigms from the root J^jii (cf.
§ 15 ff.); thus we say of y^L as of the deverbal in-
finitive Jdi* killing, that it has the form JJti.
Note. The numerous foreign words which have found
their way into Arabic, adapted from Persian and Aramaic, and
indirectly from Greek and Latin, have also, to some extent, been
reduced to Arabic nominal forms.
56, 57. THE FORMATION OF THE NOUX. 49
A number of nouns do not show the full complement 56.
s ^ a.
of (three) consonants (see §§ 16 and 90), as *t> blood;
with the feminine termination (§ 73) : iLoj a slave-girl;
to this group belong also nouns with a prefixed vowel
G o
(connective Alif) as jv^*/! name, which accordingly must
be sought for in the dictionary under ^,
Extremely common are the nominal forms with b.
one short vowel, like J^*i, Joii, Juii, e. g. J^v foot,
according to the form Jijii. There are also nominal
S^^ G^ G,^ G^
forms with two short vowels: JJii, Juii, Joii, JJii,
Jjti, Jjii, e. g. Jo».s a man, NF. JJii; Ji" old age
NF. ^Ui-
Next in order we may put nominal forms with a c.
G
long vowel either with the first radical JldQ or with
the second JLxi, Jlii, Jlii, Jyii, Jyii, Juoii, or
with both Jj^li.
Nominal forms with doubling of the second radical d.
are such as (ja.^^ chick-pea NF. JJU; jUi (§ 63«);
Note. By their mode of formation these nouns have been
raised to the rank of quadriliterals like those in §§ 57 — 58.
The preformatives employed in the formation of 57.
Socin, Arabic G-rammar.* 4
50 58. FORMATION OF NOUNS. 59. QUADRILIT. NOUNS. 60. PARTICIPLES.
nouns are the following (whose vowels vary according
to circumstances): a) ^ cf. §§ 60 and 64. d) j* cf. § 61.
c) J as >*AAJ fugitive NF. J^*ij from lii to flee, d) t
(cf. §§ 62c; 63&), e. g. li^J^I story NF. U^j from
the stem viytX^.
58. The afformatives or formative additions used in
the formation of nouns are: a) ^— and i>|__ (see
§ 74). &) ^1 — (for substantives) or ^.j (often to
9 —
form adjectives) e. g. ^jL^aji palpitation of the heart
NF. ^^Vii from ^3!^ ; ^I^-LL drunk NF. ^fj^Lii from
vXlw. c) ^iy• (not originally Arabic) as c:i>jCLx>
9 ' ^ ^
kingdom NF. ^:i>JLii, which takes the masc. gend.
in Arabic.
59. The quadriliteral nouns are denoted by the para-
digm JJjii (§ 28) as i^ JLc scorpion NF. JJLii; jj*^ JuL.o
box NF. J^xi; ^Xwjuo military camp NF. JJjiijo;
f^LLilb. a species of beetle NF. i^xi.
60. From among the rich growth of nominal forms in
Arabic a few deverbals and denominatives may be
singled out for special attention. Such, of the former
class, are the participles and infinitives, whose forms
will be found among the paradigms of the verb.
61. THE IXFIMTIVE. 51
The participles — the active is generally named a.
nomen agentis, the passive nomen patientis — take
the form jLcLi for the active of the I stem, and for
the passive the form Jyiijo. In all the derived stems
the participle is formed by prefixing the syllable
A\ in the active the second radical takes /, in the
passive a (see below). As a rule, however, the active
and passive participles of the derived stems take the
vowels of the active and passive imperfs. with the
exception of stems V and YI.
In addition to the participles there is a class of h.
so-called verbal adjectives, which are in part treated
as participles ; they might be called quasi-participles,
as jjJlik beautiful, from ^^www^^.
The Arabic participles do not in themselves convey c
G
any suggestion of time; hence JoU*, for example, may
mean 'one who has killed' as well as *one who is killing',
G > o^
J«JCii>o 'one who ought to be killed' i. e. interficiendus
as well as interfectus.
The Infinitive (nomen verbi) assumes various forms 61.
in the I stem, and is therefore specially noted in the ^*
dictionaries under each verb. One of the most common
forms is JJii , as JjiiJ killing. The infinitives of Jjii
4*
52 61. THE INFINITIVE.
verbs (§ 28), as a rule, take the form J^xi, e. g. from
».^^^, .^^^.-oii the being angry. J^xi and Jlii are
also common forms from intransitive verbs, as i^jJL^
a sitting, from yUL^; |*!^Lww health, from ILI. In-
finitives are also found with the prefix ma, as J^^4>
or JCk Juo (for the same verb has frequently more than
one form of the infinitive, sometimes with different
meanings) from JlL3 to enter.
The infinitive of the II. stem has the form JixxAJJ
or jUaaj (cf. § 57&); the inf. of the III. stem the form
jLii or ilJLcLLo (which last is identical with the fern.
of the passive participle). The infinitives of IV., VIL,
VIII., IX. and X. are formed by the insertion of a
long a before the last radical; before this a every
short a of the perf. becomes t, as in the IV. stem JLnil.
The infinitives of V. and VI. take u after the second
radical, as V. J^xAi.
The Arabic infinitives do not contain the idea of
time and may be used both in an active and in a
passive sense. Thus JiLr denotes the circumstance
that some one has killed or has been killed, the idea
of killing or of being killed.
62. VERBAL ADJECTIVES. 53
Synopsis of participles and infinitives
Partcp. Act. Partcp. Pass. Infin.
JyXAjO Cf. § 61«
Go G
JjLcjo JLiil
65-.-, G j5-^
JjLftJuO JjLAJ*
G ^ ^o , ® ^ "
G^ -'Of G ^ o
Jotxixj JLixiJ
jl*il
Quadr. I. JJUax) JJLii^o J^kii iLUjii
Gj,--^, G^j,.-^, 6 Jo-"
As regards Verbal Adjectives (cf. § 60 c), the follow- 62.
ing forms may be specially noted:
The form Jujii, which occurs in both an active a.
and a passive sense; as Juuo killed, Juu^-^i a witness,
L
jL^Li
II.
III.
G -,
IV.
Go,
V.
VI.
G -^,
VII.
G ^o ,
VIII.
G ^o.
IX.
S .0 ,
X.
54
THE INTENSIVE FORMS.
*jya^ one who disputes with another (in the sense
of [VAoLiS? part. act. of III).
h. \iyxs^ e. g. y.j^(of ten an intensive form) given
to lying.
c. JJii f , a form denoting colours and physical defects,
as ysuc\ yellow; ^yS-S lame; »^| (with . as a strong
letter) one-eyed. For the formation of the feminine,
see § 74&.
63. Arabic has the means of expressing a heightened
or intensive form of the root idea. Of such intensive
forms the following are examples:
a. Jlii intensive form of JlcU and other verbal
adjectives, as ^\dS (habitually) given to lying. As
a denominative this form is in frequent use to denote
trades or professions (nomina opificum) as •. ClL. baker
60'
from 'yj^ bread.
h. Very frequently there is derived from adjectives
the form JJii f in the sense of an elative (generally
so named because including both comparative and
superlative), as ^^jmjj:^ beautiful, elative : ^^..wwu:^! more b.,
most b.; yJLo small, young, elative: ^jLol smaller,
younger; smallest, youngest. The elatives, when stand-
ing in the predicate, do not admit of inflection for
64. NOMINA LOCI, INSTRUMENTI, SPECIEI. 55
gender and number, as ^\li\ Ju^l *^ they are the
most excellent of men. When used in a comparative
sense, they are mostly undetermined (§ 76bc), and are
followed by the preposition \jo in the sense of our
"than" (properly 'at a distance from', 'measured from').
Used as superlatives, on the other hand, they are
generally determined. For the feminine formation
see § 74 &.
Note. No special elative is formed from the words y^ good
and fit bad, which are used as elatives in the form just given.
As a matter of fact, the positive of other adjectives as well must
IB JO* -
sometimes be rendered by our superlative; thus j**UJ| y^ signifies
the (absolutely) greatest of men.
To the class of deverbal nouns belong further: 64.
Nouns of place and time formed with the prefix a.
A ma, as ^^.JcJCo the place where one writes, the school;
also with the fem. termination as SwjjLo a buryingplace.
Note. Nouns of place and time from the derived stems take
the form of the pass, participle, as j-^«* (from the IV. stem of g^
to go out, of which lY. --*i.T cans.) the place to which or the time
at which something is brought out; IcjS* (from V. stem) the
place where the ritual washing is performed.
Nomina instrumenti, formed with the prefix a mi, h.
as ^^^X^ milk-pail, from v^UL^ to milk; -^Uci^ key,
from ^Jki to open.
56 65. NOIIIXA T^fffjHfKflynnMKTCTXr-APF.qTfJ.
c. Nomina specie! of the form xJlii , as ilxS^ the
manner of writing, one's "calligraphy".
65. To the class of denominatives belong especially
the nouns of relation and the diminutives.
a. By means of the termination ^ (corresponding
to the Hebrew "< , fem. n« and n"' ) there is derived
from nouns a group of other nouns which, following
the example of the Arabic grammarians, we call nomina
(adjectiva) relativa, i. e. nouns of relation. Thus ^. |
belonging to the earth (,^. I), earthly; ^^l-co belonging
to |»Lo (i. e. Syria), a Syrian. The feminine termination
is dropped when this ending is added, as ^jCo (from
xXjo) an inhabitant of Mecca; occasionally we meet
with certain changes in the vowels of a word, e. g.
-3 Juo an inhabitant of Medina, from jLo <XJl Medina ;
^lij a Koreishite, one of the tribe jjioj^'.
b. By the addition of the feminine ending to nouns
of relation there are formed feminines, as iouoLw a
Syrian woman, but more frequently abstract nouns; as
aU^!^l[ divinity from ^^"^l divine, (from sl^^ God);
iUJbcLi heathenism from ^jeLi. heathenish, (from
Jk^L^ ignorant).
66. NOM. BBhi>iri¥x«LDT DEMmUTIVA. 67. NOUNS FROM STEMS MED. GEM. 57
Note. It is usual to indicate the nomina relativa also by
paradigms from JxJ ; thus we say that ^'«^)I is a form ^^^, tAIbW.
a form i^AsM.
Diminutives from triliteral nouns take the form 66.
J.AAi, as JuA£ a little slave, servulus, from tXxc slave.
From quadriliteral nouns the form is JJU*i, as ^yxic
a little scorpion, irom v^jJi^ (so ,^^5,0 diminutive
from ,^^^^\Jo companion). From quadriliteral nouns
with a long vowel between the third and fourth radi-
cals the corresponding form is JuJLlii, as ik^iXlLa
G ' o >
diminutive from ^v. jJLo a box. Diminutives are not
unfrequently derived also from proper names, as
jJul tX-u^ 'M&«/c?M//f7^ralongside of &JIJI JlIc 'abdulldhi
(Abdallah).
The formation of nouns from stems mediae gemi- 67.
natae and from those with a hamza or the semi-vowels,
presents many irregularities, for a general idea of
which we must refer to the inflection of the corre-
sponding verbal stems. In addition to what is there
given the following particulars deserve attention.
For the formation of deverbal nouns from stems
mediae geminatae (see § 34 ff.) the following points
may be noted:
The second and third radicals are of course con- a.
58
I. NOUNS FROM STEMS WITH HAMZA AND PRIM.
tracted when the second is without a vowel of its
own, as yi irom .^s.
b. If the first radical has «, and the second i or a,
contraction takes place in the participles and infini-
tives, e. g. part. act. VII of 3: wiju contracted from
)yAJuo'j pass, also yJUxi irom »^ju/j. Ihere is no con-
traction, however, with nouns of the form Juti, as ^[>j3
inf. to be hairy.
c. According to the rule given in § 35 &, from .jjo
we get uuo ; irom ^Juo : jAa.
d. The act. participle of I is ^li from !vLi cf. § 8.
e. Contraction does not take place when a long
vowel stands between the last two radicals e. g. J^,
68. The orthographical rules which apply to the in-
flection of the verba hamzata (§§ 37 £f.) hold good
for the formation of nouns, e. g. J^^ something asked
for; Jtj^ a question, from JUL to ask; the part. act. I
of 3* I, to make an impression, is wi'l for ^il ; 'iJu^ NF.
nomen instrumenti aULii^ from 3*1 &c.
69. The primae . stems, which according to § 40 lose
^' their first radical in the impf., lose it also, as a rule,
70. NOUNS FROM STEMS MED. j AXD ^^5. ^^^—jQ^J^. - ■
in the nomen verbi ; as compensation the latter receives
the feminine termination (§ 73)^ as from d^l to pro-
mise nomen verbi sjca; from cOl to allow: aLftt>.
TV after the vowel % (. ) coalesces with the latter h.
to form F, as inf. IV of ii*: fall: cLib|^ for cU.^; O^Lcc
time of one's birth NF. Jlil^, for J^«-5 from jjr.
J passes into w (§ 40 c), e. g. part. IV of Jaij c.
to be awake: Jai>-jo for iaiLyo.
In the infs. of the IV. and X. stems from stems 70.
med. , and ^ the middle radical disappears; the ^'
feminine termination is added as compensation, e. g.
I/LSj for Jlpl
In the act. part, of stem I the tv of verbs med. . 6.
becomes y and j (y/) is changed into 'i (j); as Juli'
G ^ Q "^^ ^ G ^
for J.U, .jLl for oLtf (for Medda see § 7).
A characteristic formation from these stems is jJi ; c.
thus from the stem t>Lww med. . we get oJJm master,
G y.^ ^
lord; from the stem i^Lb med. ^, v^jJoo good.
Nouns formed on the model of JJii contain diph- d.
®o- Go ^
thongs (§ 2 «), as Jyj, yx^.
The place of the second radical (see § 42) is taken e.
by a long a in the act. participles of stems VII. and
60 71. NOUNS PROM STEMS ULTIMAE ^ AND ^.
YIII. and in the pass. part, of stems IV., VII., VIII.
and X.; e. g. part. pass. IV. *lXo, part. act. or pass.
G ^o f G '^'' 9
VII. AjJuo (from a hypothetical active *ysXA pass.
* JiJuc). Also in numerous nominal forms, as Ai^ (from
a hypothetical v;<^) house, from J4> med. .; NF. J^xa/j
from JU' is JLLo, from a hypothetical Jyixj.
/. The place of the second radical (see § 43) is taken by
G y G^ t,
a long 2 in nouns of the type of Jmi and xJLki from med.
. and (^ e. g. ^^^i from r.^ med. ^ to be gentle ; iUjyo
(§ 64 c) for xjyo mode of death from med. .; in the
form Joti from med. ^, e. g. (jd-o for (jd^o white
(plur.) ; Jl*ax) in the forms from med. ^, e. g. j^^.^,
G o -^
walk for *jua^ ; in the part. act. of the IV. and X. stems
from verbs mediae . and ^, e. g. *jva^, ^-u^JCyg^; in
the part. pass. I from med. ^^ e. g. iju^ from cLj,
to sell (mediae ^) for c«ju^.
^. The place of the second radical is taken by long
^ a , G '
u in nouns of the type of J^*i from med. ., as .^3
light from '113; u may also arise by contraction from
wu in the pass. part, of the I stem of verbs med.
G ? ^ G J o ^
., as J«.A^ for J.yLo.
71. In the case of nouns derived from verbs ultimae
a.
71. NOUNS FROM STEMS ULTTMAE 5 AND ^^. 61
. and ^ those forms in which the second radical is
vowelless are treated like forms from strong stems,
i)0 ^ l3 O ^
as ^^D, ^^ inf.
If the second radical has «, there results (cf. § 46 «) h.
at the end of words a long a (from hypothetical awu,
ayu) which is written L_ or ^_1_ (ace. as last rad.
is ^ or ^), e. g. LkiJI the stick, for^,,a*JI; ^^y^^
the pasture, from ^. to feed, for a hypothetical
^^f ; ^t NF. jkiit for ^t, elative of ^ gener-
ous, liberal (§ 63 &). The same applies to all the pass,
participles of the derived stems. With the nunation,
these forms appear as i vi^, ^5^5 ^yo(ptc.pass.IV)
in which the original long final vowel, now standing in
a syllable closed by the n of the nunation, must be pro-
nounced short (§ 8): ^asan^ mar^an^ murman. Long a
appears before the feminine termination (cf. § 70 e) as,
sItXl morning for s.ji; sli. death for iSly
If the second radical has short 2, from iyu arises c.
a long I (cf. § 47«), e. g. ^^^01 part. act. I in place
of a hypothetical -^oU 1 5 and so in the act. participles
of the derived forms. If the nunation is added, the
result is *L, ramin &c., in which the ^^ is dropped
even in the written form of the word, uyu is changed
62 72. NOUNS FROM STEMS ULTIMAE ^ AND ^.
to iyu, and consequently with the nunation it likewise
becomes m; e. g. inf. V. ^f^dt for _xj1aJI; IIS* for
JolS*. In the act. part, of stem I from verbs ult. .
irvun is changed to iyun, and consequently with the
nunation further to in, e. g. ;5\LiJt for ^)LiLl|, ^\LiJI;
with the nunation vL^. Before a and <^ (cf. § 47^), on
the other hand, the third radical retains its conso-
nantal value; thus the inf. of stem II, according to
the form most in use with verbs med. . and ^ viz.
aLlxaj (§ 61), is: JU^J>, i^jyiJ*-
d. After «, ?/w and w^w become 'w; !/mw, and w;w;i be-
come 't/;?, in each case with the hamza, e. g. i^jw^j
for .IwvwJI with the nunation %]y^ inf. I of .^^ to be
(wvwJI with the nunation g|^ inf. I of .^^
noble; iLos^j for ,<Co.!^|, with the nunation ^LxiJ inf.
i» . ^ 0
IV for ^Uo^f.
e. If the second radical has a long w, the forms from
verbs ultimae . are formed regularly; thus the pass.
part. I of IC^ is Tybo (for ^•y*i) magzuwun. From
verbs ultimae ^, on the other hand, uyun is changed
to lyun^ e. g. ,1jooo (from ^^jo Jo) marmiyun^ so from
^.ojo go away inf. ^^^^ for l^yoji NF. Jyti.
/. If the second radical has a long %, the forms from
72., 73. THE GENDER OF NOUXS. 63
9
verbs ultimae ^ are formed regularly, e. g. NF. Jujii
s . s
from j^: J: saint (for ^i) rvaUyun. From verbs
ultimae ., on the other hand, twun is changed into
fj/w«, as Ji 'altyun high from ^^cLd.
6. The Gender of Nouns.
Arabic has two genders, a masculine and a femin- 72.
ine. A number of words are sometimes masculine
sometimes feminine,<Jn other words) are of the common
gender. Words which denote female beings, collectives,
countries, cities, winds, parts of the body occurring
in pairs, and others, are in themselves feminine with-
out requiring the feminine termination. The gender
of such words is in each case noted in the dictionaries.
As an outward and visible sign of the feminine 73.
s ^ 9 ^ a.
we find most frequently the ending g aiun (or H
atu § 79), e. g. Ijbli (NF. XJUli), fem. of Jjli killing ;
9x ^ 9- ^ ' 5^5^^'
dXJLjQ (NF. xJl*i) queen, from dUU; il^l) fem. of masc.
^jo\. (§ 71c) content, sUi (NF. xJLii) maid, from ^
(§§ 71 & and 2d) youth. Many substantives are found
only with the feminine ending, as xl^ an orchard.
Note. As a rarity, the feminine ending is found, particu-
larly in the Kuran, written with »1», e. g. 4UI JUtA^ the grace of
God (for 4*^).
64 73. THE GENDER OF NOUNS.
h. A number of masc. nouns are found with the
feminine ending, as aLftJli*- Caliph, ii^io Talha (proper
name of a man, see p. 8, note 2). On the other hand,
there are nouns which, as being essentially feminine,
do not require the feminine termination^ as wjjLi barren
(referring to a woman).
c. The feminine ending 5_I_ is occasionally appen-
ded to common or class nouns in order to indicate a
single individual (nomen unitatis), as Ikj^b a gold
piece, from ,^^b gold; xiLji. a dove, from JC^
G
doves (collective). The termination 8_1. is also used
for the formation of the so-called nomina vicis, i. e.
nouns that express the doing of an action once^ as
s Joii* a single sitting down, from Joti to sit down.
d. The feminine termination, again, serves to form
G^ ^
substantives from adjectives, as iUi'lL conduit-pipe,
water-channel, from the part. I of ^jLm to water. Con-
nected probably with this is the feminine ending which
G^ S5 ^
forms intensives, as iuo^^ a very learned person, from
the adjective J%^ § 63flf.
e. Collective nouns are also formed by means of the
G *^
feminine termination, e. g. from ,joL5j a courier, coll.
2Lob\ ; ^yo (§ G5«) Sufi (mystic), coll. iliyc-
74. TERMINATION OF THE FEMIN. 75. NUMBER AND CASE. 65
Other feminine terminations are: 74.
The termination ,^— ; it goes to form feminines a.
of the type J.*i, e. g. ^Jd fem. of ^I^Xl, drunk,
(§ 58&); feminines of the nominal form (NF.) Joii
from elatives (§ 63 &), e. g. ^vA-o fem. of oLo I smaller,
J.I from Jll the first, and substantives like Lxjt)
world (§ 2 note), which is properly a feminine to the
.-^
elative j^J^^I, that which is nearer at hand; also fem-
inines of the NF. Jkxi, e. g. frdsm J^l one, fem. ^tXa.1 ;
subst. 1^3^ remembrance.
The ending ij ; it goes to form, more especially, h.
adjectives of the NF. ilxii from JJiit (§ 62c), e. g.
i>\ySuo fem. yellow; i-!;*^ fem. one-eyed, but also
substantives, as i>\y^P desert.
c. Inflection of the I^oun.
Arabic has three numbers: singular, dual and 75.
plural. Of the last, there are two different kinds;
the one, the ordinary plural, properly so called, also
known as the pluralis sanus or the outer plural, which
originally denoted rather a number of separate persons
and things ; the other, the collective plural, also called
the inner or broken plural (see §§ 86 ff.), which denotes
Socin, Arabic Grammar.* 6
66 76. DUAL AND PLURAL.
rather a continuous mass, in which the individual
member is not distinguished. At present we shall deal
only with the first-named. Arabic distinguishes three
cases: Nominative, Genitive, and Accusative.
76. The terminations of the dual and the pluralis
^' sanus are as follows:
Dual nominative ij^— (cf- § 33)
„ genitive and accusative jjj— (cf. D"^-^)
Plural mascul. nominative r.^ (cf. § 33)
„ „ gen.-accus. ^ — (cf. d"^— )
„ femin. nominative ^\— (cf. ni)
„ „ gen.-accus. ^—
Before these terminations the Sectional endings
of the sing, are dropped; the H of the feminine ending
is changed to cj before the dual termination, (as it is
before the pronominal suffixes appended to the sin-
gular), e. g. kSsLs*, dual ^Lcj^Li..
h. By the addition of the terminations exhibited
above is formed the plural of many adjectives, in
particular, and also of a number of substantives. In
the formation of the plural we find substantives with
the feminine ending taking the sign of the masculine
plural (as SjLw year, plur. ^j-a-aw); much more fre-
77. THE CASE INFLECTION OF THE SINGULAR. 67
quently, however, substantives without the sign of
the feminine in the singular are found forming their
plural by means of the feminine termination, e. g.
JL^ condition, plur. ^:l^^!Li, eI^ heaven, plur. ^:y|.UIw
(with the original waw restored § 71^), also written
As regards the case inflection of the singular, it 77.
is necessary to distinguish between the so-called no-
mina triptota or triptotes, i. e. nouns which are in-
flected for all three cases, and the so-called nomina
diptota or diptotes, /. e. nouns which cannot be thus
fully inflected. The latter never receive the nunation,
and unless they are determined by the article or by
a following genitive, they are inflected for only two
cases.
The following are the case-endings of the triptote a.
noun: Nom. sing. _Jl un, Gen. sing. m. Ace. sing.
I an. With the feminine termination _1. only is
written instead of I as "^^s-, but aU^Joo; so ^ci
and \Ak (cf. § 3&).
The case-endings of the diptote noun are: Nom. &.
sing. w, Gen. and Accus. Sing. J_ a.
In the dictionary the triptotes are distinguished
from the diptotes by being always written with the
5*
68 78. NOM.-MMBB^BIPB^DIPTOTA. 79. DETERM. AND UNDETERM. XOUNS.
nunation, as Jk:^s a man, while the latter are always
- without it, as t>j.A«l black.
78. Whole classes of nouns are always diptote. Such are
a. 1) all proper names that are either feminine or have
the feminine termination, as xljo, ^^^/JJ•y as names of
women; jLjLwuo as name of a man. To these must be
added the majority of such proper names as are of
foreign origin, e. g. f^\y^\ Abraham, v«ju*;«j Joseph,
^*w*jo Moses (but monosyllables like ji Noah are
mostly triptote).
h. 2) Many so-called broken plurals ; cf. § 88 Nos. 18,
19, 20; § 89 Nos. 23 24, 25, 27, 29;
c. 3) adjectives of the form J^iil (§ 62 c; § 63&);
d. 4) adjectives of the form ^^^jls (§ 58&), which form
their fem. like jjii, e. g. J^Lyli angry, fem. ^^.ydi.
c. 5) Feminines formed by the terminations ^^— or
i|_l. (§ 74). Cf. also the broken plurals referred to under
&, §§ 88,19 and 89^29.
79. The inflection of the singular of all nouns and
of the plural of feminines varies according as a noun
is determined or undetermined.
a. All proper names are in themselves determined
-« ^
9 "O
as cW'^ muhammadun Muhammed; c\t"*-t ahmadu
80. SHOETEXIXG OF THE DUAL AND PLDTIAL TERMIXS. 69
Ahmed; such proper names are treated either as trip-
totes or as diptotes according as their form and the
custom of the language may determine; many of them
always take the article, as ^dj^Gil. X
Common or class nouns are determined:
1) by the article; as y^wi a horse, (j*^^l the horse, b.
2) by the addition of a following genitive, which c.
may be either a noun or a pronominal suffix, whereby
the nomen regens is put in the construct state; as ^li
Jl=».1I| the horse of the man, auwli his horse.
The case-endings of a noun determined (1) by the
prefixing of the article, or (2) by a genitive following
— and the same applies to proper names with the
article — are distinguished as follows from those of
the undetermined noun:
Singular nom. , Gen. , Ace. _1_.
Plural fem. nom. , Gen.-Acc.
i. e, the nunation is always dropped. These endings
are assumed not merely by all triptotes, but also by
the diptotes, when determined by the article or a
genitive following : e. g. Nom. o^j, Gen.-Acc. SyZ\ ;
but Nom. o^!^ !, Gen. t>^:^ |, Ace. j^I^I |.
Before a following genitive (which ace. to § 79 c 80.
may be^ either a noun or a pronominal suffix) the
70 81. INFiEXION OF NOUXS FROM STEMS ULT. 5 AXD ^j.
terminations ^ of the dual and -» of the plural are
dropped, thus:
Dual Nom. of tX^^: ^IlXa^, but vJ\^I IjJ^ the two
slaves of the Vizier.
Dual Gen.-Acc. ^^.j J^^c, but y^ ^S^^^ o^^wo I have
beaten the two slaves of Omar (before a connective
Alif thus: vJ)^! (^tU^j cf. § 6e).
Plural Nom. of vl^L^* butcher, executioner r^yA^^
but viUiJi ^Lai the executioners of the king.
S3 ^ --"'^ 83-- > o^,-
Plural Gen.-Acc. ^joLai*, but viU-iJ I ^5jLoi o^jK I
have seen the executioners of the king.
For the inflection of the noun see paradigms XX and XXI,
where -will be found the forms of the masculine triptote b-^Ua^ an
executioner,the masculine diptote y^\ another, the feminine triptote
&e\m hour, and the feminine diptote i^-o Mayya (name of a woman).
81. In the case of nouns derived from stems ultimae
"' , and ^ when the second radical has a short vowel
the nunation, ace. to § l\l)c, is taken by this vowel
of the second radical.
b. Nouns ending in an or a are unchangeable for
all three cases; those in in or F, on the other hand,
take the an of the nunation, as well as the simple a
(§ 47^) as llclj, ^\pl
82. THE ADDITION OF THE PRONOMINAL SUFFIXES. 71
Before the dual terminations (cf. § 46^) the last c.
radical is treated as a strong letter, as ^jJkit ^Lii^,
In the plural the last radical is dropped before d.
the terminations una and ina^ which, when joined to
an a of the second radical, produce diphthongs (§ 46c);
thus from ^c^jjo: j^y^xj, j^^^jo; if the second radical
has i, the terminations are added immediately to the
former (§ 47 c), as ^^!j, ^T^lj.
For the inflection of these nouns see paradigm No. XXII,
where will be found the forms of the triptote jiU judge, the
triptote ^jUa^AA (ult. ,^) chosen one (often as a proper name), the
triptote Ufltf (ult. 5) a stick, the diptote j^JTi remembrance, and
the diptote UJj world (vgl. § 74 a).
For the forms of the pronominal suffixes see 82.
§ 12&— J.
Before the pronom. suffix of the 1. pers. sing, the a.
short case-endings of the construct state are dropped,
as ^L^*. The said suffix after a final «, i or ai be-
comes ^ (y«), as with the nom. dual ^^ULoi, with
^ : ^L5i (§ 2 <?; 81 a) ; with the gen.-acc. plur. ^^Loi* ;
with ^^U (§ 81a): ^^15; with gen.-acc. dual ^Lai*.
72 83. VOWEL CHANGES IX PLUR. SANUS.
Note. In the case of words which end in ^j , the suffix
may either be attached in the usual way, e. g. from ,^ "sonny",
,^, or appended to the shortened form ^ , e. g. ^^ from ^,
and ^.
b. The final il of the construct state of the plural
masc. is changed to t before the appended ^ (cf.
§ lie), thus ^[Ja/s becomes ^L^a-S, and then with
the suffix of the 1. pers. sing. ^LoJ> (no longer to be
distinguished from the genit. and accus. plural). The
same applies to the ending au from stems ult. ^< (see
parad. XXII), e. g. «^k-o.x) becomes ^ak^xj, with the
suffix JJaj^jc (also identical with the genitive-accu-
sative form).
For the union of the noun with the suffixes see paradigm
XXIII. For the change before suff. of final 8 into *1> see § 76 a.
83. In the pluralis sanus of substantives of a masc.
or fem. nominal form with one short vowel (that is,
of any of the following types JJii, JJii, JJii and iULii,
xJlii, iU-jii) the second radical frequently receives a
complementary vowel which is either identical with
Go^
that of the first radical or is short a. Thus ^s ! earth,
plur. J)».^)l, more rarely ^^JJ^^\^ and c^Lori, more
rarely ^:dL^» t; X^JLii? darkness, plur. v::^U.JLl5 alongside
84. ^jylf. 85. VOCATIVE, 73
of i:i>LJUb and v:yLJLb. This is a favourite method in
the case of the plural of the form kXxi, as iiljtJb
(§ 73c) a single thrust or blow; plur. oLIiJb several
thrusts or blows.
G o
Before ^| a son, a proper name loses its nuna- 84.
tion in the case mentioned § 6/2, and ^| is itself
written without the prosthetic 1^, e. g. JoJJI ^^ *.JLwwuo
musUmu'Tynu-lwalidi Muslim, the son of al-Walid.
wCio ^jjI Jo\ zaiduni'hnu bischrin (§ 6c) means, on
the other hand, Zaid is the son of Bishr (nominal
sentence).
After b the particle of address, the simple noun 85.
follows in the nominative without the nunation, as
tXZ^ Muhammed, cCi? Lj Oh M. ! (jj^"^ IJ Oh man !
(by which a definite person is hailed). But should
anything of the nature of a complement (a genitive,
for instance) be added to the noun in the vocative,
the name of the person addressed must be put in the
accusative, as ^| Ju^: aJUl Ju^ IJ o Abdallah!(Oh
servant of God!); » jJi^ ^ Ij Oh Banu Kinda! i. e.
members of the tribe of Kinda (here ^u cf. § 80 and
90 & is the constr. state of JvaaS). If an Object follows,
the noun stands in the accus. with the nunation, as
74 86. COLLECTIVE NOUNS.
\>^jj>\ \u6\s Ij Oil thou that ridest the red mare! —
The particle L^ I (before which we may also have G)
is always followed by a nominative with the article,
as (jwLU I LL>I U Oh ye people !
Note. After I3 , which serves as the expression of pain and
sorrow, a long a is appended to the noun; in pause 81— — , as
«U| 13 Oh mother!
86. There are, in Arabic, a mass of words which,
though singular in form, have a collective signification.
The following varieties may be singled out under
this head:
a. Simple collectives (masc. gend.) such as j»-j>, which
denotes not merely ^a people' collectively, but also
s»<^ 0 ^
'people' as individuals; jCwLc an army and also the
individual soldiers thereof. From such words broken
plurals may be formed.
Names of the inhabitants of a country, as 4>««^l
the Jews, often coinciding with the name of the country
jo"''
itself, as JoLgJI the Hindus; a single Jew or Hindu is
g "^^ g o
called (5^^., ^cXa^ § 65 «.
Class names (masc. gend.) from which are formed,
nomina unitatis (§ 73 c) as *U^ doves.
So-called quasi-plurals (masc. gend.), from which
no nomen unitatis is formed, as n«!o> a company of
87. THE BROKEN PLURALS. 75
G — 9 -^ ^
horsemen (a single one C^U)'i (•tX^ ^^6 domestics
(one of which is (•oLL.) ; y-UJ^ a number of asses (one
ass^U^); Joui slaves (from Jui).
The so-called broken plurals (plurales fracti in the 87.
language of the native grammarians — by German ^*
scholars by preference called 'inner plurals' because
due to changes in the body of the word) are also
strictly speaking nothing more than collectives. Hence
they are treated in Arabic as singular nouns of the
feminine gender and construed accordingly. Thus
'is^yAXjo l-jIjJ i different gates, where v«>lol is the broken
- * G ^ G ^'^tr
plural of i^U (on the model of JLiil), and the par-
ticiple act. V. of j^li is put in the fern. sing. — These
broken plurals, further, take the same inflection as
the singulars, discussed in § 77 ff.
As a rule the broken plurals are given in the b.
dictionaries alongside of the singular of their respective
nouns ; when this is not so, it is to be presumed that
the word either has no plural or takes a pluralis sanus.
Sometimes we find from one and the same word more
than one plural ; in such a case, 'not unfrequently, a
word varies its plural as its meaning varies. Certain
of the broken plurals are, as a rule, confined to certain
specified singulars.
76 88. THE BROKEN PLURALS.
88. From nouns regarded as containing three con-
sonants the following broken plurals may be formed :
1. Joti from Jotil (§ 62 c) and its fern. i.'^Jii
(§ 74&), as ^ from !lL\ red; J^ (cf. § 10 ff)
, o- ^ G ^^ So,
from t>^| black; (jdo (for ^j<ijo cf. § 70/) from
(jdjol white.
/ G , ? G ' '
L 2, J^ from various singulars, as ,^^xS^ from
G •'
[^Ixf book. ,
G^ S^o G-' S^o
3. JJii from sing. &Jl*i, as «kiJ from ^jtHas piece.
^ ^ 4. Jii mostly from sing, ^ii, as v^JL^. from
aUJl^ box; ^x) I from xx)| people; occasionally from
xJLxi, as j^wi* (for ^liJ ace. to § 71 &) from io^* place.
• 5. xJLii, as 5^1 from • | brother.
G>_,^ G ^ S-'^" S
V 6. aULii esp. from sing. Jut Li, as xi^i^ from JooL5^
perfect; but also from JJi § 70c, as 5oL.ww (for
G f ''
HJoylw) fi'om jJLl lord.
* G— ^ G r {,
7. SJLii (rare) as H3Ci' from Oys monkey.
'— 8. iOLii from Jl^U ult. (^, as sLdJJ (for i^^j^
§ 71 &) from ^U judge.
9. Jlii very common, from various singulars, as
J.fJ^ from ^Jo arrow.
THE BROKEN PLURALS. 77
10. Jjjii very common, also from various singulars,
as C>y^ from JO:^ band of soldiers; ^j (for ^Jii
see § 71 e) and then (with change of w to i) Jo from
^JLj weeping.
11. xJLii (rare) as sTIJfc from y^ stone.
12. Rjyii (rare) as SLo^.*^ from ^^^ uncle.
9a J 9 . 9 s, 9 ^
13. Jjii from JlcU, as Jl^ from Jl^Ij an un-
branded she-camel.
14. Jljii from Jut U, as ^ljc5 from ^'l^ scribe.
^ 15. JJtil from various singulars, as J^i.^ from
I 6 « ^^
jLa.. foot.
p 16. xJUil from various singulars, as sJl£.J from
'^ 9 ^ " --a ^ ^ 9 ^ "'^ 9a ^
v^ftxcs a cake, aU:^| (§ 67c) from v«axa^ beloved; g^\
from lUo]^ president; j^J! from »^| God.
V ® -"*
f^ 17. JLiil very common, from various singulars,
9 ^ o^ 9" ^ , - "^
as ^LL2X)! from ^k/j rain; iULcil (always without the
nunation) from g^ thing.
18. i>^KjLs\ esp. from Juxi, as ib^'l from w^t?J>
relative; ill^l fi'om ^^c rich.
19. j^ii (rare), as ^^^v^^ from ^.>^ wounded.
78 89. THE BROKEN PLURALS.
'*>i 20. i^xi, as ilot^ from N-fcUb poet.
21. jj^^, as ^Loi from ^xi youth; ^llw^
(for ;jl>^£^ cf. § 69 &) from ^Li neighbour.
22. ^^*i, as ^IjJj from jUb" district ; ,jL;^
from j^sLi rider; ^It^^-ww negroes from fc>lll black.
Note. Forms 5 and 15 — 17 are used, as a rule, only of a
number of objects not exceeding ten (hence called pluralia
paucitatis).
89. From nouns with more than three radical con-
sonants (cf. § 56^ ff.) are formed plurals in which the
first consonant takes «, the second a and the third i.
Such plurals are diptotes with the exception of all
those derived from stems ult. ^ (or with an additional
i^— in the sing. § 74 «) which take the nunation in in
the nominative and genitive, but not in the accusative
which ends in ^ The forms of the singular of
Nos. 24 (cf. also ^^^^yc § 66) and 25 are regarded
as quadriliterals. No. 29 ends in long a and is diptote.
The following are the principal varieties:
23. JJUi as Lj<>U^ from ^JO^ (NF. Jd*i)
locust. This form is also found from nouns that are
only in a special sense quadriliterals, inasmuch as
they are really triliterals with the addition of a
THE BROKEN PLURALS.
79
formative consonant; examples of this group are:
a) J^UI, as JooUl from RJUil (NF. iULiiJ) fingertip;
also from elatives used as substantives, such as
oli^l the great ones from J5 I elat. of ^^u51 b) Jc^Uj
^ , ^-' G^ o- g'>* o- "^ " ' ", -^
as vo>l^" from ibw^* (NF. iUjtAj) experience; c) Jk^Ux?
as Jolyo from xJoy^o (NF. iUJii/)) dung-heap; (jiobw
^ G^^ S^o^,.^
(with ^, not with S) from iLiuotx> (NF. jUaaxj) livelihood ;
^Lju» (ace. ^^L*i) of ^^Juuo (NF. JoLai) idea.
> ^^ G -^ " 6 ^
24. jLc!«i especially from aUL^U and J^U (used
as a substantive), as fa-fila^o from iuLtLo thunder-clap;
^s\yi from jj^vU rider; ^!^ (for ^jo^Syj^ § 67 &)
from ^JfiL^ person of distinction; Jli. (ace. ^Jl^)
from Jb>Li a female slave.
25. JoLii from such nominal forms with a long
vowel after the second radical as have a feminine
form or signification, as a) ySu^ from svLI^ funeral
obsequies; b) ^>|L^ from iLc^ miracle; c) (j*ot^
from (jijvi bride.
26. Jlii as .Uci from i^lxi (N. F. Jlii) decision.
27. JuJLii from quadriliteral nouns with a long
vowel before the last consonant, as JooLlt from 4> JUx
80 90. IRREGULAR NOUXS.
G > ^ J
(N. F. JyXxi) bunch of fruit; this form is also found
with nouns derived from triliteral stems, of which the
following are specimens: a) JcA^^Lil as vi:ot>L£s*l from
'i^yd<s^\ (NF. 'i}yxi\) story; b) JoutUj as Ut^Xjks
Go-, G ^ 0-- ^
from ;^jw.o.J> (infinitive Ju*aj used as a noun) turn ;
c) Ju^LLo as vJijUixj from ..JJi/j (participle J*.*avo
used as a noun) fate; but also Ju^Li (cf. No. 24) as
jjMjyM/l^ from jjw^U^ (NF. J^li) spy.
G- ^-
28. RjULii, from quadriliteral nouns denoting
G— Gci— ^c5^
living beings, as SyjlJ^ from sUi^ (NF. JLii) a
G- -^ G*o^. Gr" f''
mighty man; 2LaijLwul from i^iiiAwl bishop; Hjoo^* from
Jl^JLj pupil; H4>4>L*S from ^^t^JtXxj a native of Bagdad.
29. Jlii, as (5;L^ from ilC^ desert; Lj|t\5
-^- Gc5- G-' --
(for ^.ltX;c § 2<? note h) from ioLXiO (NF. 2dA*i from
ult. ^) present.
90. The following nouns (arranged in alphabetical
order) are more or less irregular in their mode of
inflection:
a. ^ father, • | brother and j^^ father-in-law take
the following forms in the construct state and before
suffixes beginning with a consonant:
90. IRREGULAR NOUNS. 81
Nominative ^|, ^^1, ,|>^
Genitive ^t, ^|, ^
-^ .^
Accusative U|, Lit, i^^
The Dual of ^«>| is jjlol (i. e. the two parents), the
plur. sGl (§ 88 No. 17). The vocative singular with
suff. of the 1. pers. sing, of ^^1 is ^t L", v:>j| G,
oo I b ; from -I : ^.t ; with suffix of the 2. pers. masc.
sing, dyj I, <J^|.
Go '^
i^[ son; plur. sanus has nom. ,j«Jb (construct i.
yb), gen.-acc. ^j^aJLj (st. constr. ^Jo); broken plur.
eli;T(§ 88,17).
•I brother, see a; broken plur. syLl^, ^ji^j. ^•
(§ 88,5. 21).
o^t sister; plur. i:y|^|. d.
Eoof or .^x|^ (also %ui) man; gen. ;^5jo|; ace. I^joj. e.
slj^j woman; plur. from another root eLwwJ, /•
gpj or l^S'yL^^ (§ 88,9. 5. 21).
S*" 9 -- S^ 9 55^
*| mother; plur. ^:yL^t or v;yLo!. ^.
jjLLjI^ man, human being; plur. jllit, collective h.
Socin, Arabic Grammar.* 6
82 90. IRREGULAR NOUNS.
jLi daughter, frequently also aiLj (with con-
nective Alif); plur. v^LL.
*• ;LL)i> dinar, gold-piece; broken plur. irregular,
' .1 r"
I- 'o (only in the st. constr.) possessor of . . . .;
gen. (^3, ace. |6; fern. ^|j; dual nom. U6; plur. nom.
..3 (gen.-acc. 15.6) fern. ^^b\ for the plural J.|
(iclu), gen.-acc. j.| is used.
m. sju^ year; plur. nom. ^^-Ly (or ^^.-Lu;); gen.-acc.
**• .w4-t 'amrun^ 'Amr, proper name of a man. A .
is added to the written form of this word in the nom.
and gen. {%y^) to distinguish it from ^^ ^umaru (a
diptote). Ace. |w^ ; followed by ^ it is written .l*^
and pronounced ^amra-bna.
0. *i or 5ji mouth; st. constr. usually nom. ^,
gen. ^, ace. U; broken plur. (§ 88,17) »|^|.
p. JuJ night; broken plur. (from the root J^) JLII
(§89,23).
3. gli water; broken plur. sLl^ or sj^jol (§ 88,9.17).
91. THE CARDINAL NUMBERS. 83
Jo hand; broken plur. (§ 88,15) Jo I from ^^Jul r.
(cf. §71c).
Go y G 55^ G ^o^
j»jj day; broken plur. j»L>| from *l5jl (§ 88,17). s.
Chapter IV. The Numerals. (§§ 91—93.)
The cardinal numbers have the following forms: 91.
Masc.
Fern.
1
1
6 y
inflected
2
u^^l
(inflected as a dua
3
l,lHla3)
9^ ^-- 6-.I ^
inflected
G.cf
S_o^
4
S 0^
n
5
(J«»»^
ituM^
jj
6
9o^
6 a
»
7
«Aam
n
8
^Ui(seep.27*)Loi:;i
55
9
G" ^
G^ o
55
0
^
S^
55
1
p^ j^]
V •*• «L
^<5J.t
indeclinable
6*
v'^ToR^^
/ OK THK
f rrTvTTTT-T-, -.-.-.
84 91. THE CARDINAL NUMBERS.
Masc. Fern.
12 ^^^ Loj Swww^ LxjlSJ gen.-acc. "^ ic^ji
13 IcLc xi'iLi* nlcii il>^* indeclinable
14 wCLft jyijuj »wXLfr «jK I „
— o
It/ ywwL& 2UIaaO 8^^!wX AaaO n
20 ^.wCLfc inflected, like all the tens, as a
pluralis sanus.
'-'-■ j^o^ >o^ ^o5
30 ^^•^•, 40 jj^*Jj Ij 50 ^j^,^.>»^, 60 ^^X*y,
70 ^jyu-w, 80 jj^Ui*, 90 ^^»A*o
100 xjU (also written xX5, and always so
pronounced, mfatun, the | having no effect on the
pronunciation).
92. THE CARDINAL NUMBERS. 85
200 ^LBLo, 300 &5Lo 1,^-*, 400 k§U l;jt 500
xjLo jm» S. , 600 kjLo o»-w, 700 kjLo *-^, 800 j^jUj
xjLo, 900 iGL>o «.wkO.
*> - ^^ - ^ -
1000 v-IjI, 2000 ^lijt, 3000 o^iT SiSG (v^SM
is here a broken plural of the form Jlii! § 88 No. 17)
&c. 11000 lilt lii S^X 100000 ujVi5\jo, 1000000
The following are the leading points to be noted 92.
in joining the cardinals to the names of the objects
numbered :
The numerals for one (4>^|;) and two are adjec- a.
tives; the numbers from 3 — 10, on the other hand,
are substantives, and take the word indicating the
objects numbered in the genitive plural. They may
also, however, be placed in apposition after the noun.
Whatever their position relative to the substantive
may be — even, in fact, when the latter is altogether
omitted, or when they stand as the predicate of a
sentence — the construction is such that nouns of the
masc. gender take the fem. forms of these numerals,
* Often written iSlJVj &c.
86 93. THE ORDINAL NUMBERS.
and vice versa nouns of the fern, gender take the masc.
forms. Thus: ^j.aaj Rj^* (Xj^* ^yb) three sons,
uyUj jOnI («jnI vci^Lo) four daughters. Also before
broken plurals of which the singular is masculine,
we find the fern, forms of these numerals (3 — 10), as
Jl^s Jo!^' 3 men.
h. The numbers from 11 to 99 are followed by the
word indicating the objects numbered in the accusative
singular, as ^L^s ^jJ^j 30 men.
c. The numbers from 100 upwards take the thing
numbered in the genitive singular as J^^ )LXjo «jJ
400 men.
d. In the compound numbers the nature of the
construction depends on the last numeral. The
particle l is used to join the numbers together; the
units and the tens may stand either before the
hundreds, or after the thousands and hundreds. Thus
the year 1895 is either ^ ]j RjLo ^^}^j ^ykL^^ ijU^
93^ The ordinals have, for the most part, the form
a. of the act. part, of the I stem, as may be seen from
the following:
93. THE ORDINAL NUMBERS. 87
Masc. Fern. Masc. Fern.
!• ^ J^l^ first ^J 6. jjj^oLw Xjw^Lm;
o- ^
3. viJli* xjdLS* 8. j^^Lj 5U>olJ
G" ®^^ G^S^^
5. (jMytfL^ RamwoL^ 10. v-^Lc S^Lfr
11. wcc^ ;5^La- HwCLt abi>La. indeclinable
12. wwLft /tfjLS* HwM<w£ ^^Lj „
13. wCw^ oJLj SwwwLfc iLiJLS* and so on.
The ordinals of the numbers from 20 upwards
are expressed by the corresponding cardinals, as
^•i*^* oJU thirty-third; when larger totals have
to be expressed, the cardinals are used even for the
lower numbers. In dates, as a rule, the cardinal
numbers are used exclusively, as SwwLa ^^* xJlIu ^
5*-sx^| ^l%jo <JJ\^ JuL« id>^*5 in the 1313 th year of
the Hegira (which began on the 24th of June 1895).
Go,
Fractions are usually expressed by the form Joti, b,
G * '
as viiJU a third.
88 94, 95. PARTICLES.
Chapter V. The Particles. (§§ 94—96).
94. The adverbs, prepositions and conjunctions cannot
here be given in detail. The prepositions, like many
adverbs, are still for the most part recognizable as
nouns of three radicals originally, which have preserved
the accusative ending without the nunation. Preposi-
tions therefore always govern the genitive case in
Arabic and may also stand in the genitive in depen-
dence on other prepositions. Thus ^^ above, vith
a subst. Jla4^| ^^s up on the hill.
Note. A few adverbs end in u (which in this case lias
absolutely nothing to do with the nominative termination) as
ojw afterwards; so J^ ^ in the same sense; but as prepositions
jjw or iXW ^ after.
95. The following particles (in alphabetical order)
because written with a single letter are inseparably
joined to the following word, cf. § 8 note.
^ -^^"^ . .
a. I (n) interrogative particle, as Jcxi'l did he kill?
Before the connective Alif: viJU^I for | + dU^I is thy
name . . . ?
b' L-> (a) preposition 'in'; with suffixes thus: 1. ^
in me, 2. masc. ^, 3. masc. s^ (§ I2d) &c.
^- [^ particle of asseveration, as aJjb' by God.
96. PREPOSITIONS AKD CONJUXCTIOXS WITH SUFFIXES. 89
^ shortened from o^-^/, a particle which gives d,
to the impf. the sense of the future, as Jjciijcww he
will kill.
o, then, denotes a less close connection than 1. e.
(J (3) like, as. f.
J a corroborative particle before verbs, especially g.
in oaths, as ^jJuiuJ he will certainly kill; it also
stands before nouns, especially after the particle J. I
(§ 125 « note).
J (b) preposition and conjunction ; before suffixes h.
(except in 1. pers. sing. J) it becomes J, as vjj
to thee.
5 (1, 1) connective particle; as a particle of *•
asseveration it takes the gen., as adUl. by God.
As regards the addition of pronominal suffixes 96.
to the prepositions and conjunctions, the following
points may be noted in addition to what has been
said under § 82.
Before the suffixes of the 1. pers. sing., the final a.
vowel or vocalic ausJaut is dropped as is the case
with the noun; thus Jou 'after' with the suff. of the
1. pers. sing. ;^jJu, but ^iljJu &c.
90 97. DISTINCTION BETWEEN PERF. AND IMPF.
b. In the prepositions Jci upon, and J[ towards,
the final ^ is sounded before suffixes (contrary to
§2^), e.g.
with suff. of the 2. pers. masc. viLLCc, viUJI^
« « « 1. „ » ^, Ui (see § 82 «)
c. The prepositions ^j^ and jtwi double the n be-
fore the suffix of the 1. pers. sing., as ^Lo.
^, ^1 behold, truly, and ^| that, become
with the suff. of the 2. pers. sing. masc. db 1^ and viLI
" » " " 1- " " ^5^1 ^^ t5^l'
„ „ „ „ 1. „ plur. UJ^ or G^,
Oil or LJI
III. NOTES ON SYNTAX. (§§ 97—160).
Chap. I. Moods and Tenses. (§§ 97—104).
97. The perfect expresses a completed action, the
completion of which falls in the past, present or future,
or is thought of as falling in one or other of these
98. THE PERFECT. 91
periods. The imperfect expresses an uncompleted
action, which may likewise fall in each of the same
three spheres of time.
The perfect is, in the first place, the tense of 98.
narration (perfectum historicum), when an action com- ^'
pleted in the past is spoken of, and may, as a rule,
be rendered by our past tense, as jo\ ^L^ Zaid came.
By the perfect the idea is expressed that an action h.
or a state has continued from the beginning, and still
continues, as iUJLiJI \JiXjis>.\ the learned (always)
disagree (gnomic aorist); JL*j> jJUj God, he is exalted
(from the beginning).
When the perfect expresses an action completed c.
in the present, it is to be rendered by our present,
as \(\s^ dLxjdiftt I present you with this (the affair is
at this moment concluded).
In a sentence containing an oath or a wish, the d.
perfect expresses an action which, in the mind of the
speaker, is completed in the future, as aJUl xliJ God
curse him; also with y 'not', as aJUl x^^^ ^ may God
have no pity on him; oJLjii ^ «^K hy God I do
it not !
When the particle Jo stands before the perfect, e.
the latter may in most cases be rendered by our per-
92
THE IMPERFECT.
feet (either the present or the past perfect), as Jo
Lj*5'j we have (just) mentioned, or we had mentioned.
The perf. with Jo may also he used in the sense given
under sub-section c,
/. When the verb ^^ (to be) stands before the per-
fect (with or without JjJ), we must render as a rule
by our past perfect (pluperfect), as ---lyo jJ^ O
jUio!^l| JUiJb jj^^i vol d3 ^L5 when Moses was
born, Pharaoh had (just) commanded to kill the little
children.
Note. Instead of the above verbal sentence (§ 134), ^jlT
may be followed by a compound nominal sentence (§ 138 d) as ^ir
g. Our conditional is expressed in Arabic by the
perfect, that is, it is represented as something already
accomplished, as \::jS'S'^ Ishouldwish, v:iJ4>3« o^l5^(jL9)
I should have wished."
h. For the perf. after |3l and in conditional sen-
tences see §§ 157, 158.
99. The imperfect indicative is to be rendered accord-
ing to circumstances by our present or our future,
sometimes also by our past progressive (imperfect).
a. If the future is to be expressed with greater pre-
cision than by the Arabic imperfect alone, the latter
99. THE niPEEFECT. 93
has prefixed to it the adverb Oj^w (^nd), which may be
shortened to ^ and is then inseparably joined to the verb
(see § 95^), as (^^ULaj oj!l ye will know (it); jl^wU,
(49 &) we shall show yotT. '^A-^V^
By the imperfect is expressed an action which h.
accompanies another action completed in the past,
or which is still in the future from the stand point / V^'
>^ O J , ^^
of the latter, as J\ jCo liLJ I L Li they came to their
father weeping (cf. § 157 &); ^^>-wCo (jJuJt ^*| he
came to the spring to drink.
The imperfect can also express the continuance c.
of an action in the past; J^JbLiLiLs may also mean
'they were fighting for a considerable time', or 'they
fought repeatedly, with each other'. More frequently,
however, this continuous imperfect is expressed by
a combination of ^li^with the impf. (cf. § 98/. and
note); sometimes we can render such a combination
by our 'was wont to' or 'used to', as *^j J^ ^ <^^L> ^^S
*jc|si> xj^* he used to receive every day three
drachmae.
If Jo stands before the imperfect, a certain in- d.
definiteness is the result, as ^%Sii tXi* *it will most
94 100. THE SUBJUNCTIVE.
likely be that . . .', an idea which is not unfrequeiitly
found in the imperf. without Jo.
Note a. The impf. also stands in direct subordination to
other verbs, as ^^) cJ^ U I ceased not to drink (cf. § 110);
juyUJI JUJ Jxk. he began to speak with the people; J*3l ^j3l U
IoJTI cannot do such a thing.
Note b. Before several verbs (perfects or imperfects) joined
together with 3, it is sufficient to write ^ once, and so with
o^, ^ym and J**.
Note c. ^ir(see note to § 98/*) is frequently followed by a
compound nominal sentence, as y»XL^\ '^yf^ ^Uic yjVT Osman was
wont to visit the graves (the cemetery).
100. The Subjunctive is found in certain kinds of depen-
dent clauses introduced by a conjunction, the action
of which is to be represented as one to be expected
as the result of the action of the principal clause,
and hence as one that is only likely to occur in the
future. Hence this mood is frequently (not always)
used after the conjunctions ^\ that, ^t (from !^ ^jl)
that not, £i until, \S (and I) that, and always after
s!» v5^ »J^ in order that, ^^ (made up of SJ ^J^)
in order that . . not, !| in the sense of 'except that',
'until', as ^"sJSl ^l^ he came in order to visit me;
vI^XJo ^jl sCil he commanded him to write (that he
101. THE MOD. APOCOPAT. OR JUSSIVE, 102. THE MOD. ENERGIC. 95
should write). In like manner the subj. is used after
^ (^^t y) it will not be (the case) that, as ^JL«^t \J
I shall not send him.
The modus apocopatus (or jussive) is found: 101.
1) in positive commands, generally with the particle a.
J prefixed, as v_;JcCaJ let him write.
Note. When such a form is further preceded by ^ and ^
(which is sometimes the case, without any special stress resting
on these particles) J generally loses its vowel, as &13] ^J£%
^^yjoyJl JJ'j2-JL3 and in God let the believers (then, therefore) trust.
2) in negative commands with y, as JlO ^ say not, h.
thou shalt not say. The imperative can never take
a negative.
3) always after Ij, not as a prohibition but as ne- c.
gativing a completed action, as ljwoJ *J he did not
strike, (as the negation of CJJ^i) \ in like manner after
LIJ in the sense of 'not yet'.
4) in the protasis and apodosis of conditional sen- d.
tences, see § 158.
The modus energicus is usually found in assevera- 102.
tions, and particularly in connection with an oath
and the corroborative particle J, as aajwo^ idJL by
God, I will certainly strike him; this mood is also
used with the prohibitive y.
96 103. THE PASSIVE. 104. THE PARTICIPLE.
103. The Passive is employed in those cases in which
the agent, for some reason or other, must not be
mentioned. Hence a sentence like J^jv J^^i* means
'Zaid has been killed (by some person unknown or
who may not be named)'. Our 'Zaid has been killed
by 'Amr', the Arabs express by the active construction.
The passive is frequently found in an impersonal sense
(see § 121 «).
104. With regard to the employment of the participles
the following points are to be noted:
a. The participle (especially as predicate of a nominal
sentence § 122^) frequently expresses our "to be about
to", as dljJI ^t>U u| I am about to come, on the
point of coming, to you.
b. The passive participle is also used impersonally
in Arabic; starting from the sentence au-Lfr /c4^ ^^
fainted (literally: it was covered over him) we can
also say xlXS Z^iJuo ^ he has fainted , fem. "5,
L^jJLe ^MjJuQ. In such constructions the impersonal
part. pass, may be inflected for all three cases and be
determined by the article, as xjuLi /^^^ J^r-? ^)y^
I passed a man who had fainted; ^^^jlJI 5t%-JI o^K
L^^Jli I saw the woman that had fainted.
105, VERB. COMPLEMENTS. 106 108. ACCUS. COMPLEMENT. 97
Chap. II. The Government of the Verb. (§§ 105—117).
In Arabic the verb may take as its complement 105.
either an accusative, or a preposition with its case.
The numerous combinations of the latter sort, in
which the preposition with its case is sometimes the
necessary complement of the action denoted by the
verb, sometimes merely accessory (such, for example,
as specifications of place and time) cannot here be
given in detail. See, however, §§ 114 ff.
The accusative is the case depending immediately 106.
on the verb. We distinguish here the cases in which,
the accusative stands a) as object, p) as predicate,
and y) as limitation or more precise definition, generally
called by grammarians, . the accusative "of nearer
definition".
a) Certain classes of verbs, as for example, verbs 107.
of coming and going, take as direct object the goal
to which the action is directed, e. g. ouuJi JlLj
he went into the house.
Note. On the other hand »iUA-J| ^| Ji.j denotes primarily
the direction of the action towards the goal; C^] ^ JaLj
he went into the house and stayed there.
The following take trvo accusatives: 1) The causa- 108.
tive forms of transitive verbs with one accusative in
- ^ ^ o-o
the I. stem, as -JLt to know; cans. sVl JiJI a^JLc he
Socin, Arabic Grammar.* 7
98 109. THE ABSOLUTE OBJECT.
taught him reading; 2) verbs that express the ideas
of filling or giving, of making into, of considering or
recognising as, of naming, and many others: e. g.
LiLi ijos^l aJUt Joi^ God made the earth (into) a
carpet; tc^t<° 2aj| * "■ he named his son Muhammed.
When a verb of this class is put in the passive, the second
accusative remains, as tc^i<° iuj| -4^ his son was
named Muhammed; Uio^t> ^'.j he was presented with
a dirhem, from the active Uist> sbl he presented him
with a dirhem (for suff. see § 107).
Note a. The two accusatives of such verbs as express the
idea of finding one to be, or considering one as something, stand
to each other, strictly speaking, in the relation of subject and
predicate (§ 139); thus a sentence like U-^l*. l>^ ^^^ nia-J also
be translated 'I found that he waS a gentle old man'. As second
object we may have a verb instead of a noun, as t.^ps.\j!ui ^^^^
'p^\ <^^) they found their payment to be something which was
returned to them = they found that their payment was &c.
Note b. Verbs expressing not an intellectual but a physical
perception are also frequently found with two accusatives. The se-
cond, indeed, is generally regarded as an ace. of condition (§
1136), but sentences like UTU |^ c>-yti», it must be admitted,
may also be translated: I heard 'Amr weeping, i. e. I heard how
*Amr wept.
109. For the purpose of strengthening or of more
precisely defining the idea conveyed by it, every verb
110. THE ACCUSATIVE AS PREDICATE. 99
may take a so-called absolute object. This absolute (or
internal) object consists gf an infinitive, a nomen speciei \ <■
(§ 64 c) or other noun. U sually this object is itself more
precisely defined either by some qualifying word or
phrase (§ 120) or by a genitive, as LLli ^^^5 2u5l
he educated him with a good education, i. e. well;
^.ii^.l bl^ (c^y^ ^® struck him with a stroke
which pained me (for the relative sentence, see § 155);
5jL:i 'iZ*^ *i)ULl he walked in the way of his grand
father. More rarely the absolute object is found with-
out any qualification, as Ljw«S Xil^ he struck him
with a stroke, as much as to say, he struck him a
blow, and what a blow ! CJ^ Swo he wrapped it in
(so many) parcels ; here the absolute object expresses
rather the result of the action.
Note. Sometimes the place of the infinitive is taken by the
mere qualification, as Uji jb ^U. he journeyed long, for Uj> jb \y^ ^U.
he journeyed a long journey, or by some other form of nearer
definition, as lasiLo j*j»5.Jl c^, iA& &ii] ^SJ God allowed him to
capture Jerusalem peacefully = ^La ^si.
p) The accusative stands as the predicate with verbs 110.
which express the idea of being or becoming some-
thing, and is especially common with the verb J^li^
(med. .). This verb signifies either 1) to be in the
7*
100 111. THE ACCUSATIVE AS PREDICATE.
G ^ -- "'
sense of to exist, as ^jv. ^\S' there was (there lived)
a vizier, or 2) to be something (in particular); in
the latter sense it takes its predicate (to adopt
the nomenclature of the native grammarians) in
the accusative, as !^L^ x-j|yo| o^jLS^ his wife was
pregnant. The same construction is adopted by all
verbs of similar signification, such as ,^Mjd\ to be
something late, ^^.j^S to be something early, jL^ to
be or become something a second time, 1\S to remain,
to last, J|v to cease to be something, »Lo to become
something, juJJ not to be something. The place of
the accusative in the predicate may be taken by a
preposition with its case (cf. § 114 ff.), as JoC ^\S
c>.A^M ^ Zaid was in the bouse; ^j^waJI d^Xo ooLT
\jOy^\ ^J<J^ (JiaAl 1%^ the kings of Persia belonged
to the most powerful sovereigns on earth. The con-
struction of ^SS and the others with a finite verb
(§§ 98/; 99 c) must also be understood in this way,
that is, the predicate in such cases consists of a verbal
sentence (§ 135), as |^ji Jo jllllf ^^J^oi the people
had already (prop, early) become weary.
111. The accusative, further, stands in the predicate
112. ACC. OF CONCOMITAlSrCE. 113. ACC. OF ^'EARER DEFINITION. 101
after the negative S}, when the latter, as the Arahs
say, expresses a general negation. The accus. after y,
which is always undetermined, drops its nunation, as
aJUl ^1 xJ! ^ there is (absolutely) no God but Allah.
The accusative is used after the conjunction ; to 112.
indicate concomitance, especially in verbal sentences
(§ 135), as dGir v:i4Al^ Uo what hast thou and -
thy father done? JuyJL wuwl viJ\ Lc I ceased not
to go with (along) the Nile; also without a verb Lo
|jo\. dll what hast thou (to do) with Zaid?
Y) The accusative of nearer definition is employed 113.
in the following cases:
1) To give details of place and time, as Llx«o liiij a.
yU-w. he looked to right and to left of him; L^^ vLL
i^ ^ ^
he journeyed a parasang; ^Li^ LL^ they came late
- " ^^ \ y^ ^
in the evening; xjll^ sjoo siiJo jCi ^ixl| he con-
tinued faithful thereto during his life-time.
2) Very frequently the accusative, as a rule un- h.
determined, appears in verbal (rarely in nominal)
sentences as the accusative of state or condition,
as xJo^XiJI ^1 L^I£o XSu he journeyed, taking the
direction of Medina; LI^TLj tll^ ouyaJ I met 'Amr
weeping.
102 113, 114*. ACC. OF NEARER DEFINITIOX AND EXCLAMATION.
Note a. "With the accusative of condition the student
must be careful to note to which of the nouns in the sentence it
applies; in the last sentence above, for example, it might refer
to the subject pronoun implicit in CUjvSJ instead of to "^Amr.
Note b. Two nouns in the accusative of condition are
often placed beside each other without a conjunction (asyndeton)
as l;)A«i U^j** \^ ^^I (Grod said to Satan): Go out of it (pa-
radise, fern.) as one cast off and despised (for U^j«o see %lh note).
Note c. In some rare cases an infinitive is used (in place
of a participle) to denote a qualifying circumstance; Sy^to JX5 he
* ^ ., ^
was killed bound (i. e. while bound) = I;5'^^.
c. 3) The accusative of 5j9^c?y?cfl^^20w(==accus. of respect),
also in most cases undetermined, expresses a more
precise reference, as llftjCwwwXJ oUaa^^ it (paradise) is
beautiful with reference to staying (there), i. e. as a dwell-
ingplace ; this accus. is especially common with elatives
(§ 63 &) of a more general signification, as Sw^.^^ Juii
stronger with regard to the colour red == redder.
d. 4) The accusative of nearer definition is also em-
ployed to indicate the motive or purpose of an action,
in which case, also, it is mostly undetermined, as
. LL^ 1^5^ *^®y fl^d from cowardice ; nJ \uo\S\ c^^i'
I stood up to do him honour.
114* The accusative may also stand in cases, parti-
cularly in exclamations, where a finite verb can be
supplied, as ^Lg-ll '^ksmS welcome! Here we must
114, 115. THE VERB WITH PREPOSITIONS. 103
supply ouLs^. and the meaning of the phrase comes
to be: thou art come to relatives and a smooth (i. e.
pleasant) place; !^L^ slowly! to be taken as the
absolute object of an imperative understood.
Of the numerous constructions of the verb with 114,
a preposition attention need only be called to the
following.
Many prepositions are still treated as nouns, in
accordance with their original signification (see § 94),
as ^13^1. )5^tXJi ^Aj yjuo he distinguished between
(prop, the distance, difference of) males and females.
Very frequently we find (cf. § 110) the partitive ^
used in this way as object, e. g. ALilaJI ^jjo J.fl he
ate of the food.
A few verbs are construed, with but slight differ- 115.
ence of meaning, now with a direct object, now with
CO, as ^LiJLi he knew it, ju *JLc he knew about it.
Frequently ^^ serves to introduce an object, to which
the action of the verb extends only indirectly, as
ItXjv oju he sent Zaid; ^^LiXJU oou he sent the
writing (i. e. some one with the writing); jJJlII ojlj
he sent the slave, jJjLib ouu, same meaning, but
104 116, 117. THE VERB WITH PREPOSITIONS.
with the understanding that the slave travels under
escort. Verbs of going construed with u> take the
■ sense of bringing, as J^b t JoC ^^\ ^® brought Zaid
the news. — This i^ may also accompany an impera-
tive as a periphrasis of the first person of the dual
and plural, as Uj \jcla\ let (thou) us go, Hi l-^cucj
let (ye) us go.
116. The meaning of many verbs is often so altered
according to the preposition with which they are
construed that a sense quite the opposite of the
original, according to our idiom, is the result; thus
ad Lis is properly: he called (to God) in his favour,
i. e. he blessed him, xlic Lc3 he called (to God)
against him, i. e. he cursed him; w^^L jLiX«ij he
occupied himself with the affair; but with Jv^ (which
contains the idea of separation) ^^1 ^j^ Juu^ij he
was occupied so that he put the affair in question
aside, could not attend to it.
117. Of the various uses of the preposition J (see
§§ 130 ff.), we may call attention to its special use in
dates, particularly in specifying the days of the month,
as ^^ ^yo xJUJ J.y in the first (literally: to the first)
night of (the month) Muharram. fjJL^ JLlJ ftjJ^l
118. DETERMIXATION. ( ^^^ ^^^^JB&ITY
- .-- -. . ■ . ^ .1-. 2LP^T.^hu\^
^Loui Jv>o or with the omission of JLJ
Jtlii /y^ ^^ ^^® ^^™^ ^^ seven nights, which (lif.
§ 155) h'ad elapsed of Sa'ban, i. e. when seven nights
(or days) of S. had passed; oo^ (jLJ) SwCL^ *jn!^
j^Lijof ^^ when still fourteen (nights) were left of
Ramadan. /
Chap. III. The Government of the Noun. (§§118—134).
A noun may take with it a) the article, ^3) a permut- 118.
ative (noun in apposition), y) a qualifying (attribu-
tive) adjunct, h) a genitive.
a) When a noun is preceded by the article, it is said
to be determined (§ 79 &). This determination may be
stronger or weaker:
A very strong determination is found in certain a.
words which contain the idea of time, as aLc.LlJI this
hour = now, ^^jJI this day = today. In these cases
the article has the force of a demonstrative.
By means of the article a single definite object is b.
indicated, which the speaker has in mind, or which
has been already mentioned: by Jc^lJI is meant some
particular known man. Proper names furnished with
the article (see § 19 a) were originally appellatives
with the determination, as ^^..^lif.
106 119. APPOSITION.
c. The determination by the article often serves
merely to denote the species or class to which some-
thing belongs, as sU^I Jcl« Jt he is like an ass.
This use of the article is named the generic.
119. P) From among the cases in which a noun follows
another noun in apposition, the following may be
singled out as worthy of note:
a. « A substantive may have in apposition words
expressing a) size, b) resemblance, c) the parts and
d) the material of which a thing is made up. Thus
G ^ Go-'
a) els 6 ^yj a dress an ell long (lit. a dress, an ell);
b) Jos Jla^o J^. a man like (lit. the likeness of)
Zaid; c) ^LoJ Ju:s» a rope made up of rotten pieces;
d) JotXil (vi'LiI the iron finger-ring; when undeter-
^ y G ^ "
mined preferably with ^j^ as ^^^^> J^c a.jLo an idol
of gold. For the last, the genitive construction is
also found viz: v^^jJI *Jv«o.
6. The word J^ totality is construed either with the
noun following in the genitive, or stands in apposition,
with a suffix referring back to the noun, as jj^LDI Ji^
or fV.gJL5^jiwQj| all men. (Note that Jo'being a substan-
tive always remains unchanged as regards gender and
number).
120. QUALIFYING ADJUNCTS. 107
Y) a substantive may be qualified 1) by an adjective, 120.
2) by a preposition with its case, or 3) by a relative
clause (§§ 155—6).
1) The qualifying word may be an adjective^ as a.
Jt>Lc. *Uol an honest Imam; in this case if the
substantive is determined the adjective must also
receive the determination, as JoLill *Uo^l|, the honest
Imam.
The adjective follows its substantive; to this rule h.
the demonstrative pronoun forms an apparent excep-
tion, in as much as it generally stands before (like the
article § 118), less frequently after ^ the substantive
which it qualifies. Thus we find *ikiJ| I j^ this slave,
alongside of Ij^ ^^^oLfl.
The adjective must agree with its substantive in c,
gender and number, as ^i^^ *^H^ ^ pretty girl.
Among the exceptions is the word ^^^Oo much, which
generally remains unchanged, like a noun in apposi-
0 - s ^
tion, even after the plural, as wAA5^JL:i., many men.
That the broken plurals take their adjectives in d.
the feminine has been already noted (see § 87«); the
adjective, however, may also take a broken plural, as / /
aIwT JLis, noble men. The plur. sanus, moreover, is not
108 121. PREPOSITIONAL PHRASE AS ADJUNCT.
unfrequently found especially if the adjective qualifies
words denoting living beings, as ^-^L^JI ib ^ I the
ancestors that were of old (part, of j^-^)- ^^ ^^ same
circumstances the collectives (§ 86 a) may also take a
plural adjective, as i.^V^ * Jj miserly people, ^.j^Lb *Js
violent people. The preceding pronoun often stands
then in the plural, as ,jj-uJ| ^!j*P these men; but
with fern, plurals that do not denote living beings
generally in the fem. singular, as v:i>| JUJI s jjo these
deserts; before broken plurals also in the fem. sing., as
viLJUiJI 5 jcJC these slaves.
2) From those cases in which a preposition with its
J21. noun is dependent on a verb (§§ 114 ff.) or its equi-
^' valent, must be clearly distinguished those in which
they form the qualifying attribute of another noun,
as -jjJJLj ijLo J<£. \^:^JLXs^ I sat down beside a
goldsmith (who was) in the bazaar; djJu ,j-^ '^^.)i>
thy posterity (that will be) after thee.
Sometimes this attribute does not stand next to
b. the word qualified; so particularly with the relatives
,%Jo and Uo, as ^-j^I ^jjo iLiJI J^t> ^ those of
the Arabs that advanced into Syria; oLio Li L.^1
122. ASYNDETON OF ATTRIBUTES. 123. THE GEXITIVE. 109
&LwujJI r\^ *Xf marry of the women whatever seemeth
good unto you.
Should several attributes qualify a single substan- 122.
tive, the connecting conjunction is usually omitted
(asyndeton), as ^xkiJI JJtJ! iJUl the high and mighty
God; ibwiiJI ljI*-?I Jvo /t^U ^b a wide gate of the
gates of the town; iJJh3 aLwl, ,^^ K^.-^uo aLoU-t
a thick cloud over his head which gave him shade.
h) One noun, when in dependence on another, is put 123.
in the genitive case — the function of which is to deter-
mine more exactly the application of the preceding
noun. As the result of the close connection subsisting
between the second noun and the first, the latter, now
said to be in the construct state (§ 79 c) and therefore
without the article, is regarded as determined. There-
fore ^.LjiJI ^sx>> is 'the (particular) spear of the
(particular) horseman', and so with the suffixes, as
2L^. his (particular) spear. When the dependent noun
(nomen rectum) is undetermined, the governing noun
(nomen regens) is only defined in a generic sense
(§118 c), or is specialized in a way resembling the
generic definition, as sdJLc ou-s a daughter of a king
= a king's daughter.
110 124.CONS.AND GEN.IXSEP. 125. DETER.BYSUFF. 126. COMPOS. NOUNS.
Note. More rarely, in the latter case, the generic article
SB « J<»»
may be attached to the nomen rectum, as y^tJ^\ ^ja. barley bread
124. The genitive cannot be separated from the go-
verning word (nomen regens); adjectival and other
additions must therefore stand after the genitive, as
«.«jtJI viLiiJl vii^^Aj the spacious house of the king.
When, according to our idiom, a genitive belongs to
two substantives, in Arabic it is made dependent on
the first of the two, and represented with the second
by a personal pronoun, as ^uuo• xJUl iU^^ the mercy
and blessings of God.
125. Substantives conveying the idea of time sometimes
receive a specially strong determination by the addition
of suffixes (cf. § 118 «), as 2JL1I jLo he prayed his
night, i. e. the particular night in which he then was.
lie. The close connection of two nouns thus standing
in the genit. relation makes sometimes possible their
fusion to one idea, although only the first component
admits of inflection. Thus xJUl jJx. (gen. xiJI tX^;
ace. aJLf! tXlt) the servant of Allah, as a proper name,
conveys but a single idea. Further illustrations will be
found in the numerous examples of composite proper
names, of which one of the elements is one or other of the
words ^1 son, CA father, ciJj daughter, jl| mother.
127. SUBST. USE OF ADJJ. 128. EXPLICATIVE GENITIVE. Ill
As the Arabs have no family names, properly so-called,
the name of a man or woman receives for distinction's
sake an addition by the help of the above words, as
Jowj jj^ (Xt^ U^yj^' V?' (observe the order). Very
frequently a name thus made up has become the
principal name, as that of the first Caliph ^xj •jl,
for example, or that of the savant iujuCi* ^^U names
of tribes, too, like s.^JL5 ^Lj, are in the same way
simple notions (Einheitsbegriffe).
Not unfrequently an adjective which in our idiom 127.
would be made to qualify its substantive, is in Arabic
raised to the rank of a substantive, on which its proper
substantive is made to depend ; thus xoAi> ^.S the
noble(ness) of his character = his noble character;
y^UJl Ji6\ most men. The same construction is found
with elatives also, as x-«iuut jjy^l !«-wLc they lived
the easiest life (cf. § 109).
A species of explicative genitive is found in cases 128.
where a general conception is more explicitly defined
by a following proper name, as ^j^l ^J the land
of Yemen. — Under this head may be reckoned the
suffixes appended to numerals, as ^ (l'^'^^''^ the three
of them.
112 129. CLAUSE AS GEN. 130. PERIPH. OF GEN. 131. CONS. OF INFIN.
129. A few words containing the ideas of time and
place may have, instead of a genitive, a whole clause
depending on them, as Jjci* *5«> on the day on which
he was killed.
130. When a noun on which another noun is in the
proper sense (cf. § 134) dependent must remain absolu-
tely undetermined (see § 123), the usual genitive rela-
tion of nomen regens and nomen rectum is inadmissible,
and the connection of the two must be expressed by
a preposition, as Ji} • | a brother of yours, where
jjG is attrib. adjunct to • I (see § 121 «).
131. Infiniiives may govern their object according to
the laws either of verbal or of nominal government.
In the first instance their subject is subordinated in the
genitive; Jo; J^XiJ accordingly means: the circumstance
that Zaid has killed. If no subject is named, the object
may likewise stand in the genitive, so that the same
expression Jov Joci* may also mean : the circumstance
that Zaid has been killed, the fact of Zaid's being killed.
When both subject and object are present, the former
is treated as a subjective genitive ; the latter remains
in the accusative or J with the genitive is used as a
periphrasis for the accusative, as y^\ lo^-xi 2lLo^IJuo
132. PARTICIPLE WITH OBJECT. 113 -
the circumstance that he was constantly drinking
0"? w J
wine; . t^J ^^-^^ the circumstance that I am fond
of wine. J also stands after an undetermined infinitive
(e. g. in cases like § 113^ and others) as UCi'l o^*
Jop I stood up to do honour to Zaid.
In the case of the participle, the object of the 132.
verb appears as the objective genitive, and when the
part, has the sense of the perfect it is determined by
the genitive following, as ,jo>^t (3JLL ^JU! God is
he who has created the earth = the creator of the
earth. With a present or future sense the governing
participle is not determined, as ^j-iJl 'iJ^\b ^y*JLi Jo
every soul is one that will taste of death ; JliS%^ aJj^
he is one that will meet with you. If the participle
is in itself determined, the object stands in the
accusative or is expressed periphrastically with J, as
[JLfJLJ vlJUaJI he who strives after knowledge; the
same applies when the participle is strictly undeter-
mined, as auot nU CJLb one who wishes to take
blood revenge for his father; *^Lw^ LLs? oJs Lo I
have not ceased to love Islam.
Socin, Arabic Grammar.^ 8
114 133. UNDETEEM. STAT. CONSTR. 134. IMPROP. ANNEXATION.
133. A special idiomatic use of certain generic words
is their combination with a following genitive. They
are determined or undetermined according to the
context, e. g. .6 he who has, possessor of (cf. § 90/),
JLo ,3 the possessor of wealth, a rich man; v_^Lo
companion, owner, JJic v^j=».Lothe man of sense; J^l
people, LyjJt J^l people of the world= worldly people;
(jdxj portion, e. g. &LJLiJ! u>d*j one, some of the
learned; tx^ prop, change, then 'another than', as
5yj^ s Joiu viJUUi viJULJJI ^Lo the king died and another
than he reigned after him; similarly ^xij one, as
*jCtX^t one of them; finally ^j^jl son,in certain common
idioms, as XjLw ^jjo^* ^I thirty years old.
134. A special kind of genitive relation is presented
by the so-called improper annexation, by which a
participle or a verbal adjective (see § 60 &) is more
strictly limited or defined by a following genitive, as
«is^ Jl ^j.jufcfli- Jii^) ^ ^^^ beautiful of countenance.
This construction is best rendered by a relative clause,
the subject of which will be the word that more clearly
defines the governing idea, in other words the genitive
of the Arabic will be the nominative of the English,
a man whose countenance is beautiful. In such a case
135, 136. THE VERBAL SENTENCE. 115
the governing word is not determined by the following
genitive; should the latter require to be determined,
it may receive the article (contrary to the rule in
§ 123) as at&.Jl ^jJ^\ J^ Jl the man of the beautiful
countenance, i. e. whose countenance is beautiful.
Chapter IV. The Simple Sentence. (§§ 135—151).
Sentences in Arabic are of two kinds, verbal and 135.
nominal.
The chief characteristic of a verbal sentence is the
fact that it always contains a finite verb ; in fact, a
verb of this kind with its inherent (subject) pronoun
is in itself a complete verbal sentence, as ool^ thou
hast struck. This type of sentence always expresses
the commeficement of some activity^ understood in the
widest sense. If a special exponent of the idea con-
veyed by the subject of the verb is added, it follows
the verb in the case appropriate to the subject, viz.
the nominative, as Ju\ C>^ he has struck, Zaid (has)
= Zaid has struck, whereby Zaid is singled out as
the agent.
In the verbal sentence, the finite verb does not 136.
always agree in gender and number with the following
8*
116 136. CONCORD IN THE VERBAL SENTENCE.
subject. The following are the chief points to be
noted in this connection:
a. The verb stands in the masculine singular before
sound or outer plurals, and generally before the masc.
forms of the dual.
b. The verb stands in the feminine singular 1) before
a sing. fern, if it follows the verb immediately, 2) be-
fore sound plurals feminine, 3) before the fern, forms
of the dual, and 4) before broken plurals (cf. next
sub-section).
c. The verb stands in the masculine or feminine singular
1) before a sing. fem. not immediately following the
verb, 2) before collectives, 3) before broken plurals
denoting male persons ; if these plurals do not imme-
diately follow the verb, the latter in most cases takes
the masc. singular form.
d. Once the subject is introduced, the verbs following
agree with it in gender and number, as jJLL. Jo; ^l^
t JU*. iJUl lXa^* there came Zaid, Halid and'Abdallah
and they said. After collectives also the verb, in such
a case, often takes the plural, as tsSjsujI ,jL^-ijtJl o^-*dx)
the young people set out to follow him. So too after
words like l^i* and others. Still it is always possible
for the verb to remain in the singular, as JwJp>^
137. INDEFINITE SUBJECT. 117
&M*1^ J^ ^\0^ l^jo nuj^ and the Kuraishites
(the tribe Kuraish) imprisoned whomsoever they
could imprison.
A subject unknown, or purposely left unnamed, 137.
is treated as follows (cf, French on dit, German man
sagt) :
1) The verb is put in the 3. pers. sing, of the a. ^
passive (see § 103), as 2uJI^ JLlo they journey to him.
It is to be noted that this impersonal passive can
never stand without a complement (here «jjI).
2) Or in the 3. pers. plur. of the active, as | JU h.
they said.
3) Or in the 2. pers. sing, (or plur.) of the active, c.
e. g. in the Kur'an ooK! or aJCjIJ dost thou think?
do ye think? where it is not any particular persons
that are addressed, but people in general, as much
as to say 'could any one suppose that ....?' Jju one
might say (cf. Eng. 'as you might say').
4) There may be added to the verb a subject d.
(participle) formed from the same root, as Job* JU or
JoLflJI jUj some one said; jsJ^jjo ^^fJl !^K J w«fli>
a castle, the like of which had never been seen.
Note. The case of an undefined complement of a verbal
action being expressed by a substantive derived from the verb is
118 138. INDEFINITE SUBJ. 139. NOMINAL SENTENCE.
not unfrequently met elsewhere than in the above construction,
e. g. UaS5 JX5 aliquem (interfectum) interfecit, J)^ &«J j^Jl>w II
they did not fear the reproof of any reprover.
138. Occasionally, out of sometliing that has heen
mentioned, a story or the like, there arises an in-
definite subject corresponding to our "it", which is
usually expressed by the feminine of the verb; for
example, after a fable or the like, %^ oJ^tXi? and
it (i. e. this story) passed into a proverb.
139. The nominal sentence^ in contrast to the verbal
sentence, expresses a state or condition of the subject.
This last as a rule stands at the head of the sentence
in the case appropriate to the subject, viz. the nomina-
tive ; in most cases it is determined while the predicate
is undetermined. The predicate may consist of one
or other of the following:
a) a simple noun, as (JLi <Xjv Zaid is wise;
V) a preposition and its case, as JjJt ^ J^vJI the
man is in the house;
c) an adverb, as Ll^ aJUl <Xa.c 'Abdallah is here.
d) a complete sentence, which may be either a) a
verbal sentence, or P) a nominal sentence; the whole
^ ^ S 0^
now becomes a compound sentence. Exx.: a) ,jOy>o Jo\
Zaid (he) is ill; s^jf <jiwo Jo^ Zaid, his father is
140, 141. NOMINAL SENTENCE. 119
ill; P) ^»yMO sol Jo; Zaid, his father is aged (i. e.
Zaid's father &c.). The sentence constituting the
predicate must contain a pronoun referring back to.
the subject. The subj. thus placed at the head of
the sentence has been wrongly named the nominative
absolute.
Note. The difficulty we feel in distinguishing between ^yc
j>i3 and >~»yc jj^^ Zaid has struck, may be explained in this way.
In the first of these two expressions it is the act of striking that
is uppermost in the speaker's mind, and the enquiry as to the
subject or agent from whom the act proceeds is answered with
Zaid, on which the logical emphasis now rests. In *^yc j^^j, on
the other hand, we start with Zaid as a given subject or agent,
and the question as to what is to be predicated regarding this
subject or as to what this agent has done is answered by ^^,
on which in its turn the logical centre of gravity, so to say,
comes to rest.
Between subject and predicate, when both are 140.
determined, there ought to stand the pronoun of the
3. person, but this rule is not always observed, as
j^l ye ^JLI! God is the living One. — Sometimes,
also, this pron. merely serves to emphasize the
subject.
In negative and interrogative sentences the predi- 141.
Go- - o"^
cate stands before the subject, as Ju\ ^\ where is
Zaid? I^j ^vo *X) Li ye have no helper (in which
case the subject ^I receives the addition of \jo
120 142. NOMINAL SENTENCE.
(= Frencli du, &c.) as strengthening the negation). In
the same way a predicate consisting of a preposition
and its noun, or of an adverb, stands before the subject
when the latter is undetermined and is not more
precisely defined by any qualifying word or phrase,
as HlLol sIjJI ^ in the house is a woman; J^o |V^x)
Ix\ among them are some who maintain.
Note. A predicate of this sort may even stand before a
determined subject, but in that case the logical emphasis is on the
subject, as ^^'y ^^JJ*, Zaid is with me, while in ^^ 0.^3 the
logical stress is on the predicate; Zaid is with me.
142. Verbal adjectives (§ 60&), in virtue of the verbal
idea inherent in them, sometimes stand as predicate
"before the noun in the place of a finite verb, as Jov
ll«.i s.-?! ^^>L3 Zaid, his father struck Amr = Zaid's
father &c. The predicate, thus placed in advance,
frequently agrees in gender and number with its subject
following, as ^J^J^ '^yij\ whose hearts have been
inclined (to Islam), but in respect of case it agrees
with the word on which this kind of sentence is
generally dependent, as aju^ o tX^ ^ with a mouth,
whose saliva is sweet; L^Ol RiJUis? Cj\%3 LIjI; we
found animals, the species of which differed from each
other, of different sorts. A circumstantial accusative
143, 144, 145. NOMINAL SENTENCE. 121
(§ 113 &) may also, in this way, refer to a following
subject, although it is really dependent on the preced-
ing verbs, as s^jI LIsI* JoC :^L^ Zaid came, while his
father rode.
When the subject of a nominal sentence consists 143.
of a demonstrative pronoun, the latter agrees in gen-
der with the following predicate, as ib^l^ s j^ this
is a female slave.
The predicate of Li not (often also that of J^ 144. u^
§§ 50 and 110, and of /.li^§ 110 when occurring with a
negative) is introduced by v^, as viJUUj ! j^ Lo this is
no king.
In the relation of subject and predicate (cf. § 119«) 145.
may stand in Arabic:
A thing and its dimensions, as Lils<3 ^y^ A^«t| a.
the pillar is thirty cubits (high).
A thing and that which it resembles, as jd/j »Il! | h. ,
LJpl selling is the likeness of (is like) usury; and so
with vj (§ 95/), which likewise may stand in any of
the three cases.
A thing and its parts, as ^Uub «jnI ^^\ J^ c. ^
the kings of the Persians fall into four divisions.
122 146. NOM. SENT. 147. NOM. SENT. WITH 'iwwa, 'a?ma.
d. A thing and its material JotX^ joLo^I u»d*S
oyi^ Llj^ajul one part of the toes was of iron and
another of clay.
146. In certain cases a pronoun has to be supplied as
subject of a nominal sentence, as J<i^ xj JUb it is
said of him "he is Muhammed", i. e. he is called
Muhammed, prop. = iX4^ yo.
147. The particles ^jl^ {T^SiT}) behold, and ^| that (cf.
* § 96^), the compound particles JjO {,^S) never-
theless, j^lj as if, ^^ because, and other combinations,
and also JJu perhaps, ouJ would that, are all follow-
ed by a nominal sentence the subject of which stands
in the accusative, as l^S I Jo\ J^l^ behold (truly) Z.
is generous. The predicate of the nominal sentence
following J^l or ^|, if it should consist of an adverb
or a preposition with its case (see §§ 139, 141), may
stand before the subject, which must still be in the
accusative, as !^L^\ LLc ^\^ verily (only in the rarest
cases translatable) here is a man; Uit^ X**UJI ^^ ^jl
in the citadel is a prison.
Note. Sometimes a qualifying phrase consisting of a preposi-
tion and its case appears, in addition, before the subject, as ^ ^^
^-. ^ ..^^
&^\^ .^^ I have a request (to make) of thee.
148. NOMINAL SENT. WITH 'inntt AND ^anna. 123
The corroborative particle J (§ 95^) is frequently h.
prefixed to the predicate after a preceding J^l^, as
J^Lo ^J bbl Jjl truly our father is in error; or
even to the subject, as sJjlI dlj^ ^ ^^1 truly there-
in is an example.
After the particles above mentioned, the pronoun c.
of the 3. pers. sing, masc, as the so-called pronoun
of the fact, is sometimes used as the subject of a
nominal sentence; the predicate, in this case, consists
of a complete sentence (cf. § 139^), as ^JUj ^ xjl
- > c^
^•»*^JI of a truth (= the fact is), the evil-doers do
not prosper; .\y=^ •jJ Jw^ ^o xj 1 Joo it is rela-
ted that M. had four female slaves.
c
While ^1 introduces a new and independent sen- 148.
" 05 ^ a.
tence, one introduced by ^\ always forms part of
another sentence, as ^^»i ^^ jLa aJUl ^^1 Jou *JI
wjjo knowest thou not that God is mighty over all;
here the sentence beginning with A is really the ob-
ject. In JC4-&I iol 3 ^iJwCio i*-^ there has never been
any doubt that he is blind, the sentence with ^\ is
virtually in the genitive; in ^<>^ ^u! jc6*^ ^^ ^^^
reached my ears that he is married, it represents the
subject.
124 148. SENTENCES WITH 'ttfi und md.
b. Verbal sentences introduced by ^| also form in
this way an integral part of the principal sentence ; a
distinction must be made, however, between two va-
rieties of this construction. If the sentence beginning
with ^1 asserts that something is now going on, or
that it has now ceased, the verb in the subordinate
clause remains in the indicative, as \\ \jq o4^
(or simply ^|) J^^ ^ I am surprised that he takes
the field against me, |^iix> ^^\ J[ dUj I^JLiii and
they did this until they died ; if, on the other hand,
something is conceived as falling in the future and
therefore still uncertain, the subjunctive (cf. § 100)
is required, as I Jo Jotii ^^1 dU it falls to thee to do
SO, u^.a.1^1 ^yo .iX^ ^\ j^xUj it is fit and proper
that thou shouldst guard against shameful actions.
Note. Sometimes the preposition which indicates the relation
of the two parts of the sentence is omitted before ^ and ^1, as
ffl* - i s= - .'
^jjl ^J = ^U JUj this was for the reason that, and it was so,
because &c.
c. In the cases discussed in the above sub-section
an infinitive may take the place of ^1 with the finite
verb. Quite as frequently as ^| in such cases, we
find Uo with the finite verb (of course always in the
149. SEVERAL PREDICATES. 150. NEGATIVE SENTENCES. 125
^ 0 ^ " , GS
indicative), as |jo\ oowo uLo v.:>J!r^ I am surprised
that thou hast struck Zaid = jjo* i^yc Jwx. The
use of this so-called infiiiitive-m« is very common;
thus we have it in ^^(as) — made up of (^and Uo —
with a verbal sentence: ^l^i, Vr^ ^-^^b Vr*^ ^^^^
was beaten as 'Amr was beaten.
When more than one predicate is required in a 149
nominal sentence, they generally follow each other
without a conjunction (cf. §§ 122, 113 &, note b), as
0 ^ s ^ ^
l^jJLt lflA.ft.& ^\^ I am attentive and well-informed.
The same is the case with the predicates of the verb
^^li^ (which frequently occurs as the substantive verb)
and the verbs akin thereto (see § 110), as xXJUmJI ^^
L^j^dxj^ ^y}» \ j^^.t..'^ HiljU^ \hAx,^ v^'yl y^\ y-*r^
t,ji.Aj.o the kingdom will in the latter days become
mixed and a prey to dissension, and one of which
one part will be strong and another weak.
In negative verbal sentences we find Uo with the 150.
perfect, as ljj-Cw Lo he did not drink, or ^ with the
apocopated impf. (jussive, cf. § 101 c).
With the impf. indicative Lo is used, as ^yM Uo b.
126 151. EXCEPTIVE PARTICLE.
he does not drink, or Sf with the same tense il>l*io ^
he does not, or he will not drink.
Other uses of S are (a) with the apoc. impf. (cf.
§ 101 &) and (b) with the perfect (cf. § 98 d). As negativ-
ing an act in the past Si can only stand before the per-
feet when two perfects come together, as S"! ^_w Juo ^
Jco he neither believed nor prayed, or after sentences
with other negatives.
Note. A j)receding negative, even in the same sentence, is
frequently resumed by means of IJ, as ^ua-lo o^ ^i^A^I ixsw J he
did not find the village nor yet his friend again.
151. After the exceptive particle ^| that which is ex-
cepted stands in the accusative when a positive sentence
precedes, as ljo\ ^1^ jj>.UJ| t\s^ the'people came, ex-
cept Zaid; when a negative sentence precedes that
which is excepted is less frequently in the accusative,
but rather, as a rule, in the same case as the word
to which the limitation or exception applies, as Lo
t\j\ *i\ f»y^l ^^ the people came not, except Zaid;
4>ov ^1^ tX^L ^;vo tx) I passed no one except Z.?
\>^ !^t \d^\ v:iol^ Li I have struck no one, excepi;
'Amr. Very frequently in such cases it is the exception
that brings us the necessary logical complement, as
152. CO-ORDINATE SENTENCES. 127
Ju'o ^t ^5^ ^ ^ have not passed (anyone) except
Zaid, i. e. I have passed only Zaid.
Note. Also in the sentence &Ul ^f ill ^ (§ 111) there is no
God but Allah, the last word is in the nominative, because it is
the logical subject (there is no God, if not Allah; but Allah is).
In the sentence ^tJ^«J| ^JWI 41)0 2)f 85J 2/3 J^a. U there is neither
power nor strength except (in union) with Allah, the high and
mighty One, the ideas of power and strength (8^*^ J)**) ™^st
logically be supplied before the exception.
Chapter V. Compound Sentence. (§§ 162—161).
Co-ordinate sentences are as a rule joined together 152.
by a copulative particle. Thus a simple co-ordinated
sentence is usually introduced by ; (§ 95 e), as J^3
JLs. Jo\ Z. entered and said, o (§ 95 e), on the other
hand, is used when the connection of the two sen-
tences is less close, when, for example, the second event
follows the first only after a certain interval, as ^joJa
^y^ Jo\ Zaid was ill; soon after he died, o, according-
ly, is often used when the subject is changed, as joC *l^
iJ oJUi Zaid came; and so I said to him. ".U with
a following nominal sentence expresses the motive of
the action and is to be rendered by 'then', 'therefore'.
128 153, 154. RELATIVE CLAUSES.
Note a. In lively narrative prose the connective particles
are often dispensed with, particularly when the story is told in
dialogue form, the words of each speaker being then mostly intro-
duced by a simple Jl5.
Note b. As illustration of the omission of the connectives
(asyndeton) must not be quoted certain combinations of two verbs
(cf. § 99 note a), in which the second verb denotes rather the
end to which some more general activity is directed; such, for
example, is the imperfect with verbs denoting a beginning. In
other cases, a perfect may be made to depend on a perfect, an
imperfect on an imperfect, an imperative on an imperative, as
]ylj\ju lyolJ they arose and fought with each other; l^Ibxl *^
arise and woo her.
Note c. Among the connective particles ^X^ may also, in
result expected in the future (§ 100), but denotes the actual
completion of an action, as in the sentence &JCo jy ^^Xs>. y\m he
journeyed until he alighted at Mecca = he journeyed and at last
alighted &c. In such cases ^^X^ may also be followed by an imperf.
03
indicative or by ^J with a nominal sentence.
153. Relative sentences or clauses are of two kinds,
those which do not accompany a noun and those
which do accompany and qualify a noun. As regards
the asyndetical connection of seyeral qualifications,
the latter class is subject to the same treatment as
the qualifying adjuncts discussed in §§ 120 — 122.
154. Those relative sentences that do not depend on
or qualify a noun are introduced either by ^ jj| (see
§ 14 «) he that, that which, whoso, &c., which is
155. RELATIVE CLAUSES. 129
declinable and always determined, or by the indeclin-
able pronouns ^ (he that, one that, whosoever, those
that, such ... as) and Co (that which, a thing that, what).
The former is sometimes determined, sometimes unde-
termined. Exx: xiLiiJI v^^^ (^ '^^W '^r^(J^<^^^
those that reject our revelations, they will be the people
of the left hand (Jo jJI is here in the nom. as being
the subject); Luyb v::JiJLia. ^j^ J^(l (the devil said:)
Shall I fall down before one whom thou hast formed
of clay {^ is here in the genit.) ? *^t^L? \jyy^,
*-^ JLL ^jJjl^ Li they speak with their mouth what
is not in their hearts (Lo is here accus.).
A relative clause is made to follow and qualify 155.
a substantive by means of j^ jJI only when the sub-
stantive in question (the antecedent) is determined',
with it j^tXJI agrees in gender and number, as o^wo
■A^ i^JJI J^ Jl I struck the man that came. The
explanation of this is that ^^jJI is originally not a
relative in our sense of that word, but a demonstra-
tive, and as such it is always determined. The above
sentence, for example, means, strictly speaking: I
struck that man there, he came. On the other hand
Socin, Arabic Grammar.*
130 156. RELATIVE CLAUSES.
OS^
the relative clause is appended without ,c JJI when
the antecedent is undetermined, as ^L^ liviTs ^"li
I struck a man who came (prop. I struck a man, he
came).
Note. ^oJI is also dispensed with when the antecedent is
only determined in a general sense (i. e. when it has the generic
article see § 118 c?), as I^U-I J*^^ yUs^S Ji^J' like an ass that
carries hooks.
156. The relative clause, which we have seen to be
strictly speaking merely a verbal or a nominal sen-
tence subordinated to an antecedent noun, ought by
rule to contain a pronoun referring back to this an-
tecedent, as ^^kh. sol ^^d^S J^Ul the man whose
father is rich; ItX^i ^Zw ^1 &J ^^lyhe had a son,
who was named M. (in this case the pronoun is im-
plied in the verb); Jo\ k} JUj J^n a man who is
named Z. (prop, of whom it is said: [he is] Zaid, cf.
§ 146). The pronoun which in this way points back
to the antecedent may stand in any part of the rela-
tive sentence ; thus in the sentence (ji^^^ ^^ Vr* ^
Juuu xjl Jwb ;^ jJl the army had come up close to
him, regarding which he thought that it was still at
a distance, it does not appear till we reach the sen-
55 ^ S3 ^
tence which is subordinated by ^1 to the verb .jij?.
157. CIRCUMSTANTIAL CLAUSES. 131
Collectives which denote living creatures (cf. § 136^)
may be followed here also by a plural verb, as
jTj-JjOjj ^Js people that believe.
Note a. The omission of the pronoun, however, is not un-
frequent, especially when it would merely consist of a suffix of
the 3. person, as CJJ Lo ^^Ic CmojJ for 4Xl5 I regret what I said.
Note b. In certain cases the antecedent may be repeated in
the relative clause; indeed, this is the favourite construction with
Jf as »->ur 1U9 X^JJo j.j^ JT iiu^ ^]jJ JjjD jJ^ j^jlTthe (idol)
Hubal had seven arrows (for casting the lot), of which each single
arrow had writing upon it.
A special kind of subordinate sentence is the 157.
circumstantial clause. Such a clause may consist:
1) Of a nominal sentence introduced by the particle a.
., the subject of which may have been already men-
tioned or may be something quite new, as xjl*! v:ioLo
ajCo ^11 ^^J^i; (c^5 Amina died while she was return-
ing to Mecca; vajLo iCol. Jo\ v:yLo Zaid died while
his son was still young; with a compound nominal
sentence iUj^XiJ! <X*flib ye. nLI he journeyed taking
Medina as his goal. A sentence, whose predicate con-
sisting of a preposition and its case comes before
its subject, ace. to § 141, may stand as a circumstan-
, , " Go-' ^ ^ 9 0^^
tial clause, without ., as ^Ji ^^. di^) oc:^Vi^ I
went out with a bow in my hand.
9*
132 158. TEMPORAL CLAUSES.
h. 2) Of a verbal sentence frequently; in this case the
imperf. either stands alone or is preceded hy JL^r.
When the sentence is a negative one, the negative is
y or Uo^; or the verb may stand in the apoc. impf. with
jj or jjl (as the negation of the perf.). We may
also have the perfect with jjl or [jl?*, when negative
with Uo.; thus we get the following: dl^stj Jo\ *Li
Z. came laughing; ooli^ 1'%1. j ^y^. ^^^ J^s
Ua^ JXl! ^f oot-b jo^ L^L^ (^)Y^^ (Zakariya)
said: how shall I have a male child, seeing my wife
is barren and I have reached too great an age; J^.^3
,^ ivi*^ y ^-P^ ^® entered the room without
greeting me.
Note. In contrast to the stiffer accusative of condition
(§ 113 &) the verhal circumstantial clause expresses the commence-
ment of the action; there is very little difference, however,
between ,iXs\jQj^ ^J^ zl^ and l^Lo o^^ i\s^.
158. In temporal clauses (also in conditional clauses)
■ which are formed with the particle 13 1 when, if, we find
in the protasis as well as in the apodosis the perfect
in the sense of our present or future, ^S ,j^l^ 161
xjuLfi oJj yo^l when John takes the thing in hand,
its difficulties are easily surmounted.
159. CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 133
Noxe a. The imperfect maj'^ also stand after ! j[ if the action
takes place repeatedly. Should I Jl be followed by a compound
nominal sentence, as ^yx^ «*^' '-^l when hell is heated, it is
considered that this is but another way of writing what we should
o
expect to find expressed in a verbal sentence (and so with y^^).
Note b. A sentence with IJI may also be inserted between
two closely related words, or rather it is to be regarded as form-
ing with its apodosis a complete unitj'. Thus : l«si \j[ ^bO U^ili
, — «* «^ ^ ^ ^
lil*i J there were two gates, which when they were opened
could not be shut (again). In the apodosis to IJI a perfect is found
where we should expect an imperfect (cf. § 99c), as Ij/^I l«3^ lyW
4S*vdU \y^ I^aUsI^ lU.^ they were wont, when they captured a
man and then released him, to cut off his front lock of hair. Very
frequently a sentence like this, with lol, is inserted between j^S*.
(§ 152 note c) and its proper verb, as ^loJl Ja.j lil ^^Sa. 62'*^
iSSyi\ I followed him until I overtook him as he entered the house.
Lo in the sense of 'so long as' takes the perfect, as h.
S\Jii Ul v:>^0 Lo so long as I live I shall be thankful.
In sentences containing the notion of a condition 159.
which is the case after ^\^ if, ^ if anybody, Lo if
anything, U-gjo whatsoever, oixS^ Lo i^.ftjp how, how-
soever, JOo when &c. the perf. is used in the sense
of our present or future, and so too in the apodosis,
as viiJCibfi viJL!6 oJLxi ^j| if thou doest that, thou
134 160, 161. CONDITIONAL CLAUSES.
wilt perish; Jb JL^ jjJo whoso seeketh, findeth (if
any one seeks, he finds).
Note. If the perf. is meant to retain its proper force in the
protasis, the verb ^\S' is placed after ^^, as ^^ ^ i^aj^i ^^IT ^J
C^,i^>a9 Ja^ if his camisole is torn in front, she has told the truth.
160. The particles above mentioned may also take the
apoc. impf.in protasis and apodosis alike, as Lwyoj* ,j 1^
IXTr *ijtX4.j if ye wait patiently, God will help you.
2,. The apoc. impf. also stands in the apodosis after
an imperative (with conditional force) in the protasis,
as UCJL^ .jji* \ju3 (jiLfr live contentedly (i. e. if thou
live &c.) thou wilt be a king.
c. An apoc. impf. in the protasis may be followed by a
perfect in the apodosis, as Oj4^ 5-^•*^* ul ^^ i^iou
wait patiently, thou wilt gain the victory. If the clauses
are both negative, we have aJ with the apoc. impf.,
as ,jo!| Ij I^Zaj *J jjI if he does not go away, I am
not satisfied.
Note. Occasionally the apodosis of a conditional sentence
is wanting, e. g. I jjb ^ ^{ if this is so— supply : then it is well
(Arab. l^).
161. Before the apodoses of conditional sentences,
other than those discussed in § 159 — 160 we find the
particle o, which is employed:
161. CONDITIONAL CLAUSES. 135
1) When the apodosis is a nominal sentence, as a.
a Joii c-»^ (j^ if he is refractory, then alas for
him! Also before sentences with ^.1^ and before
interrogative sentences.
2) When the apodosis is a verbal sentence, of which h.
the perfect is intended to retain its force as a perfect
(cf. § 159 note), especially, too, when Jo (cf. § 98 e)
is employed, as yy> ^\^^ l^jojcl tym \yj^\ ^\^
c^LjI viJUJLfr UjU if they become Moslems, then have
they come to the right way, and if they turn aside,
then thou hast but to announce the message.
3) When the apodosis is a verbal sentence that con- c.
tains an impf. with one of the particles Oyww, |j*<, ,jJ,
or that expresses a command or a wish, as owL5^ ^l
*-gjbl ^^ vJ!JL:>.Li *J5 ^i if thou findst thyself among
people, milk into their pail.
APPENDIX.
COMPUTATION OF TIME.
a. Names of the Days of the Week.
In the following list the various names may also
be used with the word for day, 113 omitted.
1. tX^^I *•-> (1st day) Sunday.
2. jji^' 5r ^jj (2nd day) Monday.
3. feTj^Sjjf 1 J (3rd day) Tuesday.
4. feULs ^t *5.j (4th day) Wednesday.
5. jujuL«iL| *•-) (5th day) Thursday.
6. xilil *1j (day of assembly) Friday.
7. c:a1JU| *I5. (Sabbath) Saturday.
5. Names of the Months.
So"
In the names of the months the word v.^, month,
may be prefixed in the constr. state throughout;
indeed, as the following table shows, some of the
names are always so written.
COMPUTATION OF TIME. 137
J a ^ ?
1. **.^x^l al-Muharram.
r."
2. wi^ Safar.
3. J. ^M ajOn w^ the first Rabi'.
4. j^IaJI «-os . (^ ^v. the second Rabi'.
5. J,.!^! ;^3Lii the first Gumada.
f ^ -m.C'O
6. 5wa.!^ll ^3ujL the latter Gumada.
t3 ^ ^
7. v^jA^; Ragab.
8. ^jujui Sa'ban.
9. ^\JcXs Ramadan (the month of fasting).
-^ Ci " >
10. JI5-W Sawwal.
11. 5jJiifr^<3 Du-lka'da.
12. k^l .J Du-lhigga (month of the pilgrimage, hagg).
c. The Year.
The Moslems reckon by lunar years of 354 days ;
their first year is usually considered as beginning
at the date of the Christian era given below. In
calculating from one era to the other, it may be
reckoned that 33 solar years are equal to 34 lunar years.
138
COMPUTATION OF TIME.
In the works of European scholars it is customary,
by means of comparative tables, to give the precise
day of our era with which each Moslem year begins
(see the Bibliography). The following short table will
be useful in helping to a rapid approximation of the
date required.
The Moslem year
1 b
egan
16. July 622 A.
D.
101
11
24. July 719 «
11
201
«
30. July 816 V
»
301
n
7. Aug. 913 »
n
401
11
15. Aug. 1010 «
n
501
v
22. Aug. 1107 «
V
601
n
29. Aug. 1204 «
«
701
11
6. Sept. 1301 «
11
801
11
13. Sept. 1398 «
Y)
901
11
21. Sept. 1495 11
»
1001
11
8. Oct. 1592 «
11
1101
v
15. Oct. 1689 «
11
1201
n
24. Oct. 1786 n
n
1301
n
2. Nov. 1883 «
v
1313
11
24. June 1895 «
n
LITERATURE.
A history of Arabic literature as a whole, or even of particular
parts of it, does not exist, for the work of Hammer-Purgstall (Litteratur-
geschichte der Araber, von ihrem Beginn bis zu Ende des zwolften
Jahrhundeits der Hidschret. 7 Bande. Wien 1850 — 56. 40.) must
be described as premature and as useless by reason of its numerous
mistakes. An acquaintance with Arabic literature must therefore be
got partly from works by Arabs on the history of their literature, partly
from European catalogues. In the course of the present century
numerous works, including not a few specimens of the earlier litera-
ture, have been printed in the East, especially in Cairo (government
press in Bulak), Beiriit (where there is an excellent press managed
by the Jesuits) and Constantinople; also in Persia, India and the
island of Java. We must, in particular, mention the great quantity
of valuable Arabic manuscripts that still await jjubhcation both in
European and eastern libraries. A synopsis of such catalogues of
these MSS. as have hitherto appeared will be found below.
In the following selection, books of special importance are marked
with a star, those recommended to beginners with a dagger.
A. BIBLIOGRAPHY.
I. Printed Works.
a Written by Orientals.
*Kitab al-Fihrist (by Ibn ahi Ydkub an-nadim; wrote in the year 377
H., beg. 3. May 987) mit Anmerkungen herausgegeben von Gustav
Flugel. Nach dessen Tode besorgt von Johannes Rodiger und
August Muller. 2 voll. Leipzig 1871 — 2.
*Lexicon bibliographicum et encyclopaedicum a Mustapha ben Abdallah
Katib Jelibi dicto et nomine Haji Khalfa [Haggi Haltfa f 1658)
celebrato compositum. Ad codicum Vindobonesium Parisiensium
et Berolinensis fidem primum edidit latine vertit et commentario
indicibusque instruxit Gustavus FlilgeJ. Leipzig-London 1835 —
1858. 7 voll. 40.
140 Literature A.
P Written by Europeans.
Bibliotheca arabica. Auctam nunc atque integram edidit D. Christianus
Fridericus de Schnurrer. Halae ad Salam 1811.
•f Bibliotheca orien talis. Manuel de Bibliographie orientale. I. conte-.
nant les livres arabes, persans et turcs imprimes depuis I'invention
de I'imprimerie jusqu'a nos jours tant en Europe qu'en Orient etc.
par J. Th. Zenker. Leipzig 1846. — Bibliotheca orientalis.
Manuel de Bibliographie orientale. IL contenant 1. supplement
du premier volume. 2. Litterature de I'Orient chretien. 3. Litte-
rature de I'Inde etc. Par J. Th. Zenker. Leipzig 1861.
t(Eutin^) Katalog der kaiserlichen Universitats- und Landesbibliothek
in Strassburg. Arabische Litteratur. Strassburg 1877. 4^.
Bibliographie des ouvrages arabes ou relatifs aux Arabes publics dans
I'Europe chretienne de 1810 a 1885 par Victor Chauvin. I. Pre-
face. — Table de Schnurrer. — Les Proverbes. Liege 1892
(is being continued).
Wissenschaftlicher Jahresbericht iiber die morgenlandischen Studien,
von 1844 an in Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlandischen
Gesellschaft Leipzig 1847 ff. The annual reports on works
published up to 1858 appeared in the Zeitschrift, those for the
years 1869—61, 62 — 67 (one part), autumn 1877 — 81 appeared
as independent publications.
Bibliotheca orientalis oder eine vollstandige Liste der im Jahre 1876
in Deutschland, Prankreich, England und den Colonien erschie-
nenen Biicher, Broschiiren, Zeitschriften, u. s. w. iiber die Sprachen,
Religionen, Antiquitaten, Literaturen, Geschichte und Geographie
des Ostens, zusammengestellt von Karl Friederici. Leipzig.
8 years (to 1883).
Bibliography for 1883 — 85 (not completed) in the Literatur-Blatt fiir
orient alische Philologie unter Mitwirkung von Dr. Johannes
Klatt herausgegeben von Prof. Dr. Ernst Kuhn. 1883 — 85.
*Orientalische Bibliographie . . . herausgegeben von A. Muller, now
E. Kuhn. Berlin 1888 ff.
Katalog der Bibliothek der Deutschen Morgenlandischen Gesellschaft.
I. Druckschriften und Ahnliches. Leipzig 1880 (a new and
largely augmented edition will appear in a year or two).
A. 0. Ellis, Catalogue of the Arabic books in the British Museum
Vol L A-L. London 1894.
For works from oriental presses an important guide is: E. J. Brill,
Catalogue periodique de livres orientaux I — IX, Leide 1883 ff.
(To parts I — VII Index de noms d'auteurs et de noms de livres,
ib. 1889).
Literature A. 141
II. Manuscripts.
(Die Handschriftenverzeichnisse der koniglichen Bibliothek in Ber-
lin. Vols. 7 ff.). Yerzeichniss der arabischen Handschriften
von W. Ahlwardt. 40. 1. Band. Berlin 1887; 2. Bd. 1889;
3. Bd. 1891; 4. Bd. 1892; 5. Bd. 1893; 6. Bd. 1894. A 7tli
and last vol. will appear soon.
(Halle) Katalog der Bibliothek der Deutschen Morgenlandischen Ge-
sellschaft. II. Handschriften u. s. w. Leipzig 1881.
Verzeichnis der orientalischen Handschriften der Bibliothek des
Halle'schen Waisenhauses von Fr. Aug. Arnold und August
Mutter. (Programm der Lateinischen Hauptschule). Halle
1876. 40.
(University Library, Leipzig) Die Eefaiya, Von Prof. Fleischer:
Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlandischen Gesellschaft. 8,
S. 573—584.
(Municipal Library in Leipzig) Catalogus librorum manuscriptorum,
qui in bibliotheca senatoria civitatis Lipsiensis asservantur, ed.
Naumann. Codices orientalium linguarum descripserunt H. O.
Fleischer et Fr. Delitzsch. Grimmae 1838. 40.
Catalogus codicum manuscriptorum orientalium Bibliothecae regiae
Dresdensis. Scripsit et indicibus instruxit H. 0. Fleischer.
Lipsiae 1831. 40.
Die arabischen Handschriften der herzoglichen Bibliothek zu Qotha.
Verzeichnet von Wilhelm Fertsch. 5 Bande. Gotha 1878 — 1892,
(Also w. the title: Die orientalischen Handschriften der h. B.
zu G. Dritter Theil).
Die arabischen Handschriften der K. Hof- und Staatsbibliothek in
ilfwncAen, beschrieben von Jbsep7t -4nmer. Miinchen 1866. (Cata-
logus codicum manuscriptorum Bibliothecae regiae Monacensis.
Tomi primi pars secunda.)
{Tubingen University Library) Catalog arabischer Handschriften in
Damaskus gesammelt von J. Q. Wetzstein. Berlin 1863.
Catalogus librorum manuscriptorum orientalium in bibliotheca aca-
demica Bonnensi servatorum adornavit Joannes Gildemeister.
Bonnae 1864—1876. 40.
Katalog der hebraischen, arabischen, persischen und tiirkischen Hand-
schriften der kaiserlichen Universitats- und Landesbibliothek zu
Strasshurg. Bearbeitet von S, Landauer. Strassbuvg 1881. 4^.
Die arabischen, persischen und tiirkischen Handschriften der kaiser-
lich-koniglichen Hofbibliothek zu Wien. Von Gustav Flugel.
3 Bande. Wien 1865—7. 4*^.
{Copenhagen) Codices orientales Bibliothecae regiae Havniensis enu-
merati et descripti a N. L. Westergaard etc. II. Codices hebr.
et arab. Hafniae 1851.
142 Literature A.
Codices Orientales bibliothecae regiae universitatis Lundensis recensuii
Carolus Johannes Tornberg. Lundae 1850.
Codices Arabici, Persici et Turcici bibliothecae regiae universitatis
Vpsaliensis. Disposuit et descripsit C. T. Tornberg. Upsaliae
1849. 40.
(Paris) Catalogue des manuscrits arabes de la Bibliotheque Nationale
par le Baron de Slane. Pr. Fascicule. Paris 1883. Sec. Fasc.
1889. Trois. Fasc. 1895. 4^. (To be continued.)
Catalogue general des manuscrits des bibliotheques publiques de
France. DepartementS. Tome VI (p. 437 — 482). Marseille. Par
M. I'abbe Albams. Paris 1892. — Tome XVIII. Alger. Par
E. Fay nan. Paris 1893.
[Leide) Catalogus codicum orientalium Bibliothecae academiae Lugduno
Batavae I. II. auctore R. P. A. Dozy. III. IV. auct. P. de Jong
et M. J. de Goeje. V. auctore M. J. de Goeje. VI. auctore
M. Th. Houtsma. Lugduni Bavatorum 1851 — 77. — Editio se-
cunda. Vol. I auctoribus M. J. de Goeje et M. Th. Houtsma.
Lugduni Bat. 1888.
(London) Catalogus codicum manuscriptorum orientalium qui in Museo
Britannico asservantur. Pars secunda codices arabicos amplectens.
Londini 1846. fol.
[London) Supplement to the Catalogue of the Arabic manuscripts in the
British Museum (By Charles Eieu). London 1894, 40.
(London) A catalogue of the Arabic manuscripts in the library of the
India Office. By Otto Loth. London 1877. 4°.
( Oxford) Bibliothecae Bodleianae codicum manuscriptorum orientalium,
videlicet hebraicorum, chaldaicorum, syriacorum, aethiopicorum,
arabicorum, persicorum, turcicorum, copticorumque catalogus a
Joanne Vri confectus. Pars Prima Oxonii 1787. — Partis se-
cundae volumen primum arabicos complectens confecit Alexander
Nicoll. Oxonii 1821. fol.
[Cambridge) Catalogus Bibliothecae Burckhardtianae cum appendice
librorum aliorum orientalium in Bibliotheca Academica Canta-
brigensitis asservatorum — confecit T. Preston. Cantabrigiae
1853. 4C.
Catalogue of the Oriental Manuscripts in the Library of King's Col-
lege, Cambridge. By Edward Henry Palmer: Journal of the
Roy. As. Societj' of Gr. Britain and Ireland. New Series III.
105 ff.
A descriptive Catalogue of the Arabic, Persian and Turkish Manu-
scripts in the Library of Trinity College, Cambridge. By E. H.
Palmer. Cambridge and London 1870.
(Escurial) BibUotheca arabico-hispana Escurialensi sive Librorum
omnium Mss. quos Arabics ab auctoribus magnam partem Arabo-
Hispanis compositos Bibliotheca CoenobiiEscurialensis complectitur
Literature A. 143
recensio et explanatio opera et studio Michaelis Casiri etc. 2 tomi.
Matriti 1760. fol. — Les manuscrits arabes de I'Escurial decrits par
Hartwig Derenbourg. Tome premier. Paris 1884.
Catalogo de los Manuscritos drabes existentes en la Biblioteca Na-
cional de Madrid [F. G. RobUs). Madrid 1889.
[Florence) Bibliothecae Mediceae Laurentianae et Palatinae Codicum
manuscriptorum orientalium catalogus, Steph. Evod. Assemanus
recensuit. Florentiae 1742. fol.
(Venice) Catalogo dei Codici manoscritti orientali della Biblioteca
Naniana, compilato dell' abbate Simone Assemani. 2 Part. Pa-
dova 1787—1792. 40.
Remarques sur les manuscrits orientaux de la Collection Marsigli a
Bologne suivies de la liste complete des Manuscrits arabes de
la meme collection par le Baron Victor Rosen. Roma 1885 (atti
della R. Academia dei Lincei. Serie 3*. Vol. XII).
[Milan) Catalogo dei Codici arabi, persiani e turchi della Biblioteca
Ambrosiana [Hammer-Purgstall): Biblioteca Italiana t. XCIV,
pp. 22 and 322.
Cataloghi dei codici orientali di alcune biblioteche d'ltalia. 5 fasc.
Firenze 1878—1892.
Catalogue des manuscripts et xylographes orientaux de la Biblioth^que
Imperiale publique de St. Petersbourg. St. Petersbourg 1852.
[St. Petersburg) B. Dorn, Catalogue des ouvrages arabes, persans et tui'cs,
publics a Constantinople, en Egypte et en Perse, qui se trouvent au
Musee asiatique de 1' Academie. — Chronologisches Yerzeichniss der
seit dem Jahre 1801 bis 1866 in Kasan gedruckten arabischen,
tiirkischen, tatarischen und persischen Werke, als Katalog der in
dem asiatischen Museum befindlichen Schriften: Melanges asia-
tiques tires du Bulletin de I'Academie Imperiale des sciences de
St. Petersbourg. Tome V. Livi'. 5. St. Petersbourg 1867.
[St. Petersburg) Notices sommaires des manuscrits arabes du Musee
asiatique par le Baron Victor Rosen. St. Petersbourg 1881.
[St. Petersburg) Les manuscrits arabes de I'lnstitut des langues orien-
tales decrits par le Baron Victor Rosen. St. Petersbourg 1877.
[J. M. E. Gottwald) description of the Arabic Manuscripts in the
Library of the Imperial University of Kasan. Kasan (no date)
[1885]. In Russian.
[Cairo) Fihrist al-kutub al-'arabiya al-mahfiiza bil-kutubhana al-hedi-
wiye el-ka'ine biserai derb al-gamamiz. (Under the management
of Spitta and Vollers.) 7 vols. Cairo 1301—1308. Second
Edition. Vol. I 1310.
Catalog der mektebe 'umumiye in Damascus. Damascus 1299. 40.
Studia Sinaitica No. III. Catalogue of the Arabic Mss. in the Convent
of S. Catharine on Mount Sinai compiled by Margaret Dunlop
Gibson. London 1894.
144 Literature B, C.
(Batavia) Friedrich, Codicum arabicorum in Bibliotheca Societatis
Artium et Scientiarum quae Bataviae floret asservatorum Catalogus.
Absolvit indicibusque instruxit L. W, C. van den Berg, Bataviae
et Hagae 1873.
B. INTRODUCTION.
General.
Borhan-ed-dini es-Sernudji (as-Sarnugi lived at the and of the 12tli
century of our era) Enchiridion studiosi. Arabice edidit latine vertit
et lexico explanavit Carolus Caspari. Praefatus est H. 0. Flei-
scher. Lipsiae 1838. 40.
Einleitung in das Studium der Arabischen Sprache bis Mohammed
und zum Theil sj)ater . . . von G. W. Freytag. Bonn 1861.
Orientalische Skizzen, Von Theodor NoldeTce. Berlin 1892. Trans-
lated, with the title 'Sketches form Eastern History' by J. S. Black.
London and Edinburgh 1892.
De auctorum graecorum versionibus et commentariis syriacis, arabicis,
armeniacis persicisque commentatio quam scripsit Joannes Georgius
Wenrich. Lipsiae 1842. 1845.
C. CHRESTOMATHIES.
*-\R. Briinnow, Chrestomathy of Arabic Prose-Pieces. Berlin and Lon-
don 1895.
f Chrestomatia arabica quam e libris Mss. vel impressis rarioribus
coUectam edidit Fr. A. Arnold. Pars I. Textum continens. Pars II.
Glossarium continens. Halis 1853.
fChrestomathie Arabe, ou extraits de divers ecrivains Arabes, tant en
prose qu'en vers a I'usage des Aleves de I'ecole sp6ciale des langues
orientales vivantes ; par A. J. Sylvestre de Sacy. II. ed. corr. et
augm. Paris 1826. 3 vol.; Tome IV Anthologie grammaticale
arabe. Paris 1829.
f Chrestomathie elementaire de I'Arabe litteral avec un glossaire par
H. Derenbourg et /. Spire. 2 ed. Paris 1892.
JoJi. Godofr. Lud. Kosegartenti Chrestomathia arabica ex codicibus
manuscriptis Paris. Goth, et Berol. coUecta atque tum adscriptis
vocalibus, cum additis lexico et adnotationibus explanata. Lip-
siae 1828.
Georg, Guil. Freytag, Chrestomathia arabica, grammatica historica in
usum scholarum Arabicarum ex codd. inedids conscripta. S^maj.
Bonnae 1834.
Literature D. 145
f Thier und Mensch vor dem Konig- der Genien. Ein arabisches Mahr-
chen aus den Schriften der lauteren Briider ia Basra im Urtext
herausgegeben von Fr. Dieterici. 2. Ausgabe. Leipzig 1881. —
Arabisch-deutsches Worterbuch zum Koran und Thier und Mensch
von Fr. Dieterici. 2. Aufl. Leipzig 1894.
Brevis chrestomathia arabiea. In usum scholarum ed. Joh. Bollig.
Koma 1881.
Chrestomatia arabigo-espanola por Fr. J. Lerchundi y Fr. J. Simonet,
Granada 1881.
Girgas and de Rosen. Arabic Chrestomathy (in Russian). St. Peters-
burg 1875. 1876. — Dictionary to the Chrestomathy and to the
Koran by W. Girgas. Kasan 1881 (in Russian).
An Arabic reading-book compiled hy W. Wright. Part first, The texts.
London 1870.
Magani el-adab fi hadaik el-'arab. 6, Ed. Beirut 1885 ff. Jesuit Press.
6 vols. Sarh magani el-adab (Notes &c.). 4 vols. ib. 1886 — 8.
D. GRAMMARS &c.
a Written by Orientals.
*a\-Muzhir fi *ulum el-luga, philological Encyclopaedia by Galal
ad-din as-SuyUti (f 911 H., beg. 4. June 1505, cf. for as-
Sujuti Goldziher in den Sitzungsber. d. kais. Akademie der
Wiss! zu Wien. Phil.-histor. 01. LXIX. Bd. 1. S. 7 ff.) Bulak
1282.
*Le livre de Sibawaihi, traits de grammaire arabe par Sibouya, dit
Slbaicaihi (f 180 H., beg. 16. March 796). Texte arabe public
d'apres les manuscrits du Caire, de I'Escurial, d'Oxford, de
Paris, de St. Petersbourg et de Vienne par Hartwig Derenhourg.
Tome I, Paris 1881. Tome II, Paris 1889. — SlbawaihVs Bach
liber die Grammatik nach der Ausgabe von H. Berenbourg und
dem Commentar des Siraii iibersetzt und erklart . . . von G. Jahn.
1.— 8. Lieferung. Berlin 1894. 1895.
*A1-Mufassal, opus de re grammatica arabicum auctore Abu 'l-Kasim
Mahmiid bin 'Omar Zamahsario [az-Zamah^ari f 538 H. , beg.
16. July 1 143) ed. J. P. Broch. Editio altera^ Christianiae 1879. —
Also: Ibn Jals (f 643 H., beg. 29. May 1245) Commentar zu
Zamachsari's Mufassal. Nach den Handschriften herausgeg.
u. s. w. von Dr. G. Jahn. Erster Band. Leipzig, 1882. Zweiter
Band. Leipzig 1886. 40.
*Alfijjah, Carmen didacticum grammaticum auctore Ibn Malik (f 672 H.,
beg. 18. July 1273) et in Alfijjam commentarius quem conscripsit
Ibn Akil {Ibn 'Aktl f 769 H., beg. 28. Aug. 1367) ed. Fr. Dieterici.
Lipsiae 1851. — Ibn 'Akil's Commentar zur Alfijja des Ibn Malik
Socin, Arabic Grrammar.^ 10
146 Literature D.
aus dem Arabischen zum ersten male iibersetzt von Fr, Dieterici.
Berlin 1852.
al-Agurrumiyya, Arabic Grammar "bylln Agurrum as-Sinhagi (f 723 H.,
beg. 10. January 1323). Often printed with and without Com-
mentaries. Cf. E. Trumpp, Einleitung in das Studium der
arabischen Grrammatiken. Die Ajrummiyyah des Muhammad bin
Daud. Miinchen 1876. On this work see Fleischer in Zeitschrift
der D. Morgenl. Ges. 30 (1876), pp. 487—513; reprinted in
Kleinere Schriften II (Leipzig 1888), pp. 75—106. Text also
printed in Briinnow's Chrestomathy.
Kafiya iin-nahii. Syntax by Ibn al-Hdyib (f 646 H., beg. 26. April
1248). Frequently printed in the East. ^
Mugni al-labib, Grammar composed by Ibn Sisani al-Ansari (f 762 H.,
beg. 11. Nov. 1360). Another grammatical work by the same
author bears the title: Katar an-nada wa-ball as-sada; a third
Sudur ad-dahab. All three works have been frequently printed
in the East.
al'Earlri's (f 516 H., beg. 16. July 1143)Durrat al-gawvi^as, heraus-
gegeben von Heinrich Thorbecke. Leipzig 1871. (On errors of
speech). With the commentary of al-Hafagi, Constantinople 1299.
Cf. Le livre des locutions vicieuses de Djawaliki publie par
Hartwig Derenbourg (al-Gawaliki f 465 H., beg. 17. Sept. 1072)
• in Morgenlandische Forschungen. Leipzig 1875.
Tarika mustahdata fi tashil al-hatt al-arabi. Calligraphic models
i2 parts. Beirut 1891.
P Written by Europeans.
*Die grammatischen Schulen der Araber nach den Quellen bearbeitet
von G. Flugel. Erste Abthl. Leipzig 1862. Abhandlungen der
Deutschen Morgenl. Ges. II. Band. Nr 4. (This work gives
a list of grammarians to about the year 1000 of our era).
f Dr. C. P. Oaspari^s Arabische Grammatik. Eiinfte Auflage be-
arbeitet von August Milller. Halle 1887. — Grammaire arabe de
C. P. Caspari traduite de la quatrieme edition allemande et en
partie remani^e par E. Uricoechea. Bruxelles 1880. — A Grammar
of the Arabic Language translated from the German of Caspai-i
and edited, with numerous additions and corrections by W. Wright.
2. ed. 2 vol. London 1874 — 5. A 3'^'^ edit, is announced.
Geo. Henric. Aug. Ewald. Grammatica critica linguae arabicae cum
brevi metrorum dopftrina. Lipsiae 1831 — 1833. II vol.
*Grammaire arabe a I'usage des eleves de I'ecole speciale des langues
orientales vivautes; avec figures. Par M. le Bon Silvestre de
Sacy. Seconde edition, corrigee et augmentee, a laquelle on a
joint un traite de la prosodie et de la metrique des Arabes. 2 tom.
Paris 1831. — Yery important notes and corrections will be found in
Literature E. 147
"^Fleischer, „Beitrage zur arabischen Sprachkunde": Berichte iiber die
Verhandlungen der kgl. sachsischen Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften
zu Leipzig. Philologisch-historische Classe. 1863 (p. 93 ff.); 1864
(p. 265ff.); 1866 (p. 286 ff.); 1870 (p. 227 ff.); 1874 (p. 71ff.); 1876
(p. 44ff.); 1878 (p. 64ff.); 1880 (p. 89ff.); 1881 (p. 117ff.); 1883
(p. 72ff.); 1884 (p. 272 ff.); conf. 1856 (p. Iff.); 1862 (p. 10 ff.)
Reprinted in Kleinere Schriften von Dr. JS. L. Fleiscfier, vol. I,
I8t. and 2iid. parts, Leipzig 1886; thetwolastarticlesinvol.il,
part 1. Leipzig 1888.
/. G. L. Kosegarten. Grammatica linguae arabicae pp. 1 — 688, without
title and date, incomplete. (Very rare).
Mortimer Sloper Howell. A Grammar of the Classical Arabic Language,
translated and compiled from the "Works of the most Approved
Native or Naturalized Authorities. Published under the Authority
of the Government of the N.-W. Provinces. In an Introduction
and Four Parts, 3 vols. AUahabad 1880. 1883. 1886.
Grammaire arabe composee d'apres les sources primitives par le
P. Donat Vernier, S. J. Tome I. Beyrouth 1891 ; TomelL 1892.
Darstellung der arabischen Verskunst mit sechs Anhangen u. s. w. nach
handschriftlichen Quellen bearbeitet und mit Registem versehen
von G. W. Freytag. Bonn 1830.
Theorie nouvelle de la m^trique arabe preced6e de considerations
generales sur le rythme naturel du langage par M. Stanislas
Guyard. Paris 1875 (Extrait du Journal as. 7 ser., t. 7. 8).
Die Rhetorik der Araber nach den wichtigsten Quellen dargestellt und
mit angefiihrten Textausziigen nebst einem literaturgeschichtlichen
Anhang versehen von Dr. A. F. Mehren. Kopenhagen 1853.
E. DICTIONARIES.
a Written by Orientals.
*Sahah al-*arabiyye (or as-Sahah) by al-Gauharl (Abii Nasr Isma il ibn
' 'Hammad f 393 H., beg. 10.* Nov. 1002). 2 vols. Bulak 1282. 40.
Lisan al-'arab by al-Mukarram (Ibn Manziir al-Ifriki al-Misri al-Ansarl
al-Hazragif 711 H., beg. 13. May 1311). 20 vols. 40.' Cairo 1308.
*al-Kamiis al-muhit (or al-Kamus) by al-Fzruzdbddi (f 816 or
817 H. = 1413/4). 2 vols. Calcutta 1817; 4 vols. Bulak 1279.
40. id. 1301/2. — With Turkish Commentaiy 3 vols. Stambul
1272 and later. — ♦Commentary to the Kamils with the title
Tag-el-* arus composed by Sayyid Murtadd az-Zubaidi (f 1205 H.,
beg. 10 Sept. 1790). 10 vols. Caii'o 1307.
Muhit al-muhit by Butrus al-Bistdni. 2 vols. Beirut 1286. (1869/70).
an-Nihaya fi garib al-hadit by Ibn al-Atlr (f 606 H., beg. 6. July
1209). 4 vols. Cairo 1311 (Dictionary to the Traditions)
148 Literature E.
Asas al-balaga (Lexicographical Work, dealing esp. with the meta-
phorical meanings of words) by az-Zamahsari (f 538 H., beg.
16. July 1143). 2 vols. Bulak 1299.
Fikh al-luga, Synonyms by at-Tdalihi (f 429 H., beg. 14. Oct.
1037). (Frequently reprinted; esp. in an expurgated edition
Beirut 1888). Cf. Fleischer, Kleinere Schriften III, 152.
'lalahs (t 291 H. = 904) kitab al-Fasili. Nach den Handschriften
von Leiden, Berlin und Rom herausgegeben, mit kritischen und
erlauternden Noten versehen von Dr. J. Barth. Leipzig 1876.
*GaWaliki's al-Mu arrab (a work on Arabic! loan-words, by al-GmcdJlki
t 465 H., beg. 17. Sept. 1072). Nach der Leydener Handschrift
mit Erlauterungen herausgegeben von Ed, Sachau. Leipzig
1867. Cf. Z. d. D. Morg. Ges. 33, 208.
Liber as-Sojutii (f 911 H., beg. 4. June 1505) de nominibus' relativis,
inscriptus Lubb al-lubab, arab. cum annot. crit. ed. P. J. Veth.
1—3. Lugduni Bat. 1840—51. 4^.
*Al-Moschtabih auctore Schamso'ddin Abu Abdallah Mohammed ibn
Ahmed ad-DhahaU (ad-Dahabi f 748 H., beg. 13. April 1347).
E codd. mss. editus a JP. de Jong. Lugduni Batav. 1881. (On
homonym proper names).
Kitabo-'l-adhdad sive liber de vocabulis arabicis quae plures habent
significationes inter se oppositas auctore Abu Bekr ibno-'l-Anbdri
(t 328 H., beg. 18. Oct. 939) ed. 31. Th. Houtsma. Lugduni
Bat. 1881.
|3 Written by Europeans.
■\G. W. Freytag, Lexicon Arabico-Latinum praesertim ex Djeuharii
Firuzabadiique et aliorum libris confectum. Accedit index vocum
latinorum locupletissimus. IV. Tomi. Hal. 1830 — 1837. 40maj.
Q. W. Freytag^ Lexicon Arabico-Latinum ex opere suo majors in
usum tironum excerptum edidit. Halis 1836. 4^ maj.
*Maddu-l-Kamoos, an Arabic-Enghsh Lexicon derived from the best
and the most copious eastern sources comprising a very large
collection of words and significations omitted in the Kamoos,
with supplements to its abridged and defective explanations,
ample grammatical and critical comments, and examples in prose
and verse: composed by means of the munificence of the most
noble Algernon, Duke of Northumberland and the bounty
cf the British Government: by Edward William Lane. In two
books: the first containing all the classical words and significa-
tions commonly known to the learned among the Arabs; the
second, those that are of rare occurrence and not commonly
known. Book I, Parts 1—5. London 1863—1874. Ed. by
Stanley Lane Poole, Parts 6—8 (and Supplement) 1877 — 1893.
Literature E, 149
(From the letter k onwards, the book is incomplete; its continua-
tion is not to be expected.)
*Supj)lement aux dictionnaires arabes par B. Dozy. 2 torn. Leyde
1881. — Cf. Fleischer, Studien iiber Dozy's Supplement: Be-
richte iiber die Verhandlungen der kgl. sachs. Ges. d. Wiss. zu
Leipzig. Philol.-histor. Classe 1881 — 1887. Reprinted in Kleinere
Schriften von H. L. Fleischer. Vol. II, pt. 1. Leipzig 1888.
Vol. Ill id.
A. Kazimirski de Biberstein, Dictionnaire arabe-frangais I. II. Paiis
1860.
fJ.. Wahrmxmd. Handworterbuch der deutschen und neu-arabischen
Sprache. I. Neuarabisch-deutscher Theil I, 1. 2. II, 1. 2. —
II. Deutsch-neuarabischer Theil. Giessen 1870 — 77.
F. Steingass, The Student's Arabic-English Dictionary. London 1884.
H, Anthony Salmone, An Arabic-English Dictionary on a new System.
2 vols. Vol. I Arabic-Enghsh ; vol. II English Index. London 1890.
fArabic-English Dictionary by the late William Thomson Wortahet.
Second edition, revised and enlarged, Beyrout 1893.
George Percy Badger, Enghsh- Arabic Lexicon. London 1881.
F. Steingass, English-Arabic Dictionary for the use of both Travellers
and Students. London 1882.
English- Arabic Dictionary by Mr. J. Abcarius. New edition revised
and enlarged. Beyrout 1894.
fVocabulaire arabe-frangais a I'usage des ^tudiants par un p^re mis-
sionnaire de la Cie de Jesus; 3. 6d. Beyrouth 1893. (Arab.: al-
Faraid ad-durriye.)
Dictionnaire frangais-arabe par le P. J.-B. Belot, S. J. 2 parties.
Beyrouth 1890.
*Die aramaischen Fremdworter im Arabischen. Von Siegmund Frdnkel.
Leiden 1886.
Dictionnaire detaille des noms des vetements chez les Arabes. Par
B. Dozy. Amsterdam 1845.
Die Namen der Saugethiere bei den siidsemitischen Volkern. Von
Fritz Hommel. Leipzig 1879.
Die Waffen der alten Araber aus ihren Dichtern dargestellt. Ein
Beitrag zur arabischen Alterthumskunde, Synonymik und Lexi-
cographie nebst Begistem von Friedrich Wilhelm Schwarzlose.
Leipzig 1886.
*G-lossaire des mots espagnols et portugais derives de I'Arabe par
B. Dozy et W. H. Engelmann. 2. ed. Leyde 1869.
Glossario etimologico de J as palabras espanolas de origen oriental por
D. Leopoldo de Eguilaz y Yanguas. Granada 1886.
Dictionnaire etymologique des mots fiangais d'origine orientale par
Marcel Devie. Paris 1876. — Cf. Eemarques sur les mots
frangais derives de I'Arabe par Henri Lammens. Beyrouth 1890.
1 50 Literature F.
F. KORAN, ISLAM, LIFE OF MUHAMMED.
CHRISTIANITY.
a Written by Orientals.
Al-Coranus seu Lex islamitica Muhammedis filii Abdallae Pseudo-
prophetae edita ex rouseo Abrahami Hinckelmanni, Hamburg!
1694.
Alcorani textus universus summa fide atque pulcherrimis characteribus
descriptus, in latinum translatus, oppositis notis, auctore Ludovico
Marracio. Patavii 1698 fol.
f Corani textus arabicus ad fidem librorum manuscriptorum et impres-
sorum et ad praecipuorum interpretum lectiones et auctoritatem
recensuit indicesque triginta sectionum et suratarum addidit
Gustavus Flilgel. Editio stereotypa C. Tauchnitzii. Tertium
emendata; nova impressio Lipsiae 1869 (I. 1834; recensionis
Fliigelianae textum recognitum iterum exprimi curavit Gustavus
Mauritius Bedslob, Lipsiae 1837). (In Fliigel's first edition and
in numerous oriental editions of the Koran, the enumeration of
the verses, which is indispensable for reference, is wanting).
*Ooncordantiae Corani arabicae. Ad literarum ordinem et verborum
radices diligenter disposuit Gustavus FliXgel. Editio stereotypa,
Lipsiae 1842.
Chrestomathia Corani arabica, notas adjecit glossarium confecit C. A.
Nallino. Lipsiae 1893.
al-Itkdn fi 'ulum al-kur'an, a sort of introduction to the Koran by
as-Suyutl (f 911 H., beg. 4. June 1505); 2 pts. Cairo 1278. —
Sayiity's Itqan on the exegetic sciences of the Qordn. Edited by
Mowlawies Basheerooddeen and Noorool-Haqq with an analysis by
A. Sprenger. Calcutta 1852—54.
al-Kassdf. Commentary on the Koran by az-Zamahsart (f 538 H.,
beg. 16. July 1143). 2 vols. Bulak 1281. — The Qoran with
the commentarj^ of Zamakhshari entitled the Kashshaf, an haqaiq
al-tanzil, ed. by W. Nassau Lees and Khadim Hosain and 'Abd
al-Hayi, Calcutta 1856.
*Beidhawii (f 685 H., beg. 27. Febr. 1286; or 692) commentarius in
Coranum ex codd. Parisiensibus Dresdensibus et Lipsiensibus edidit
indicibusque instruxit H. 0. Fleischer. 2 vol. Lipsiae 1846 — 48.
40, — Indices ad Beidhawii commentarium in Coranum confecit
Winand Fell. Leipzig 1878.
Chrestomathia Baidawiana. The commentary of El-Baidawi on Sura
III trans, and expld. . . . hy D. S. Margoliouth. London 1895.
*Le Becueil des traditions musulmanes par Abou Abdallah ibn Ismail
al-Bokhari {al-Buhdrl f 257 H., beg. 29. Nov. 870) publi6 par
Literature F. 151
L. KreJd. I —III. Leyde 1862 — 68 (incomplete). — Oriental
edition: Sahih. al-Bahari. 8 vols. Cairo 1290 j also frequently
elsewhere, with and without commentary.
Sahih Muslim. Collection of the Traditions of the Prophet, composed
by Muslim (f 261 H., beg. 16. Oct. 874). With commentary by
an-Nawam (f 676 H., beg. 4. Juni 1277). 5 vols. Cairo 1283.
Masabih as-sunna, composed by Husain ibn Mas'iid al-Farra al-Ba-
' gatcl (t 516 H., beg. 12. March 1122). 2 vols. Cairo 1294.
Ihya al-'ulum, by al-Gazali (f 505 H., beg. 10. JuH 1111). 4 vols.
40. Bulak 1289. — (Cf. Richard Gosche, Uber Ghazzalis Leben
und Werke: Abhdl. d. kgl. Akad. d. Wiss. zu Berlin 1858).
* Abdu-r-razzdq's Dictionary of the technical terms of the Sufies edited
by Aloys Sprenger. Calcutta 1845.
*Das Leben Muhammeds nach Muhammed ibn Ishdk (f 151 H., beg.
26. Jan. 768) bearbeitet von 'Abd el-Malik ibuHischdm (f 218 H.,
beg. 27. Jan. 833); hrsg. von F. Wustenfeld. 2 Bande. Gottingen
1858 — 60. Oriental edition; Sirat ibn Hisam. 2 vols. Cairo 1295.
(Translated into German: Das Leben Muhammeds u. s. w. be-
arbeitet von Q. Weil. Stuttgart 1864).
Muhammed in Medina. Das ist Vakidi's {al-Wdkid/i f 207 H., beg.
27. May 822) Kitab al-Maghazi in verkiirzter deutscher Wieder-
gabe herausgegeben von J. Wellhausen. Berlin 1882.
Sama'il at-Tirmi^i (f 279 H., beg. 3. April 892) Traditions respecting
the Prophet. Cairo 1273; with commentary 2 vols. Bulak 1296.
Usd al-gaba. List of 7500 persons who knew Muhammed, drawn
up by Ibn al-Atlr (f 630 H., beg. 18. Oct. 1 232). 5 vols. Cairo 1286.
al-Isabe, A biographical dictionary of persons who knew Muhammed
'by Ibn Hagar {Ibn Bagar f 852 H., beg. 7. March 1448). Edited
in Arabic by Mowlawies Mohammed Wajyh, 'Abdal-Haqq, and
Gholam Qadir and A. Sprenger. Bibliotheca Indica. Vol. I, Cal-
cutta 1856; vol. IV, Calcutta 1873. Vol. II, fasc. 1—13; vol. Ill,
fasc. 1 — 15.
Kisas al-'anbiya (Legends of the Prophet), by at-Ta'labi (f 427 H.,
beg. 5. Nov. 1035). Cairo 1297 and often.
Pillar of the creed of the Sunnites by al-Naaafi, ed. by W. Ctvreton,
London 1843.
Ad-dourra al-fakhira: la perle precieuse de Ghazali [al-Gazdll f 505 H.,
beg. 10. July 1111) par L. Qautier. Geneve 1878. — Muslim
Eschatology.
Muhammedanische Eschatologie nach der Leipziger u. Dresdner Hand-
schrift zum ersten Male arabisch und deutsch herausgegeben von
M. Wolff. Leipzig 1872.
Disputatio pro religione Mohammedanorum adversus Christianos
Textum arabicum (composed 942 H. = 1535) e codice Leidensi
cum varr. lect. edidit F. J. van den Ham. Lugduni Bat. 1890.
152 Literature F.
Book of religious and philosophical sects by Muhammed al-Shahra-
stdni {ah-Sahrastdni f 528 H., beg. 29. March 1153). Now first
edited by W. Cureton. 2 vol. London 1846. — Abu-'l-Fatli
Muhammad asch-Schahrastani's Religionsparteien und Philo-
sophenschulen. Aus dem Arabischen iibersetzt mit Anmerkungen
von Th. Haarbriicker. 2 Bande. Halle 1850 — 1.
*{Bihle) Kitab al-mukaddas (Old Testament). London. E,. Watts.
1822. (New Testament 1. vol. 1821.) — f Beirut, various editions,
t New York 1867.
Arabic Bible- Chrestomathy with a Glossary edited by Geo. Jacob.
BerUn 1888.
j3 Written by Eurojpeans,
Der Koran nach Boysen von Neuem aus dem Arabischen iibersetzt
mit einer historischen Einleitung und Anmerkungen von (?. Walil.
Halle 1828.
Der Koran. Aus dem Arabischen wortgetreu neu iibersetzt mit An-
merkungen von L. TJUmann. 6. Aufl. 1862.
Le Koran, Traduction nouvelle, faite sur le texte arabe par Mr.
Kazimirski. Nouv. ed. Paris 1854.
The Koran commonly called the Alcoran of Mohammed: translated
into English from the Original Arabic. With explanatory notes
taken from the most approved commentators. To which is pre-
fixed a preliminary discourse. By George Sale. London 1774.
Last ed. by E. M. Wherry "with additional notes and emenda-
tions". 4 vols. London 1882—87.
J. M. Rodwell, The Koran, translated from the Arabic. 2. ed. Lond. 1876.
The Qur'an translated by E. H. Palmer. 2 parts. Oxford 1880. (The
sacred books of the East translated by various oriental scholars
and edited by F. Max Miiller, vol. VI. IX).
Der Koran. Im Auszuge iibersetzt von Friedrich Rilckert, heraus-
gegeben von A. Miiller. Frankfurt a. M. 1888.
Die fiinfzig altesten Suren des Korans in gereimter deutscher Uber-
setzung von M. Klamroth. Hamburg 1800.
f*Geschichte des Qorans von Theodor Nbldeke. Gottingen 1860.
tjber die Religion der vorislamischen Araber. Eine zur Habilitation
etc. offentlich zu vertheidigende Abhandlung von Ludolf Krehl.
Leipzig 1863.
*Skizzen und Vorarbeiten. Von /. Wellhausen. Drittes Heft. Reste
arabischen Heidentumes. Berlin 1887.
Kinship and marriage in early Arabia. By W. Robertson Smith.
Cambridge 1885.
*Das Leben und die Lehre des Mohammad nach bisher grossten-
theils unbenutzten Quellen bearbeitet von A. Sprenger. Zweite
Ausgabe. 3 Bande. Berlin 1869.
Literature G. * 153
f Das Leben Muhammed's. Nach den Quellen popular dargestellt von
Theodor Noldeke. Hannover 1863.
*W. Muir, The Life of Mahomet and History of Islam. 4 vol. London
1858—61. 3rtl edition 1 vol. 1894.
fDas Leben und die Lehre des Muhammed. Dargestellt von Ludolf
Krehl. 1. Theil. Das Leben des Muhammed. Leipzig 1884.
Skizzen und Yorarbeiten von J. Wellhausen. Viertes Heft. 1. Medina
vor dem Islam. 2. Muhammad's Gremeindeordnung von Medina.
3. Seine Schreiben, und die Gesandtschaften an ihn. Berlin 1889.
f Was hat Mohammed aus dem Judenthum aufgenommen ? von Abra-
ham Oeiger. Bonn 1833.
*i2. Dozy, Het Islamisme. Leiden 1863. 2 ed. Haarlem 1880 ^ Essai
sur I'histoire de I'Islamisme par R. Dozy trad, par V. Chauvin.
Leyde-Paris 1879.
*Snouck Hurgronje, Het mekkaansche Fest. Leiden 1880.
Die Mu taziliten oder die Freidenker im Islam. Ein Beitrag zur all-
gemeinen Kulturgeschichte von Heinrich Steiner. Leipzig 1865.
De strijd over het Dogma in den Islam tot op el-Ash'ari door Dr.
M. Th. Houtsma. Leiden 1875.
Zur Geschichte Abu '1-Hasan al-As'ari's (f about 324 H. = 935) von
Wilhelm Spitta. Leipzig 1876.
Expose de la reforme de I'Islamisme commencee au Illeme si^cle de
I'H^gire par Abou- 1-Hasan Ali el-Ash'ari et continuee par son
ecole. Avec des extraits du Texte arabe d'Ibn Asakir par
M, A, F. Mehren. Vol. II des Travaux de la 3e session du
Congres international des Orientalistes.
I. Goldziher, Die Schule der Zahiriten, ihr Ursprung, ihr System
und ihre Geschichte. Leipzig 1884,
*Mohammedanische Studien von I. Goldziher. Erster Teil. Halle
1889. Zweiter Teil. Halle 1890.
Polemische und apologetische Literatur in arabischer Sprache zwischen
Muslimen, Christen und Juden, nebst Anhangen verwandten
Inhalts. Von Moritz Steinschneider. Abhandlungen fiir die Kunde
des Morgenlandes VI, 3. Leipzig 1877.
G. JURISPRUDENCE.
al-Muwatta' fil-hadit. Corpus juris composed by Malik ihn Anas
al-Himyari al-Madani (f 179 H., beg. 27. March 795). Frequently
printed; also with commentaries, e. g. that of az-Zarkani (f 1122
H., beg. 19. Febr. 1710). 4 vols. Bulak 1280.
Sunan Abi 'Abdallah al-KazwIni, known as IbnMdga (f 273 H., beg.
8. June 886). Delhi 1282 and 1889. (Legal traditions).
Sunan Abi Dd'ud Sulaiman as-Sigistani (f 275 H., beg. 16. May
freq. printed, e. g. Bulak 1280. 2 vols. (Legal traditions).
154* Literature H.
al-Gdmi hy Abu isa Muhammad at-Tirmidl (f 279 H., beg. 3. April
892). Frequently printed. (Legal traditions).
Sunan Abi 'Abd ar-rahman an-Nasd'l (f 303 H., beg. 17. July 915);
lithogr. in Kanftlr 1847. (Legal traditions).
Flugel, Die Classen der hanefitischen Rechtsgelehrten: Abhandlungen
der k. Sachs. Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften VIII. Leipzig
1860.
Jus Schafiiticum. At-Tanbih auctore Abu Ishak as-Shirazi {Ahu
Ishdk a^-Slrdzl wrote the work in the year 452/3 H. = 1060/1)
edidit A. W. T. Juynboll. Lugduni Bat. 1879.
Pr6cis de Jurisprudence Musulmane selon le rite Chafeite, par Abu
Chodja {Ahu Sugd^ f in the 6*^ cent, of the Plight). Publication
du texte arabe, avee traduction et annotations, par S. Keijzer.
Leyde 1859.
Minhadj at-Talibin, le guide des zeles croyants. Manuel de juris-
prudence musulmane selon le rite de Chafi'i (as-SdfiH). Texte
arabe, publie par ordre du gouvernement avec traduction et
annotations par L. W. G. van den Berg. 3 vol. Batavia 1882 — 1884.
(Cf. Snouck Hurgronje in the Indian Gids, 1884 ff. Elaborate
criticism.)
Pr6cis de jurisprudence musulmane suivant le rite malekite par
-S'*^ Khalil (Halil lived in the 8tli cent, of the Flight) pubH^ par
les soins de la Societe asiatique. Quatrieme edition. Paris 1877.
Maverdii (al-Mdwardi f 450 H., beg. 28. Febr. 1058) constitutiones
politicae. Ex recensione Maximiliani Engeri. Bonnae 1853.
H. PHILOSOPHY.
a Written by Orientals,
Documenta philosophiae Arabum, edidit latine vertit illustravit Aug.
Schmolders. Bonnae 1836. — Cf. id. Essai sur les ecoles philo-
sophiques chez les Arabes et notamment sur la doctrine d'Algaz-
zali. Paris 1842.
Tahafut al-falasifa (the mutual refutation of the philosophers) by
al-Oazdli (f 505 H., beg. 10. July 1111), Ibn Busd (f 595 H.,
beg. 3. Nov. 1198), Hoga Zdde (f 893 H., beg. 17. Dec. 1487).
Cairo 1303.
Die sogenannte Theologie des Aristoteles aus arabischen Handschriften
zum ersten Male herausgegeben. Von Fr. Dieterici. Leipzig
1882 (Abhandlungen des Berl. Or.-Congresses). Cf. Die so-
genannte Theologie des Aristoteles aus dem Arabischen iibersetzt
und mit Anmerkungen versehen von Fr. Dieterici. Leipzig 1883.
II commento medio di Averroe alia Poetica di Aristotele pubbl. da
Fausto Lasinio. Parte I. II testo arabo : Annali della Universita
Literature H. 155
Toscane. Tomo XII. Pisa 1872. 4^. — II testo arabo del com-
mento medio di Averroe alia retorica di Aristotele, pubbl. da
Fausto Lasinio. Firenze 1875. (Pubblicazioni del E. Istituto
di studi superiori).
Alfdrdbi's (f 950 A. D.) philosophische Abhandliingen aus Londoner,
Leidener und Berliner Handschrifteu. Herausgegeben von Fried-
rich Dieterici. Leiden 1890. — Id. aus dem Arabischen iiber-
setzt. Leiden 1892. — AlfdrdbVs Abhandlung der Musterstaat
aus Londoner und Oxforder Handschriften herausgegeben von
F. Bieteerici. Leiden 1895.
Philosophie und Theologie von Averroes {Ihn Rusd f 595 H., beg.
3. Nov. 1198). Herausgegeben von M. J. MxiUe)-. Miinchen
1859. — Aus dem Arabischen iibersetzt. Miinchen 1875.
Le Guide des Egares. Traite de Theologie et de Philosophie par
Moise ben Maimoun dit Maimonide (f 605 H., beg. 16. July
1208). Public pour la premiere fois dans I'original arabe et ac-
compagne d'une traduction fran^aise par Munk. I — III. Paris
1856—66.
Kitab Ihican as-safa wa-hullan al-wafa (between 950 — 1000 of our
era). 4 vols. Bombay 1305 — 1306. — A part of the rasail
ihwan as-safa has also been printed in Cairo, 1306. — Die
Abhandlungen der Ichwan Es-Safa in Auswahl herausg. von
F. Dieterici. 3 Hefte. Leipzig 1883—6.
Statio quinta et sexta et appendix libri Mevakif auctore 'Adhad-eddin
el-Igt (f 756 H., beg. 16. Jan. 1355) cum commentario Gorganii
ex codd. etc. edidit Th. Sorensen. Lipsiae 1848 (Scholastic
Metaphysics).
Definitiones viri meritissimi Sejjid Scherif Ali ben Mohammed Dschor-
dschani [al-Gorgdrii f 816 H., beg. 3. Apr. 1418). Accedunt de-
finitiones theosophi Mohji-ed-din Mohammed ben Ali vulgo Ibn
Arabi (f 638 H., beg. 23 July 1240) dicti. Ed. et adnot critica
instruxit Gustavus Fluff el. Lipsiae 1845.
P Written by Europeans.
Die griechischen Philosophen in der arabischen Uberlieferung. Von
August Midler. (Festschrift der Franckischen Stiftungen zu dem
50jahrigen Doctorjubilaum Bernhardy's). Halle 1873.
Al-Kindi (f ca. 850 A. D.) genannt „der Phiiosoph der Araber". Ein
Vorbild seiner Zeifc und seines Volkes. Von G. Flilgel. Leipzig
1857. (Abhandlungen der D. Morg. Ges. 1. Band. Nr. 2). Cf.
Otto Loth, Al-Kindi als Astrolog, Morgenlandische Forschungen.
Leipzig 1875, pp. 261 ff. and Sir Wm. Muir, The Apology of
Al-Kindy 2 Ed. London 1887.
Al-Farabi, des arabischen Philosophen, Leben und Schriften. Von
156 Literature I.
Moritz Steinschneider: Memoires de TAcademie Imp. des Sciences
de St. Petersbourg. VII. serie, tome XIII, 4. 1869. 40.
Ernest Benan, Averroes et rAverroisme. 3. ed. Paris 1861.
Die Philosophie der Araber im X. Jahrhundert n. Chr. aus den
Schriften der lauteren Briider herausgegeben von Fr. Dieterici.
Die Naturwissenschaft mid Natm-anschaumig der Araber. Berlin
1861. — Die Propadeutik. Berlin 1865. — Die Logik und Psy-
ohologie. Leipzig 1868. — Die Anthropologie. Leipzig 1871. —
Die Lehre von der Weltseele. Leipzig 1872. — Die Natm'-
anschauung und Naturphilosophie. 2. Ausg. Leipzig 1876. —
EinleituDg und Makrokosmos. Leipzig 1876. — Mikrokosmos.
Leipzig 1879.
I. NATURAL SCIENCE AND MEDICINE.
F. Wiistenfeld, Geschichte der arabischen Arzte und Naturforscher.
Gottingen 1840 (rather out of date).
Histoire de la medecine arabe par le Dr. Lucien Leclerc. 2 vol.
Paris 1876 (insufficient),
Jbn Abi XJseibia. Herausgegeben von August MiiUer. Konigsberg
i. Pr. 1884 {Ibn Abi TJsaibi'a f 668 H., beg. 14. May 1297
wrote this great work on the history of Arab physicians under
the title: 'Uyun al-'anba' fi tabakat al-'atibba'. For which see
Vol. II des travaux de la 6^ session du Congres international des
Orientalistes a Leide. Leide 1884. p. 257 ff.).
Hay at al-haiwan (zoological work) bj^ ad-Damirl (f 808 H., beg.
29. June 1405). 2 vols. Bulak 1284. Cairo 1305.
Kitab al-kanun fit-tibb, Theory of Medicine, composed by Abu 'All
ibn Sind (Avic'enna f 428 H., beg. 25. Oct. 1036). 3 vols.
V Bulak 1294.
al-Gami' li-mufradat al-'adwiya wal-'agdiya (On the common medicines
and foods) by Diya' ad-din Abii Muhammad Ibn al-Baitdr
(t 646 H., beg. 26. April 1248). 4 vols. Bulak 1231.
Tedkire (Science of medicine) by Dd'-ild al-Antdki (f 1005 H., beg.
15. Aug. 1596). 3 vols. Cairo 1294.
La Chimie du moyen-age . . . par M. Berthelot. Tome III. L'al-
chimie arabe comprenant une introduction et les traites de Crates,
d'el-Habib, d'Ostanes et de Djaber . . . texte et traduction . .
avec la collaboration de M. O. Houdas. Paris 1893. 40.
Materiaux pour servir a I'histoire des sciences mathematiques chez
les Grecs et les Orientaux par M. L. P. B. A. Sedtllot. 2 tomes.
Paris 1845. 1849.
Traite des instruments astronomiques des Arabes, trad, par J. J. Se-
dillot. Paris 1834. 1835. Memoires sur les instruments astro-
nomiques des Arabes par J. J. Sedillot. Paris 1841—45.
Literature K. 157
K. HISTORY, BIOGRAPHY.
a Written hy Orientals.
Ihn Coteiha's {ihn Kutaiha f 276 H. he^. 6. May 889) Handbuch der
Geschichte herausgegeben vouFerd. Wiistenfeld. Gottingen 1 850. —
Oriental edition: Kitab al-ma'arif. Cairo 1300.
Abu Bekr Muhammed ben al-Hasan Ibn Doraid's (f 321 H., beg.
1. Jan. 933) genealogisch-etymologisches Handbuch herausgegeben
von F. Wiistenfeld. Gottingen 1854.
*Chronologie orientalischer Yolker von Alberuni. Herausgegeben von
Eduard Sachau. Gedruckt auf Kosten der D. M. Ges. Leipzig
1878. 40. — Chronology of ancient Nations. An English Version
of the Arabic Text of the Athar ul Bakiya of Albiruni, or
"Vestiges of the Past". Collected and reduced to writing by
the Author in A. H. 390—1, A. D. 1000. Translated and
Edited, with Notes and Index, by C. E. Sachau. Published for
the Oriental Translation Fund of Great Britain and Ireland.
Roy 80. London 1879.
Ibn Wadhih (Wadih) qui dicitur al-Jaqiihi (Ya'kiibi) Historiae (composed
ca. 297 H.). 2 partes ed. M. Th. Eoutsma. Lugduni Batav. 1883.
Anonyme Ai'abische Chronik Band XI vermuthlich das Buch der Ver-
wandtschaft und Geschichte der Adligen von Abulhasan ahmed
ben jahja ben gabir ben dawud elbeladori elbagdadi (al-Balad^irt,
t 279 H. , beg. 3. Apr. 893). Autogr. und herausgegeben von
W. Ahlwardt. Greifswald 1883.
Kitab al-ahbar at-tiwal verf. von Abu Hanifa Ahmed ibn Daud ad-Dai-
nawari (f 282 or 290 H.) hrs. von Wladimir Oirgas. Leiden 1888.
*Annales auctore Abu Djafar Mohammed Ibn Djarir At-Tabari (at-
Tabari f 309 H., beg. 12. May 921), quos ediderunt J. Barth,
Th. Noldeke, O. Loth (f), E. Prym, H. Thorbecke (f), S. Frankel,
D. H. Miiller, M. Th. Houtsma, S. Guyard (f), V. Rosen et
M. J. de Goeje I, 1—5; II, 1—3; III, 1—4. Leiden 1879 seq.
MaQoudi (al-Masudl f 346 H., beg. 4. Apr. 957) Les prairies d'or.
Texte et traduction par C.Barbier de Meynard et Pavet de Cour-
teille. 9 tomes. Paris 1861—77. (id. 2 vols. Bulak 1283).
Hamzae Ispahanensis [Hamza wrote about 350 H.) annalium libri X.
Edidit J. M. E. Qottwaldt. I. textus, II. transl. Petropoli-Lipsiae
1844. 1848.
Fragmenta historicorum arabicorum. Tomus pi'imus continens partem
tertiam operis Kitabo '1-Oyun wa 'Ihadaik fi akhbari '1-had^ik
(written after the 11*^ cent. A-D.) quem ediderunt M. J. de
Goeje et P. de Jong. Lugduni Bat. 1868. 4^^. — Tomus secundus
continens partem operis Tadjdribo 'lOmami, auctore Ibn MasTcoioaih
(t 421 H., beg. 9. Jan. 1030) edidit M. J. de Goeje. Lugd. Bat. 1871.
158 Literature K.
*Ibn el-Athiri {ibn al-'Atir f 630 H., beg. 18. Oct. 1232) Chronicon
quod perfectissimum (el-KamQ) inscribitur. Edidit Carolus Jo-
hannes Tornberff. 14 vol. Lugdnni Bat. 1851 — 1876. — 12 vols.
Bulak 1290 and later.
Commentaire historique sur le poeme d'Ibn-Abdoun (Ibn ^Abdiin
t 529 H., beg. 22. Oct. 1134) par Ibn Badroun {Ibn Badrun
wrote in the same century) publie par B. P. A. Dozy. Leide 1846
(Ouvrages arabes publies par Dozy).
Historia saracenica arabice olim exarata a Georgio Elmacino (al-MaJcm
■f 672 H., beg. 18. July 1273), edita et latine reddita opere et
studiis Thomae Erpenit. Lugduni Bat. 1625.
Ta'rih muhtasar ad-duwal (Outlines of History by Gregorius abu
'1-Farag Ibn el-*Ibri {Barhebraeus | 1286 A. D.) ed. by Salhdni.
Beirut 1890. (The edition by Pococke, 2 tomi 40. Oxonii 1663
is rare).
Elfachri. History of the Moslem Empires from the beginning to
the end of the Califate by Ibn etthiqthaqa (wrote about 1302
A-D.). Edited in Arabic by W. Ahlwardt. Gotha 1860.
Abulfedae (f 732 H., beg. 4. Oct. 1331). Annales muslemici arabice
et latine. Opera et studiis J. J. Reiskii, nunc primum ed. J. G.
Ch Adler. 5 voh Hafniae 1789—94. — 2 vols. Stambul 1286.
f Abulfedae historia Anteislamica , Arabice e duob. Codd. Paris,
edidit, vers. lat. notis et indicibus auxit H. 0. Fleischer. Lipsiae
1831. 40.
Ta'rih Zain ad-din *Umar ibn al-Wardl (f 749 or 760 H. = 1348/9).
2 vols. Cairo 1285. — An excerpt: Aegyptus auctore Ibn
al-Vardi. Edidit vertit notulisque illustravit Martinus Frdhn.
Halae 1804.
Ibn Ealdun (f 808 H., beg. 29. June 1405) al-'ibar etc. History of
the World. 7 vols. Bulak 1284. — Prolegomenes d'Ebn-
Khaldoun. Texte arabe par Quatremere. 3 vols. Paris 1858
(Notices et extraits des mscr. XVI, 1. XVII, 1. XVIII, 1.). —
Prolegomenes historiques d'Ibn Khaldoun. Traduction par Mac
OucJcin de Slane. 3 vols. Paris 1862 — 68 (Notices et extr. XIX,
1. XX, 1. XXI, 1).
The Tarikh al-Kholafa; or history of the Caliphs, from the death of
Mohammad to the year 900 of the Hijrah by the celebrated Jalal
al-Din Al-Osyooti [as-SuyuU f 911 H., beg. 4. June 1505), ed. by
W. N. Lees und Mawlawi Abd al-Haqq. Calcutta 1857. Another
edition Cairo 1305.
*Liber expugnationis regionum auctore Imamo Ahmed ibn Jahja ibn
Djabir al-Baladsori {al-Baldduri f 279 H., beg. 3. Apr. 892) ed.
M. J. de Goeje. Lugduni Bat. 1866. 40.
Oicsdma ibn Mounkidh un 6mir syrien an premier si^cle des Croisades,
(1095 — 1188) par Uartwig Derenhourg. Deuxi^me partie. Texte
Literature K. 159
arabe de I'autobiographie d'Ousama. Paris 1886 (cf. Carlo de
Landberg, Critica arabica II. Leyde 1888). — Ousama ibn
Mounkidh etc. par H. Derenbourg (French edition.). Paris 1889.
'Imdd ed-dln el-katib el-isfahani (f 597 H. = 1201) Conquete de la
Syrie et de la Palestine par Salah ed-din. Public par le comte
Carlo de Landerg. Vol. I. Texte arabe. Leyde 1888.
Vita et res gestae sultani Almaliehi Alnasiri^Saladini auctore Bohad-
dino P. Sjeddadi {Balm ad -din ibn Sadddd f 632 fl. = 1234)
edidit ac latine vertit Alberttts Schultens. Lugduni Batav. 1732
(1755). fol.
Kitab ar-raudatain^fi ta'rih ad-daulatain (History of Nureddin^ and
Saladin) by Sihab ad-din al-Mukaddasi , called Abu Sdma
(t 665 H. = 1267). Cairo. 2 vols. 1287.
Kitab al-'ins al-galil bi-ta'nh al-kuds wal-halil. History of Jeru-
salem and Hebron by Mugtr ad-din (f 927 H., beg. 12. Dec.
1520). — Cf. Histoire de Jerusalem et d'Hebron. Fragments de
la Chronique de Moudjir-ed-dyn traduits sur le texte arabe par
Henry Sauvaire. Paris 1876.
Die Chroniken der Stadt Mekka. Gesammelt und herausgegeben von
Ferdinand Wuste7ifeld (I Azraki. II Fakihi, Fasi, Ibn Dhuheira,
III Kutb ed-din. IV German edition). I— IV. Leipzig 1857 — 61.
Hulasat al-wafa bi'ahbar dar al-mustafa (ffistory of the town of
Medina) by as-SamhUdi (f 911 H., beg. 4. June 1505). Bulak
1285. — Extracts translated by Wiistenfeld in den Abhandlungen
der k. Ges. der Wissenschaften zu Gottingen. Bd. IX. 1860.
*al-Hitat (Geography and History of Egypt) by al-Malnrizi (f 845
^H.,"beg. 22. May 1441). 2 vols. Bulak 1270. — Histoire des
Sultans Mamlouks de PEgj'pte, ecrite en arabe par Taki-eddin-
Ahmed Makrizi, traduite en fran^ais et accompagnee de notes
par Quatremere. 2 vol. Paris 1837 — 45. 40.
Abul-Mahdsin ibn Tagri Bardii (f 874 H., beg. 11. July 1469) Annales
(History of Egypt) I, 1. 2 ediderunt T. O. J. Juynboll et B. F.
Matthes. II, 1. 2. ed. T. 0. J. Juynboll. Lugduni Bat. 1852—61
(incomplete).
Husn al-muhadara. History of Egypt by as-Suyutl (f 911 H., beg.
4. June 1505). 2 vols. Cairo.
'Agaib al-atar fit-taragim wal-ahbar (History of Egypt) by aUQabartl
(t 1236 = 1821). 4 vols." Cairo n. d.
Ahmedis Arabsiadae [Ahmed ibn'Arab§ah f 854 H., beg. 14. Febr.
1450) vitae et rerum gestarum Timuri, qui vulgo Tamerlanes
dicitur historia. (Ed.) Latine vertit etc. S. H. Manger. 2 vol.
Leovardiae 1767. 1772. — Cairo 1285.
The History of the Almohades by Abdo - '1 -Wahid al-Marrekoshi
(wrote in the year 621 H. = 1224) edited by B. Dozy. 2. ed.
Leyden 1881.
160 Literature K.
Historia Abbadidarum praeiiiissis scriptorum Arabum de ea dynastia
locis nunc priraum editis , auctore R. P. A. Dozy. I — III. Lug-
duni Bat. 1849. 40. (Deals w. Spain).
Annales regum Mauretaniae a condito Idrisidarum imperio ad annum
fugae 726, ab Abu-1 Hasan Ali ben Abd Allah Ibn Abi Zer'
Fesano, vel ut alii malunt Abu Muhammed Salih ibn Abd el
Halim Granatensi conscriptos ed. illustr. Carolus Joh. Tornherg^
2 vol. Upsaliae 1843. 1846.
Histoire de I'Afrique et de l'EsiDao:ne intitulee al-Bayano '1-Moglirib
par Ibn Adhdri (de Maroc) (I6n al-'Iddn wrote between 363
and 366 H.) et fragments de la chronique d'Arib (de Cordoue)
publics par B. P. A. Dozy. 2. vols, Leyde 1848—51.
Analectes sur I'histoire et la litterature des Arabes d'Espagne par
Al-M^kkari (al-Makkari f 1041 H., beg. 30. July 1631). Publies
par B. Dozy, G. Dugat, L. Krehl et W. Wright. 2 vol. Leyde
1855 — 61. (Conf. Fleischer, Textverbesserungen in Al-Makkari's
Geschichtswerke. Kleinere Schriften. Vol. II pt. 1. Leipzig
1888.) — Lettre a M. Fleischer contenant les remarques critiques
et explicatives sur le texte d' Al-Makkari par B. Dozy. Leyde
1871. — Cf. The history of the Mohammedan Dynasties in Spain
by Ahmed ibn Mohammed Al-Makkari. Translated and illustrated
by Pascual de Gayangos. 2 vol. London 1840 — 3. 4^.
Bibliotheca arabo-sicula, ossia Raccolta di testi arabici che toccano la
geografia, la storia, la biografia e la bibliografia della Sicilia,
messi insieme da Michele Amari. Lipsia 1857; Appendice, ibid.
1875.
Alheruni's India, an account of the religion, philosophy, literature,
chronology, astronomy, . customs, laws and astrology of India
about 1030. Ed. by Edw. Sachau. London 1887. 4'\ — Id.
An English edition with notes and indices. By E. Sachau. London.
2 vol. 1888.
Scriptorum Arabum de Rebus Indicis loci et opuscula inedita rec.
et illustr. Joannes Oildemeister. Ease. pr. Bonnae 1838. —
Cf. id., Dissertationis de rebus Indiae, quo mode in Arabum
notitiam venerint, pars I. Bonnae 1838.
*Ibn Challican, Vitae illustrium virorum. E codd. nunc primum
arabice edidit variis lectionibus, indicibusque locupletissimis in-
struxit Ferd. Wiistenfeld. Gottingae 1835—40, 40. — Ibn Hal-
likan (f 681 H., beg. 11. Apr. 1282). 2 vols. Bulak 1275; another
edition 1299. — Ibn Khallikan's Biographical Dictionary, translated
from the Arabic by Baron Mac Guckin de Slane. 4 vol. Paris-
London 1843—71. 40.
Fawat al-wafayat (supplement to Ibn Hallikan) by as-Salah al-KutuM
(t 764 H., beg. 21. Oct. 1362). ^2 vols. Bulak "1283.
r OF THE
CTNIVERSITI
Literature K, ^'"^Jf- iftl?ORH\^
The biographical dictionary of illustrious men chiefly at the beginning
of Islamism by Abu Zakariya Jahya el-Nawawi (f 676 H. = 1277)
edited by Ferd. Wiistenfeld. Gottingen 1842 — 47 (cf. idem for
the Life and Writings of el-Nawawi, Gottingen 1849, from the
4*11 vol. of the Abhandl. d. kgl. Ges. d. Wiss. zu Gott,).
Nuzhat al-'alubba fi tabakat al-'udaba. Concerning celebrated Men.
By Abul-Baraka't al-Anbdri (f 577 H., beg. 17. May 1181).
Cairo lithogr. n. d.
P Written hy Europeans.
f Vergleichungstabellen der muhammedanischen und christlichen Zeit-
rechnung nach den ersten Tagen jedes muhammedanischen Monats
berechnet. 'S.er2i\xss:e°;ehen van Ferd. Wiistenfeld. Leipzig 1844. —
Fortsetzung der Wiistenf. Yergl. - Tab. bis 1500 von E. Mahler.
Leipzig 1887.
*Die Geschichtsschreiber der Araber und ihre Werke. Von F. Wiisten-
feld. (From the XXVIII. and XXIX. vol. of the Abhandlungen
der Kgl. Ges. d. W. zu Gottingen). Gottingen 1882. 40.
*Genealogische Tabellen der Arabischen Stamme und Familien . . .
Aus den Quellen zusammengestellt von Ferdinand Wilster^feld.
Gottingen 1852. q.-fol. — Register zu den genealogischen Ta-
bellen der Arabischen Stamme und Familien. Mit historischen
und geographischen Bemerkungen von Ferdinand Wiistenfeld.
Gottingen 1853.
* Caussin de Perceval, Essai sur I'histoire des Arabes avant I'islamisme
3 vol. Pai'is 1847.
Geschichte der Perser und Araber zur Zeit der Sassaniden. Aus
der arabischen Chronik des Tabari iibersetzt und mit ausfiihr-
lichen Erlauterungen und Erganzungen versehen von Th. Noldeke,
Leyden 1879.
t*Der Islam im Morgen- und Abendland. Von A. Miiller. 2 Bande.
Berlin 1885. 1887. (Allgemeine Geschichte in EinzeldarsteUungen
hrsgg. von L. Oncken. Zweite Hauptabteilung. Vierter Teil).
*Geschicbte der Chalifen. Nach handschriftlichen grosstenteils noch
unbeniitzten Quellen bearbeitet von Gxistav Weil. 3 Bande.
Mannheim 1846 — 51. — Geschichte des Abbasidenchalifats in
Aegypten. Von Qustav Weil. 2 Bande. Stuttgart 1860 — 2.
t Geschichte der islamitischen Volker von Mohammed bis zur Zeit
des Sultan Selim iibersichtlich dargestellt von Qustav Weil.
Stuttgart 1866.
fGeschichte der Araber bis auf den Sturz des Chalifats von Bagdad.
Von Gustav Fliigel. 2. Aufl. Leipzig 1864.
The Caliphate, its rise, decline, and fall from original sources by
Sir William Muir. London 1891. New and revised edition 1894.
Socin. Arabic Grammar.' 11
162 Literature L.
Handbuch der morgenlandischen Miinzkunde. Von J. G. Stickel.
2 Hefte, Leipzig 1865—70. 40.
Catalogue of Oriental Coins in the British Museum, 9 vol. London
1875—1889.
The Mohammadan Dynasties, chronological and genealogical Tables
with historical Introductions by St. Lane-Poole. London 1894.
Die Charidschiten uuter den ersten Omayyaden. Ein Beitrag zur
Greschichte des ersten islamischen Jahrhunderts von B. E.
Brunnow. Leiden 1884.
De opkomst der Abbasiden in Chorasan door Gr. van Vlooten. Leiden 1 890.
Memoires sur les Carmathes du Bahrain et les Fatimides par M. J.
de Goeje. Leiden 1886.
Die Statthalter von Agypten zur Zeit der Chalifen. Von F. Wiisten-
feld. Parts 1 and 2. Abhandlungen der Kgl. Ges. d. Wissen-
schaften zu Gottingen. 1875 (4^^). Band 20. Parts 3 and 4.
ibid. 1876, Band 21.
History of the Moors in Spain to the Conquest of Andalusia by the
Almoravides (711 — 1110), by R. Dozy. German Edition with
additions by the Author. 2 vols. Leipzig 1874.
Poesie und Kunst der Araber in Spanien und Sicilien. Von Adolf
Friedrich von Schack. 2 Bande. Berlin 1865. 2. Aufl. 1877.
*Culturgeschichte des Orients unter den Chalifen. Von Alfred von
Kremer. 2 Bande, Wien 1875 — 77.
Das Einnahmebudget des Abbasiden-Reichs vom Jahre 360 H.
(918 — 919) von Alfred von Kremer. Denkschriften der philos.-hist.
Classe der Kais. Akademie der Wiss. in Wien. Bd. XXXVI. 1887.
*Gescliichte der herrschenden Ideen des Islams. Der Gottesbegrifif, die
Prophetie und Staatsidee. Von Alfred v. Kremer. Leipzig 1868.
Die Baustile. Historische und technische Entwicklung. Des Handbuchs
der Architectur (von J. Durm) Zweiter Theil. 3. Baud, zweiteHalfte ;
Die Baukunst des Islam. Von Franz Pascha. Darmstadt 1887.
Prisse d'Avennes, L'art arabe d'apres les monuments du Caire depuis
le Vile siecle jusqu' a la fin du XVIIIe. 3 vol. fol. 1 vol. 4.
Paris 1877. — La decoration arabe. (Extrait du grand ouvrage.)
Paris 1865. fol.
L. COSMOGRAPHY, GEOGRAPHY, ETHNOGRAPHY,
TRAVELS.
a Written by Orientals.
Cosmographie de Chems ed-din Abou Abdallah Mahommed ed-Dimichqi
(ad-Dimi§ki f 654 H., beg. 30. Jan. 1256). Texte arabe publie
d'apres I'edition commencee par M. Frahn, et d'apres les manu-
LiTERATUEE L. 163
scrits par M. A. F. Mehren. St. Petersbourg 1866. 40. — Manuel
de la cosmographie du moyen age, traduit de I'arabe „Nokhbet
ed-dahr fi 'adjaib-il-birr wal-bah'r" de Shems ed-din Abou-'Abdallah
Mohammed de Damas et accompagnee d'eclaircissements par M.
A. F. Mehren. Copenhague 1874.
*Zakarija Ben Muhammed ben Mahmud el-Caztcini's (aUKazmni
f 682 H., beg. 1. Apr. 1283) Kosmographie. Herausg. von Ferd.
Wiistenfeld. 2 Bande. Gottingen 1848—9. — id. nach der
Wiistenfeld'schen Textausgabe etc. iibersetzt von Hermann Ethe,
Erster Halbband. Leipzig 1868.
Haridat al-'agaib wa-faridat al-garaib, a species of Cosmography
composed by 'Umar ihn al-Wardi (f 749 or 750 H. =» 1348 or 9).
Cairo 1292.
Specimen e literis orientalibus exhibens az-Zamaksarzi, (az-ZamalSari
t 538 H., beg. 16. July 1143) lexicon geographicum quod auspice
T. Gr. J. Juynboll edidit Mathias Salverda de Grave. Lugduni
Bat. 1856.
Al-Hamddni's (f 334 H., beg. 13. Aug. 945) Geographie der Arabischen
Halbinsel. Nach den Handschr. herausgegeben von David Heinrich
Muller. Leiden 1884.
Das geographische Worterbuch des Abu 'Obeid 'Abdallah ben *Abd
el-'Aziz el-Bekri (f 487 H. = 1094) nach den Handschriften
zu Leiden, Cambridge, London und Mailand herausgegeben von
Ferd. Wiistevfeld. 2 Bande. Gottingen, Pai-is 1876. 1877.
*Jacut's {Yakut f 626 H. = 1229) Geographisches Worterbuch aus
den Handschiiften zu Berlin, St. Petersburg und Paris auf Kosten
der Deutschen Morgenlandischen Gesellschaft herausgegeben von
Ferdinand Wiistenfeld. 6 Bande. Leipzig 1866 — 73.
Jacut's Moschtarik, das ist: Lexicon geographischer Homonyme.
Herausgegeben von Ferd. Wiistenfeld. Gottingen 1846.
Marasid al-ittila*i, Lexicon geographicum ed T. G. J. Juynboll I — VL
Lugduni' B. 1850—64. (An Extract from Yakiit).
Geographie d'Aboulfeda (AJw'i-/irfa f 732 H., beg. 4. Oct. 1331). Texte
arabe par Beinaud et Mac-Guckin de Slane. Paris 1840. —
Geographie d'Ismail Abou '1-Feda en arabe publiee par Charles
Schier. iEd. autogr. Dresde 1846. — Geographie d'Aboulfeda,
traduite de I'arabe en fran^ais par Reinaud I (*Latroduction
g6nerale a la geographie des Orientaux) II, 1 Paris 1848 ; II, 2
par Stanislas Guyard. Paris 1883.
*Bibliotheca geographorum arabicorum. Edidit M. J. de Goeje.
Pars prima. Viae regnorum. Descriptio ditionis moslemicae
auctore Abu Ishak al-Farisi al-Istakhri {al-lstahrxj cf. Zeitschrft
d. D. Morgenl. Ges. Bd. 25, p. 42 ff.). Lugduni Bat. 1870.
Pars secunda. Viae et regna. Descriptio ditionis moslemicae
auctore Abu '1-Kasim Ibn Haukal fibid.). Lugduni Bat. 1873.
11*
1 64 Literature L.
Pars tertia. Descriptio imperii Moslemici auctore Al-MoTiad-
dasi {al-Mukaddasi wrote in year 378 the H.). LuQ^duni Bat. 1876.
Cf. Description of Syria &c. by Mukaddasi. Translated from
the Arabic by Guy Le Strange. (Palestine Pilgrims' Text Society).
Pars quarta. Continens indices, glossarium et addenda et emen-
danda ad part. I— III auctore M. J. de Goeje. Lusfduni Bat. 1879.
Pars quinta. Compendium libri Kitab al-boldan auctore Ibn
al-Fahih al-Hamadhani (wrote ca. A. D. 290). Lugd. Bat. 1885.
Pars sexta. Kitab al-masalik wal-mamalik (liber viarum et
regnorum) auctore Abu'l-Kasim Obaidallah ibn Abdallah ibn
Khordddbeh (Ibn Hordadbeh wrote in the second half of the
9th cent. A. D.) et" excerpta e Kitab al-Kharadj (K. al-harag
Taxbook) auctore Koddma ibn Djafar (Kuddma ibn Ga^far
wrote about 930 A. D.). Lugduni Bat. 1889.
Pars septima. Kitab al-a'lak an-nafisa VII auctore Abu Ali
Ahmed ibn Omar ibn Rosteh (wrote before 301. H.) et Kitab al-
boldan auctore Ahmed ibn abi Jakiib ibn Wadhih al-Katib al-
Jakiibi (cf. p. 157). Lugduni Bat. 1892.
Pars octava. Kitab at-tanbih wa'1-ischraf auctore al-Masudi
(cf, p. 157). Accedunt indices et glossarium ad tomos VII et
VIIL Lugduni Bat. 1894.
Description de I'Afrique et de I'Espagne par Edrist (wrote 548
H., beg. 29 March 1153) texte arabe public pour la premiere fois
d'apres les man. de Paris et d' Oxford avec une traduction, des
notes et un glossaire par B.^Dozy et M. J. de Goeje. Le3'de 1866.
The travels of Ibn Jubair (Ibn Gubair end of the 6th cent.) edited bj^
William Wright. Ley den 1852.
Voyages d'Ibn Batoutah (Ibn Batuta f 779 H., beg. 10 May 1377).
Texte arabe, accompagnee d'une traduction par C. Defremery et
B. B. Sanguinetti (Publications de la Societe asiatique). 4 vol.
Paris 1853—58; deux. tir. 1874—77. — Cairo 1288.
j3 Written by Eicropeans.
F. Wilstenfeld, Die Litteratur der Erdbeschreibung bei den Arabem.
Zeitschrift fiir vergleichende Erdkunde hrsgg. von J. G. Liidde I,
1841, S. 24—67.
Carte generale des provinces europeennes et asiatiques de I'Empire
Ottoman, dressee par Henri Kiepert 4 feuilles. Deux. ed. en-
tierement corrigee et augmentee d'un index alphabetique. Berlin
1892.
(Karte von) Arabien zu C. Bitters Erdkunde, Buch III, West-Asien,
Teil XII und XIII bearbeitet von H. Kiepert. Neue berichtigte
Ausgabe, die Orthographic revidiert von Th. Noldeke. Berlin 1867
(D. Eeimer).
Literature L. 165
Skizze der Geschichte und Greoofraphie Arabians von den altesten
Zeiten bis zum Propheten Muhammad. Auf Grund der Inscliriften,
der Angaben der alten Autoren und der Bibel von Edzcard Glaser.
Zweiter Band. Berlin 1890.
Die alfce Geographie Arabiens als Grundlage der Entwicklungsgeschichte
des Semitismus vou A. Sprenger. Bern 187.5.
Arabien im sechsten Jahrhundert. Eine ethnographische Skizze von
Otto Blau. Mit einer Karte : Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenl.
Gesellschaft. Leipzig 1869 (XXIII B.) p. 559—592.
Arabien und die Araber seit hundert Jahren. Eine geographische
und geschichtliche Skizze von Albrecht Zehine. Halle 1875.
Palestine under the Moslems. A description of Syria and the Holy
Land from A. D. 650 to 1500. Translated from the works of the
mediaeval Arab Geographers by Gruy le Strange. (London) 1890.
Relation de I'Egypte par Abdallatif {^AhA al-Latif al-Bagdadi f 629 H.,
beg. 29. Oct. 1231). Le tout traduit et enrichi de notes par
Silvester de Sacy. Paris 1810. 4". (The text of 'Abd al-Latif
has been published by J. White: 'AbdoUatiphi Historiae Aegypti
compendium. Oxonii 1800).
*Beschreibung von Arabien. Aus eigenen Beobachtungen und im
Lande selbst gesammelten Nachrichten abgefasst von Carsttn
Niebuhr. Kopenhagen 1772. 4^.
Carsten Niehuhrs Beisebeschreibung nach Arabien und andem um-
liegenden Landern. 1. Band. Kopenhagen 1774. 2. Band. 1778;
English edtn. 2 vols. Edinb. 1792.
f*Travels in Arabia (1814) comprehending an account of those territories
in Hedjaz which the Mohammedans regard as sacred. By the
late John Lewis Bnrckhardt. London, 2 vol. 1829. — Johann
Lxidwig Burckhardt's Beisen in Arabien, enthaltend eine Besclirei-
buug derjenigen Gebiete in Hedjaz, welche die Mohammedaner
fiir heilig achten . . . Aus dem Englischen iibersetzt. Weimar 1830.
f*/. L. Burckhardt, Notes on the Bedouins and Wahabys. 2 vol.
London 1831. — Bemerkungen iiber die Beduinen und Wahabi's.
Weimar 1831.
Richard Burton, Personal narrative of a pilgrimage to El Medinah and
Meccah. 2 vol. London 1857 (and frequently, also in the Tauchnitz
edition).
*Travels in Arabia Deserta by Chxrles M. Doughty. 2 vol. Cambridge
1888. (With new map).
Adolf von Wrede's Eeise in Hadhramaut, Beled Beny 'Issa und Beled
el Hadschar. Herausgegeben . . . von H. Freiherr von Maltzan.
Braunschweig 1870. — Eeise nach Siidarabien und Geographische
Forschungen im und iiber den siidwestlicheu Teil Arabiens von
Heinrich Freihern von Maltr,an. Braunschweig 1873.
166 Literature M,
Mekka von Dr. C. Snouck Hurgronje. 2 Bande. Mit Bilder-Atlas.
Haag 1888. 1889.
I* An account of the manners and customs of the modern Egyptians,
written in Egypt etc. By Edward William Lane. Various
editions. London. — Lane, Sitten und Gebrauche der heutigen
Egypter. Ubersetzt von /. Zenker. 3 Bde. Leipzig 1852.
E. W. Lane, Arabian society in the middle ages. Studies from the
Thousand and One Nights ed. by Stanley Lane Poole. London
1883. (Supplement to the "Manners and Customs", containing
the notes to Lane's translation of the Thousand and One Nights
{y. infra).
M. VERSE.
Delectus veterum carminum arabicorum. Carmina selegit et edidit
Th. Noeldeke, glossarium confecit A. MilUer. Berolini 1890.
Tiber Poesie und Poetik der Araber von Wilhelni Ahlwardf. Gotha
1856. 40.
Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Poesie der alien Araber. Von Th. Noldeke.
Hannover 1S64.
Kitdb al-agdnl by Abu '1-Farag *Ali al-Isfahdnl (f 352 H., beg.
30. Jan. 962). 20 vols. Bulak 1285. — Alii Ispahanensis
liber cantilenarum magnus, ed. Kosegarten. T. 1. Gripesvoldiae
1840. 40, — The twenty-first volume of The Kitab al-aghani
ed. by Bud. E. Brunnow, Leyden 1888. — Tables alphabetiques
du Kitab al-Agani par J. Quidi. ler fasc. Leide 1895.
Kitab raudat al-adab fi tabakat suara* al'arab by Iskander-Aga
Abkarins (modern Beyrout scholar). Beimt 1858.
Bizanat al-adab wa-lubb lubab lisan al-'arab, by '' Ab-dal-Kddir ibn
"TJmar al-Bagdddi (f 1093 H.; beg. 21. Aug. 1629) 4 vols. Bulak
1291 (A work on poets; on the margin are printed the Sawahid
al-'Aini). An index to the poets appeared from the pen of Guidi
in the transactions of the R. Accademia dei Lincei, Rome 1887.
*The Diwans of the six ancient Arabic poets Ennabiga, 'Antara, Tharafa,
Zuhair, 'Alqama and Lnruulqais, ed. by W. Ahlwardt. London.
1870.
Bemerkungen iiber die Achtheit der alten Arabischen Gedichte mit
besonderer Beziehung auf die sechs Dichter etc. von W. Ahlwardt.
Greifswald 1872.
Le Diwan de Ndbiga Dhobyani publie par H. Derenbourg. Journal
asiatique 1868 — 9.
JBL. Thorbecke, 'Antarah, ein vorislamischer Dichter. Leipzig 1867.
Die Gedichte des'AZfc aw? a Alfahl. Mit Anmerkungen herausgegeben
von Albert Socin. Leipzig 1867.
Le diwan ^.^Amro'lkais par le Bon de Slane. Paiis 1837. 40. With
Literature M. 167
Commentary by al-Batalyusi. Cairo 1308. Cf. Amrilkais, der
Dichter und Konig. Von Fr. Rilckert. Stuttgart und Tu-
bingen 1843.
f*Septem Mo'allakdt carmina antiquidsima Arabum, textum etc. rec.
F, A.Arnold. Lipsiae 1860 (out of print) — With commentary
by az-Zauzani (f 375 H., beg. 24. May 958). Cairo 1288.
A commentary by Abii Zakariya Sahya at-Tibri'zi (f 420 H. , beg.
11. Aug. 1108) on ten ancient Arabic poems edited from the Mss.
of Cambridge, London and Leiden by Charles James Lyall.
Fasc. I Bibliotheca Indica, New Series, No. 789, Calcutta 1891;
Fasc. II ib. No. 840. Calc. 1894.
Der Diwan des LeMd. Nach einer Handschrift zum ersten Male
herausgegeben von Jusvf Dija-ad-dln al-Chdlidi. "Wien 1880.
Cf. A, von Krenier in den Sitzungsberichten der phil.-hist.
Classe der Kais. Akademie d. Wissenschaften 98. Bd. 2 Heft.
Wien 1881. — Die Gedichte des Lebid. Nach der Wiener
Ausgabe iibersetzt und mit Anmerkungen versehen aus dem
Nachlasse des Dr. A. Huber herausgegeben von Carl* BrockeU
mann. Leiden 1891.
Die Mufaddalijat (Anthology of the Granmaarian al-Mtifaddal] f about
170 H.) Nach den Handschriften herausgegeben von Heinrich
Thorbecke. Erstes Heft. Leipzig 1885.
*Hamasae carmina cum Tebrisii scholiis integris edidit, indicibus in-
struxit, versions latina et commentario illustr. O. G. Freyiag.
2 vol. Bonnae 1828—47 (collected by Abu Tammam f 190, beg.
27. Nov. 805; at-TabrIzi Comm. f 420 H., beg. 11. Aug. 1108).
Anbther edition Bulak 1296. Cf. Hamasa oder die altesten
ai'abischen Volkslieder, gesammelt von Abu Temmam, iibersetzt
und erlautert von Friedrich Ruckert. 2 T. Stuttgart 1846.
The Hudsailian poems contained in the manuscript of Leyden edited
in Arabic and translated with annotations by J. G. L. Kosegarten.
Vol. I. London 1854. 40. — Letzter Theil der Lieder der Hu-
dhailiten, arabisch und deutsch: Skizzen und Vorarbeiten von
/. Wellhausen. 1. Heft. Berlin 1884. Comp. Z. der D. Morgenl.
GeseJlschaft 39. pp. 104, 151, 411 ff.
Die Gedichte des 'XJrvca ibn Alward. Von Th. Noldeke: Abhandlungen
der Kgl. Ges. d. Wiss. zu Gottingen. Hist.-Phil. Classe 11.
Gedichte und Fragmente des ^Aus ibn Eajar, gesammelt, herausgegeben
und iibersetzt von Rudolf Geyer: Sitzungsberichte der Kais.
Akadeinie der Wissenschaften in Wien. Philos.-hist. Classe. Band
126. Wien 1892.
Anis al-gulasa fi diwan al-Hansa (The poetess al-Hansa is said to
have died A. H. 24, beg. 7. Nov. 644 A. D.) Beirut 1888. —
Le diwan d'al Hansa' traduit par le P. de Coppier et suivi de
fragments inedits d'Al-Hirniq. Beyrouth 1889.
168 Literature M.
Ibn Hisami (t 762 H., beg. 11 Nov. 1360) Commentarius in Carmen
Ka^bi ben Zoheir Banat Suad ed. Guidi. Lipsiae 1871. 1874.
Der Diwan des Garwal b. Aus al-Hutefa (f between 68 — 70 H.)
Bearbeitet von Iffnaz Goldziher: Zeitschrift der D. Morgenl.
Gesellschaft Bd. 46, 8. 1—53; 173—225; 471—527; Bd. 47,
S. 43—85; 168—201. Also in a collected edition. Leipzig 1893.
Diwan sayyidna Hassan ibn Tdhit (f 54 H., beg. 30. Aug. 683).
Tunis 1281.
Diwan d'al-Ahfcal, Texte arabe publie pour la premiere fois d'apres le
manuscrit de St. Petersbourg et annote par le P. A. Salhani
S. J. Beyrouth 1891.
Divan de Ferazdak (f 110 H., beg. 16. April 728) recits de Mohammed
ben-Habib d'apres Ibn-el-Arabi publie sur le manuscrit de Sainte-
Sophie de Constantinople avec une traduction fran^aise par B.
Boucher. Paris 1870. 4". (incomplete),
Magmii' mustamil 'ala hams dawawin (an-Nabiga, 'Urwa, Hatim, 'Al-
karaa and Farazdak) Cairo 1293 cf. Z. der D. Morgenl. Ge-
sellschaft 31, 667 ff.'
Chalef elahma7-^s (died after 155 H.) Qasside. Berichtigter arabischer
Text etc. von A. Ahlivardt. Greifswald 1859.
Diwan al-Buhturt (f 190 H., beg. 27 Nov. 805). Constantinople 1300.
Diwan des Abu Nowas nach der Wiener und Berliner Handschrift
mit Benutzung anderer Handschriften herausgegeben von W. Ahl-
icardt. 1. Die Weinlieder. Greifswald 1861. — Diwan Abi Nuwas.
Cairo 1277. (Abio Nuwas f about 195 H. = 810).
Diwan poetae Abu-'l-Walid Moslim ibno-'l-Walid al-Angari cognomine
Qano-l-ghawdni (Sart al-gawdni f 208 H., beg. 16. May 823)
quern edidit M. de J, Goeje. Lugduni Bat. 1875. 4".
Al-anwar az-zahiya fi diwan Abi'l-'Atahiya (Abu*l- Atdhiya f 221
H., beg. 26. Dec. 835). Beirut 1886. 2me 6dit. 1888.
Diwan Abl Tammdm Habib ibn Aus at-Ta'i (f 231 H., beg. 7. Sept.
845). Cairo 1292.'
Diwan amir al-mu minin Ibn-al-Mu tazz nl-'Abbasi (f 296 H. = 909)
Cairo 1891. Cf. Uber Leben und Werk des 'Abdallah ibn al-
Mutazz von Otto Loth. Leipzig 1882.
Mutanabbii (al-Mutanabbl f 354 H. = 965) carmina cum commen-
tario Wahidii primum edidit, indicibus instruxit, varias lectiones
adnotavit Fr. Dieterici. Berolini 1861. 4^.
Diwan Abi Firds al-Hamdani (f 357 beg. 7. Dec. 967). Beirut
1873.
Abu'l-AW al-Mdarri (f 449 H., beg. 10 March 1057) Sakt ez-zind,
Poems with Commentary. 2 vols. Bulak 1286 and 1302 (Another
edition Beirut 1884). — Luziim ma la yalzam. Bombay 1303.
40; Luzumiyat 2 vols. Cairo 1891. — Caroli Bieu de Abul-Alae
Literature N. 169
poetae arabici vita et camiimbus. Bonnae 1843. Cf. Zeitschrift
der D. Mor^enl. Gesellschaft 29, 304; 30, 40; 31, 471 ff.
Yatimat ad-dahr fi suara' ahl al-'asr, Anthology composed by Abu
Mansui' 'Abd al-Malik sX-Tadlibi (f 429 H., beg. 14. Oct. 1037)
4 vols. Damascus 1302.
Anthologie arabe ou choix de poesies arabes inedites traduites pom-
la premiere fois en fran^ais et accompagnees d' observations critiques
et litteraires par M. Grangeret de La Grange. (Paris) 1828.
N. BELLES-LETTRES, ETHICS, ROMANCES.
♦The Kamil of El-Mubarrad (f 285 H., beg. 28. Jan. 898), edited
for the German Oriental Society by W. Wright. Part. 1 — 12;
Leipzig 1864—92. A reprint appeai-ed in Cairo 2 vols. 1308.
al-'Ikd al-farid, by Ibn 'Ahd-rabhihi al-Andalusi (f 328 JE., beg.
28. March 860) 3 vols. Bulak 1293.
Kitab al-Muwassa of Abu 't-Tayyib Muliammed ibn Ishaq al-Wa§§d
(lived 860—938 A. D.) edited by B. Briinnoiv. Leyden 1886.
Ibn Arabschah (f 854 H., beg. 14. Febr. 1450) Fructus imperatorum
et jocatio ingeniosorum edidit G. G. Freytag. 2. vol. Bonnae
1832. 4". — Oriental editions with the title: Fakihat al-hulafa'
wa-mufakahat az-zurafa'.
Makamat badr az-zaman al-Hamaddnl (al-Hamadani, the predecessor
of Hariri died 398 H., beg. 17. Sept. 1007) with commentary by
Seih Muhammad Abdo. Beirut 1889. Other Makamat of Hama-
dani Constantinople 1298.
*Les seances de Hariri (al-Harlri f 516 H., beg. 12. March 1122),
avec un commentaire choisi pao Silvestre de Sacy; 1 6d. Paris
1822; 2. ed. par Reinaud et /. Verenbourg.^ 2 tom. Paris
1847—1853. — With the Commentary of as-Sariid (f 619 H.,
beg. 15. Feb. 1222) 2 vols. Bulak 1284. — Makamat (Vowelled
text) 2. Ed. Beyrouth 1886. — The Assemblies of Al-Hariri,
transl. &c. by Thomas Chenery. Vol I 1867. — Do. Arabic text
with English notes &c. by F. Steingass 1895.
*Kitab Adab al-Kdtib (proply. an aid to elegant writing) composed
by Muhamraed Abdallah ibn Muslim Ibn Kutaiba (f in the
2nd. half of the 3rd. Centy. of the Flight). Cairo 1 300.
Kitab al-matal as-sa ir fi^ 'adab al-katib was-sa'ir (Treatise on Style)
by Ibn al-Atlr al-Gazari (f 637 H., beg. 3. Aug. 1239) Cairo
1282.
Rasail (Letters) abi'1-Fadl badi' az-zaman al-Hamaddni (f 398 H.,
beg. 17. Sept. 1007). Constantinople 1298.
al-Maiddm (f 518 H., beg. 19. Feb. 1124) Magma' al-amtal. (Collec-
tion of Proverbs). 2 vols. Bulak 1284. — Arabum proverbia,
170 Literature N.
vocalibus instruxit, latine vertit, commentario illustravit G. Q.
Freytag I, II, III (a b.), Bonnae 1838—43.
fLes colliers d'or, allocutions morales de Zamakhschari (az-ZamahSari
t 538 H., beg. 16. July 1143) texte arabe suivi d'une traduction
frangaise et d'un commentaire philologique par C. Barbier de
Meynard. Paris 1876.
AWs hundert Spriiche arabisch und persisch paraphrasiert von Eeschid-
eddin Watwat, nebst einem doppelten Anhang arabischer Spriiche
herausgegeben, iibersetzt und mit Anmerkungen begleitet von
H. L. Fleischer, Leipzig 1837. 40.
Sirag al-muliik (Ethics and Anecdotes) composed by Abii Bekr Mu-
hammed at-Tartusl al-MalikI (f 520 H. , beg. 27. Jan. 1126).
Cairo 1289.
Muhadarat al- udaba wa-muhawarat as-§u'ara' wal-bulaga , a species
of Ethics with Anecdotes by ar-Ragib al-Isfahdnl (f in the
beginning of the 6*1^ centy. of the Flight). 2 vols. Cairo 1287. 40.
al-Mustatraf fl kull fann al-mustazraf, a species of anthological En-
cyclopaedia compiled by Ahmad al-IbUhi (lived about 800 H.)
2 vols. Cai,ro 1304. 1307.
Siret 'An^ar ibn Saddad, 32 vols. Cairo 1286. 1307. (another recension
10 vols. Beirut 1871). Cf. Antar, a Bedoueen romance. Trans-
lated from Arabic by T. Hamilton. Part. I, i — iv. London 1820.
Alf laila wa-laila. Tausend und eine Nacht arabisch. Nach einer
Handschrift aus Tunis herausg. von Maximilian Eabicht I — VIII;
fortges. von E. L. Fleischer IX— XII vol. Breslau 1825—43.
(This edition is not suitable for beginners in Arabic, as the
language is in many parts strongly influenced by the vulgar
tongue). — The Alif Laila or book of the thousand nights and
one night, published from an Egyptian Ms. by W. H. Macnaghten.
4 vols. Calcutta 1839—42. — 4 vols. Bulak 1279. — Original
in expurgated edition. Beyrout 1888 — 90. — Following the
earlier Bulak edition: The thousand and one nights commonly
called, in England, The Arabian nights' entertainments. Trans-
lated by W. Lane. 3 vol. London. 1 ed. 1841. Other editions
by Edw. Stanley Poole (the last 1882).
PART n.
PARADIGMS, CHRESTOMATHY
AND
GLOSSARY.
Socin, Arabic Grammar.'
PARADIGMATA.
TABULA
I.
Suffixa et Praefixa
in ilexione
verbi adhibita.
Persona
Numems
Perfectum
Imperfectum
3. masc.
sing.
;(i)
3. fern.
n
0 ^
s- a-)
2. masc.
»
^_
S (i)
2. fern.
n
^—
(^_) ^_ i- (i)
>
* *
1.
n
— t (1)
3. masc.
dual.
1 '
(1^) ^ji_s(;.)
3. fern.
n
iV
(I') Jl^5(i')
2.
n
a-
(1^) ^l_ 5 (i)
3. masc.
plur.
l^-L
(1,^) ^,JL S (i)
3. fern.
«
u—
u- '^ (i)
2. masc.
n
^-
(l-L) ;^,-L:(i-)
2. fem.
n
;,-^-(^-)
1.
n
LS_
— i d)
AT
4*
Paradigmata.
^^%
t
a
fee
CO
0.
a
>
•i-i
p.
o
o
o
P4
o
a w
d ;t d =4 =4
:v^ :^ ^^3
^4. ^4
:| % 4
!4 i^ i| i| i^
Paradigmata.
;3
•1-1
r i-
3v ,ry>-^.-0 ^-^
^.V ^;3 \ ;3 ^.D- VD* \*3 ^ ;'
o :ol o :o( o :« o :o( o :o( « :g( o :<
7^ ^^ ^7^ f:i, °i^ -J, "
^1 :^ ^5 1 "4 "i i "^
;| -:| ^,3 ;|,44-4
3n 3s 3^, V 5 ^^ ^ 3 '^
;3 ;i3 :3 .4 :j3 ,'i3 ^3 J
r3 '^
. masc.
. fern.
. masc.
. fem.
. masc.
. fem.
CO
Paradigmata.
TABULA III.
Paradigma flexionis
Passivi I verbi sani
Persona
Nume-
rus
Perfec-
turn
Imperfectum
Indicativus
Subjunc-
tivus
Apocopat.
3. masc.
sing.
J^-
J^xib
3. fern.
>5
0 -j- '
JjCiu
C ^ 0 J
2. masc.
n
JjCiiJt
o ^ 0 >
2. fern.
n
0 >
J^^^->
1 .".."i.'
1.
n
' r..!.
3. masc.
dual.
IxH
.i^
3. fern.
n
Lxlxi
- ^0 >
2.
J7
> 0 J
^Lxiij)
^ ^ ft >
3. masc.
plur.
1^-
' -">
3. fern.
51
- f.:.^
,j«*^^
2. masc.
«
> CI >
2. fern.
n
,jiixi'
^ f.-:.^/.
^^^j
1.
V)
^0 '
LULxi-
^^0 >
0 ^0>
Paradigmata.
S
CO
u
y-'i V% \12 :^
xn . en
^J OQ ■♦^ CO
c;) cS O c3
^ (X, -< P-(
QQ
8*
Paradigmata.
■I
i -^
B
^:o| i i4\ N:o( \:o| ^3 ;■?
^4 :^ :^ 4 :t 4 i| a
^4D r:3^ ^-p^ A:^ -^^-K r:^^ ^^^ '' '"^
^^ .A^ °^ „i3^ ^-^ ^i3. ^i2 S
'^'
^ »A
\-A 3 .X\ o-A' jr3v \-A « :■? 3 ;^ ^^
^ -^ ^ »^ ^ .^ «^ ^,J^:
cK
o
o
P-l
a
O
a.
V4
Ph
Paradigiiata.
1^
a
-■^ -4 4' "'-^
^ :.?
^-6 -A *-S crA -6 --6 '■•^A «=<
\:o| \ :-< \:cl \ O -^ :c< xX \ ;5 \ :ci
^-S :i3, -^ ,,D^ ^^ ;j3^ ,:j2, '••'-i
,^
?-
>
'T3
c
R
c
ra
c
R
r
o
CD
<JJ
-
a
1»
J3
S
a
CO
:3
:3
0)
'-+3
f~i .
:3
P^
t>
.*^
Oi^
c3
-*j
«+iH
--H
o
!^
O
o
u
O
03
cS
^
o
C3
O
5=
C«
CLh
CiH
^
l-H
Ph
\—»
10'
Paradigmata.
TABULA VI.
Paradigma flexionis
Activi I verbi mediae geminatae
Persona
Nume-
Perfec-
rus
tum
sing.
0 C^
v
^y.
«
^)yi
n
^;?
J 0^^
«
■^)f
dual.
9
r)
by-
n
plur.
'y
n
Cy/
n
o '«„
n
c^*;;*
T)
^y
Imperfectum
Indica-
tivus
Subjunc-
tivus
Apocopatus
3. masc.
3. fern.
2. masc.
2. fern.
1.
3. masc,
3. fern.
2.
3. masc.
3. fern.
2. masc.
2. fem.
1.
,= .-
« »-
7^
05 ^
y¥
7^
d -
c ' o "-
Paradigmata.
ir
TABULA Vn.
Paradigma flexionis
Passivi I yerbi mediae geminatae
Persona
Nume-
rus
Perfec-
tum
Imperfectum
Indicati-
vns
Subjunc-
tivus
Apocopatus
3. masc.
3. fern.
2. masc.
2. fem.
1.
3. masc.
3. fem.
2.
3. masc.
3. fem.
2. masc.
2. fem.
1-
sing.
a'
f
»
« a'
n
^ 0 '
n
^)f
V
-;/
dual.
9
n
^
"
piur.
'y
n
-0 '
« «
V
7^-
1°''
i 7^
'•I
1^
7^
S5- J 0^«>
f)7^
'/^
,«-'■'
7^;7^
12'
Paeadigmata.
>
'^ oi ^1 oi '^ \ «■ ol =^
s
0^
^til!%iii\viii;|
©
1— 1
>
CO
s
P
3ULA VllI
mediae
1—4
¥\— -^ 'J* \i\— - o •A— ~. •v n: •» 9 -—Oil
Si
a?
M
0
'a-
s
•^ P «= R -^ P « K
^ a . „ ^ £ a
S 1 1 .2 S 1 .2 §
5 ^ 11 3 5 ^ .2^ .^
o >:: So o t^ « .t^
^ §. ^ -^ ^ s. -^ ^
,^ a a ^^ ^^ a «« fl
Paradigmata.
13'
TABULA IX.
Paradi^ma formarum selectanim flexionis
verborum hamzatorum
Verbi pr.
Verbi sec.
i verbi tert.
I. Perf. Act.
?'
r*^' Cis'
Impf. »
., .*
rSi^:JS^
Imperat. «
r^i4^.
Par tic. n
i^-
Perf. Pass.
rJ
Imp erf. «
?^
II. Imperf. Act.
'•«'
7^^
Infin. »
7->
i^-s^*
IV. Perf. Act.
;^'"
Perf. Pass.
^''»
^i
VIIL Perf. Act.
^1 (ii\)
;.Ldt
Imperf. «
Perf. Pass.
^99 ^ ii
|42il
Imperf. «
^LiOi
14*
Paradigmata.
TABULA X.
Paradigma flexionis verborum
primae radicalis . et ^
Verbi pr. 5
Imperf. i
Verbi pr. ^
Imperf. a
Verbi pr. ^ sani
Verbi pr.
i5
I. Perf. Act.
J^5
e'^
C"^
wmO
Imperf. «
Imperat. «
a
e
(Jil, J^jl)
>^]
Imperf. Pass.
J-^^
9^9
Infinit.
0 0 ^^ ^
6 ^
G 0 ^
• 7^
IV. Perf. Act.
^,1
Imperf. n
5
> >
Partic. »
JLoy>
£i?^
0 >
Infinit.
jlTn.l
|''^l
t^l
;^!
mi, Perf. Act.
J«^'f
^JJl
cs
Imperf. »
r!
Perf. Pass.
j-^i
£tXjl
pri^^
>3i
X. Perf. Act.
ft
^j
Infinit.
6. - « .
?l -"1
^1 - -."t
Paradigmata.
15^
TABULA XI.
Paradigma ilexionis
Activi I yerbi mediae radicalis
Persona
Nume-
rus
Perfec-
tum
Imperfednm
Impera-
Indicati- i Subjunc-
Apocopa-
tivus
vus tivus
tus
3. masc.
sing.
Jii
7 9 ^
J^l
3. fern.
n
^'li
9 f^
0 > -»
2. masc.
n
oJU
0 >-
:^
2. fem.
n
0 >
U^^'
4y^i
iyo*
iy
1.
n
' 1"
0 >^
3. masc.
dual.
:5(U
U^^.
^^.!
^,k^.
3. fem.
n
UJU-
a^>^-
i(^-
i^-
2.
n
c)^^-
V^
V
3. masc.
plur.
yu-
1 1
y^
3. fem.
«
0 9^1 " '^ \
.-
2. masc.
n
9 0 9
U3^^
y^
> 9
2. fem.
n
iii;-
^
1.
n
Jy6
1 • ' '
0 >^
16*
Paradigmata.
TABULA XII.
Paradi^ma flexionis
Activi I verbi mediae radical]
s^
Persona
Nume-
rus
Perfec-
tum
Imperfectum
Impera-
Indicati- Subjunc-
vns tivus
Apocopa-
tus
tivns
3. masc.
sing.
\Lw
vAamO
0 ^
7^.
3. fern.
«
IOnLu;
9
^
"^
2. masc.
«
-- 0
9 ^
>^
„>;
0
7-
2. fern.
1.
n
0
J 0
157*^'
^^^^*
Y**''
c5/Vt;^
3. masc.
dual.
iji:
J'^.
Laju*.J
|*JUaO
3. fem.
2.
»
1;-
3. masc.
plur.
i,;u
tJ^T*^
'j^.
1 '
3. fem.
«
.-0 ^
2. masc.
2. fem.
55
n
9 "
— * —
— 0 "
iIj7"
1.
jj
Uww/
> -
;-^
0
r^
Paradigmata.
17'
TABULA XIII.
Paradigma flexionis
Passivi I verbi mediae radicalis . vel
Persona
Nume-
rus
Perfec-
tum
Imperfectum
Indicativus
Subjunc-
tivus
Apocopa-
tus
sing.
dual.
3. masc.
3. fern.
2. masc.
2. fern.
1.
3. masc.
3. fern.
2.
3. masc.
3. fern.
2. masc,
2. fem.
1. j » LLU
S o c i n , Arabic Gramiuar.*
plur.
^^.
^-»
JUi-
JUI
Jl4
Jlii-
JUi-
juf
yiii-
Jlii
JUu
B
4Ui-
■>,*
j^-i
' I"'
lyiis
Jjij
18'
Paradigmata.
X
X
a;
< ©
u
en
2
S
■S
u
a>
M a
:J -J ^1 :4 \1 ^^•3 rJ -.1 %j
^=D ^*^ .a=r^ ..J- ^4 -A .A i^
v;3
^ «-D cr=5
s
;i3
v«J — Dl ^ «-0^ '-i "-0 ^'-O ,-)=^
-■i -4 ^ „J; v4 -=D «4 <.-!^
J
J
v^
,:^> !]V)' ..A ,J M; -5 ^^ vl
n ''I '^ 'i 4= '^' -'i -
-a1
o
O)
©
^ 5r! 2
&. &^ 1h
Ph
o
o
Ph
►S Ph
P
P
Paradigmata.
19^
TABULA XV,
Paradigma llexionis
Activi I verbi ultimae . Jjti
Persona
Nume-j Perfec-
rus i turn
Imperfectum
Indica- Subjunc-
tivus tivus
Apoco-
patus
Imyera-
tivus
3. masc.
3. fern.
2. masc.
2. fern.
1.
3. masc.
3. fem.
2.
3. masc.
3. fem.
2. masc.
2. fem.
1.
sing.
9
5>^i ;>^
dual.
plur.
JO"
if"
'•I
eti
.Uj I I,
U^>*^'
♦ «V*J
B*
U^>*^'
> o »
, 0>
u^T'
C.I
20*
Paradigmata
TABULA XVI.
Paradigma flexionis
Activi I verbi ultimae ^ J^ii
Nume-
rus
Perfec-
tum
Imperfectum
T... „ , — _
Persona
Indica-
tivus
Subjunc-
tivus
Apoco-
patus
Imptra-
tivus
3. masc.
sing.
^)
0^
'?:
3. fern.
«
0 -'^
^?
c^'
2. masc.
ii
0 ^
>55/
0 ^
61
2. fern.
n
0 ^^
0 ^
0 ^
0 ^
J)\
1.
"
9 0^^
4
'4.
pi
3. masc.
dual.
LLok
o^'f-
'-i^yi
LLojj
3. fem.
n
lii^
J^f
^^T^
1- ".-:
2.
n
1 " .'.*'-'-
1' "••
LLojj'
^>'
^;j
3. masc.
plur.
'P;
- 9 o ^
1^^
3. fem.
55
G^^;
U^_^
^j^}^
2. masc.
n
5 0^^
^ ? 0 ^
1 '"'
1 '"'•
'r^;i
2. fem.
n
03 > 0^^
o^p"'
>I^*?r'■
'^f
^;j
1.
n
1 r"--
*5^^
- 0-
\ ii'
Paradigmata.
21*
TABULA XVII.
Paradigma flexionis
Activi I verbi ultimae . vel ^ Jjii
Nume-
rus
Perfec-
turn
Imperfectum
Persona
Indica-
tivus
Subjunc-
tivus
Apocopa-
tU8
Impera'
tivus
3. masc.
3. fern.
2. masc.
2. fern.
1.
3. masc.
3. fern.
2.
3. masc.
3. fem.
2. masc.
2. fem.
1.
sing.
n
n
n
dual.
n
n
plur.
«
n
V
n
• - -
9 -
a J
1'-."-
— 0 — 0 —
— 0 — 0 "
^ 0 — 0^
1 — 0 "
, - -0-
, - -0 '
Lcoo
,0-0-
- 0 - 0-
— 0 ,- 0 -^
— 0 —
0^0^
- 0 - 0 ^
,0^0-*
22^
Paradigmata.
CO
>
>
>
ad x-c j.^, ,:^ j.^^ \:rf ^ :Q , :c
'•s^ °.2^ 5c^ '■€ "-f \h 'h ^-f '
-0
t
>
^^^»^|-D.-^.:^^^j^i^
>
;jkv.^i^^:^..7-Vv|iii^
Perfectum Activi
Imperfectum »
Imperativus «
Participium «
Perfectum Passivi
Imperfectum w
Participium »
Infinitivus «
Paradigmata.
23*
^j, !B ^' ;i3 f^ ^=ii;§^ i;i 'B
\^\
*-+3
'oQ
o
09
<1
a
a
o
«2
CO
P
• »-<
a
c3
a
;3
a
o
a
.2
CD
>
o
Ut
U
O
o
^
o
c2i
a
S3
a
a
c3
P-l
o
a
C8
t— ;
24*
Paradigmata.
TABULA XVIII.
Paradigma flexionis
Passivi I verb
I ultimae ^
vel ^
Nume-
rus
Perfec-
tum
Imperfectum
Persona
Indicativus
Subjunc-
tivus
Apocopa-
tus
3. masc.
sing.
'^
^ " 9
3. fern.
V
" " .1
^ " 9
ijdJu
2. masc.
r»
— 0 >
^ O 9
^ "9
2. fern.
«
>
^ 0 -0 >
0 -^ «- >
9 .'
^ci
oi
1.
5)
^^•1
C5^-|
(ja-»!
3. masc.
dual.
LLai
1- - **'
Ludib
3. fem.
"
LxLt^'
^ ^ " '
2.
n
1-.'. ..'.
^ ^ o 9
1 - -. ?..'.
1 -•'*' '
U.OJL>
3. masc.
plur.
^ 0 ^^ 9
,0 ^''J
.0 - * '
3. fem.
«
^^'
^ 0 - Oj
^ 0 ^ 6 >
^ 0 ^ ^ J
2. masc.
11
c .. • ••
^ 0 ^ * >
," -. f.'
2. fem.
n
^ 0 - *■ '
1.
n
^ 9
^(1 9
1 -^'
Paradigmata.
25^
TABULA XX.
Paradigma flexionis nominis
a) generis masculini
a) triptoti
indeterminati
determinati
cum articulo
determinati in
statu construct
Sing. Norn.
(oL^*
' («^LoJ»
Gen.
1 "^ "
6 ^o^
>
1 fi "
Ace.
GLas
oLoi*
Dual. Nom.
^GLli-
jjULoiUl
ULls
Gen.-Acc.
"-1 = :.
""1 -'.?r
0 --, S^
Plur. Nom.
U^'^*
^^L^i
•.fLoj'
Gen.-Acc.
^^^
- 1 ''••?r
^Lli*
P) diptoti
Sing. Nom.
F
ji3i
F
Gen.
>^'"
^i3f
7^'
Ace.
^^i"
;^r
F
Dual. Nom.
u'}^*"
^i^^T
'7^[
Gen. Ace.
c^^>^:^i
(57^'
26*
Pabadigmata.
indeterminati
determinati
cum articulo
determinati in
statu constructc
Plur. Norn.
U^T^^'
.F
Gen.
Ace.
uij^'
^^Ift
^^T
TABULA XXI.
b) generis
feminini
a) triptoti
Sing. Nom.
kl'lf
xiLl
Gen.
X^H
o
xiLlJI
'is^S*^
Ace.
^LcLl
xiLlJI
k^Ll
Dual. Nom.
^jLc^Law
^JL^LIJ|
La^LIw
Gen.-
Ace.
'"''1 " iT
^iUv
Plur. Nom.
v:^L&Ll
4ULlJt
v:yLilIw
Gen.-
Ace.
^LiLlJI
v^LcLl
P) dipfofi
Sing. Nom.
2Lyo
ceterum idem
Gen.
Ace.
^
Paeadigmata. 27*
TABULA XXn.
a) generis masculini in desinentis.
. - ^ ^. determinati determinati in
indeterminati . , , ^
cum articulo statu constructo
Sing. Nom.-Gen. ^U*
^UJI
^^•
Ace. Ll^Li*
^Uji
'^"^
Dual. Norn. ,jLLo^'
LLoli
Gen. -Ace. ^jaavsU*
^^^liJl
0 " l"
Pliir. Nom. M^^*
^^lUi
Gen. -Ace. ^^^pli
^liJi
V5^^-
b) nominis in ^— , !— desinentis.
a) triptoti
Sing. Nom.- ] Tr « ' tt "'Ir ^T • '
Gen.-Acc.) ^5*^*^ cs^^*-^' i5*^»-^
Dual. Nom. ^jLAph,>o,/c ■jLgh,o»,!| LABh,vi;o
Gen.-Acc. ^jju^oh^^ v^j^o^^t ^^ ^xftia-ojo
Plur. Nom. ^^iLjk^ ^^oh^^.M ^Ik^
Gen.-Acc. ^^gh^n^ ^^d[i,^4..fl q^^^
28* Paradigmata.
. ,. determinati determinati in
mdeterminati ^. . , , . .
cum articulo statu constructo
Sing.Nom.- | Lik U^| Li^
Gen.-Acc.J
Dual.Nom. ij^T^ ^II-ojJI I^-ox
P) diptoti
Sing.Nom.- 1 -^. -^^ r, -3^.
id. Llit> UJtXJi v^<>
TABULA XXIII.
Paradigma nominis cum suffixis.
a) nominis masc. in singulari positi loLIai*; fem. ibxLi..
cum suffixo 1. pers. sing. (C?^^ ^®™^* cs^) •
» » 2. r ?) masc. dLjUai*
n » 2. n n fem. dbUki*
fl I) 3. n » masc. 2oLai> (gen. xjLoi*)
» » 3. 57 » fem. L^Uoi*
T) n 2. M dualis UJoLoi?
» « 3. » w Li.^lAai*(gen. Li^L.oi*)
n » 1. n pluralis LLLai'
» « 2. 55 » msc. IJoLoJ*
n 55 2. 55 55 fem. ^jGlAai*
» 55 3. 55 T) msc. i; I? 4 J-tV (gen. l.^Loi*)
» » 3. 51 5» fem. ^^Lai* (gen.^.^l.Aai*)
OF THK
Paradigmata. i "* -^ ^JgRSITY"
b) nominis in duali posih.
Nominativus cum suffixo l.pers. sing. ^^LSLki*
t) n r 2. w « msc. dLSLLi etc.
Gen.-Acc. » « 1. r - ^Lai*
n n » 2. n n mSC. dLoLoJ)
n » n 3. n » » 2UjLi^'
w n w 3. n n fem. LijoLfliJ etc.
c) nominis masculini in plurali positi.
Nominativus cum suffixo 1. pers. sing. (C^*-^*
n n n 2. n n mSC. cJoL^'etC.
Gen.-Acc. w « 1. n » .-jLo-s
n » n 2. n J) mSC. viJLoLoJ*
w '.) r 3. « w msc auoLoj
j> n n 3. » r fem. L^AjUaJ* etc
d) nominis feminini in plurali positi.
Nom.-Gen.-Acc cum suff. 1. pers. sing. ^'liLl
Nominativus n » 2. « » msc. db'LiCw
« » >j 3. n M n aG'LcLyw CtC.
Gen.-Acc » » 2. n » » s^JbLcLl
>) n n 3. w » n XjLtLw etC
EXERCISES AND TEXTS.
I.
A. EXERCISES IX READING.
\^Xh». Ja.l2.a». j.Sk\ I«jXawI tj'^^ v,_/JLfr L^:?)-* '«*-^^
U^)^ filj ^^ oLb li)«-Xjww iUwCio ,joLo ^>^* ^y^ J^-^^-J
SbL^P vilii^j (j^^iij) sLcw i^^Ji?* -,.^t> u^LIa^^
2. 3. s-.!^ u't^ ^->'^^. (•t^ )yi^ f}^ Vt**^ <-^^*
UoJ 5Vy^ 0•*-»i^X) J^wJ. ^aOs iU^ ^yy JC}yiJ 2SJI..KXS
o ,- ^ f^ ^ o- » ' I * f f ' G J < - o 5 I ^ - J ^ '.".*"
> O^ I - T ?
^ ^♦jJww lyuAw /*i5yj' f*^"^ Lj.tXi*'
^ i^^ 0^>o ItXo ^Lfca- Jolp ^k?
Exercises in reading. 31*
L.».<^j> «^jwwJ! isJiiJI ^.^^.AamO aI ^«X4JI <o^^v^> 5.
O-^ J ^ Ci ^ 9 w >o--
7«.--jo^ 's"^ ^ a"*'-' J"""
O^O-O Jj- a** ^^ ^ ^ ^(fC ■£■ f f 9 ^«">o
_^ a _^ o-o^
U4>^ iU^^ c5t>Jfi Sc>Uo JJ" 1*-^]^ <J-^^ e^-V^*^^ ^- ^•
(V^-oU ,j-»^yi v^!^A*J! ^oJ^ '^ya^ ^ (5r^
^.^ lyLUS-l ii-U^* ^^t^ xXS^^I J^AA*/| (c-^AAj]
32 Exercises and texts.
B. EXERCISES ON THE ETYMOLOGY.
16-29. ^^jA-o^ ^T**""* ij-^^ U7^^ V)^ V'^'^^l r^
J^ /*^-^i v-^^J^I tX^oLw (3JJajt^ «:pJa^| ^^s^Xw!^
c^Ajl ^^^«^Jo /^^y^ J»^*A^! Jy^y^* ^"^^^ r*^^ J^^
^ Jyi\ iwJvia^l yo^ /p^^^ Vt^* J"^
30-33. ft^y^ *JtXJiJ>»^ j^^www^^*.! >wA^>-> v.:>iS»»wi:».! LM-Xi*. loyj^
L5x;>! ^\jLsd^^^ ^bJiX^i d^^ J^^-^ /P^l ^y*-^pt 0)r
Cyw^Js! ,^'^-^AJ j^'wO (^JjlHI jvA>JO }y^.£^yJl yJi^'J
OUCi^Xaj ci^wAA^ift.! ^w^.A/Xo v^>JL) ^^^^J v«^>L.SX/J
v::a<Lwu>..^ !».aaJ!^ LijtAAi/oj ^i2J.Av.J) |V^v^ ucXaamI p-'y^.
L^5o LwAa.^1^ l.tXLlo ^jAj Ucryi I^Aw«J| ^^4.X.tt
. Nvi*- i^^-^**^ iXJ'vJ y«y^*0 ^^^AJ UiA.AA.^1 ^^«.».^,? Ljt>Js
{•kA^! (jSy*^. '^7^ (jdiiAj i^Aiyj* |VA4.^J& ^viiJ c:aaaaa«j
^ 4>tX.O.J* yAXM^ t:yOjwW *.^ Jo^
34-36 ^^
Exercises on the etymology. 33*
LaaJLXjI^ j-^ .J jj*i4>uLwwO <X^\J6 ^jMoJS }^yjo (>J U 37-38
,j».gJ5».«J CP^. ^-*4^ '^^ i^-'^^ ^T^^' ft^\yX^
(^^^.A*AA^* !«xU *j| rvJ^Jb wO UwCi! *jij ^^ijyi^ 41-44.
!«»Lo! yjJt^, ^^ ^^-fi^ Sr*-* U^T^^ 5^-^'^^V. ^^>^^J
sLg-o Ljl^I OC^.jJ j^ltXjO JjJ Ujxikt L»A.fta>
j- 'o o- >^ ^ o JO s^ •''iT? '^' " ° " ""I"''*
dLj' LU^ |W 1*^LoJo (V^'rt^ O^JJ^f i>^AXywO lC.>sL^j
!^^»-fr ;^(>JLo o^AAJ {JOjo\ o^tXi o^x-wu/jI ^c4^. 45-48.
^>xo jj^-*^^ y^yL^y y^yKJM} y^jX^y ^^aaj (^^^.aaju
^ v:>Ji> ^:i^»^*.j [VA*o ^<»^^1 Sr'^'^; ^^i^;'^' ^v°;j
Socin, Arabic Grammar.* C
60
34* Exercises and texts.
49. jj^jj Ujc^ cyJij*| {^y^yri ^^^^^ <5y^ ^^^^^^ 1*^.
^ "^^^ is^ '^; ' >^' o-"/
53. S..4JU ^ 4^*^H^. (*^ ^-*-i^' (*"§^7^* '-S-^^^ sLUji^
^ U^^^Lb (j^'tX^ (j^LU-Lb
-61. ^L:^x/o y.«dX^ io%AA^ joXmjo ^ J^ i\x3yj0 |*(>^.^
»%-^Lft^ J<4-^ ^\jjO «iSVj2-«a/0 >»AXX> Ji,Lj >*t^^ ^i/j-^
JUjIaamI oLmaXJJ P''»"^V^' 'T"^^ [^•^^' )^^-i-^|. '^^•-^^^^^^^
f^ tXiLa;:/? ^-A^yii* J^-^*x>
^-71. Jo*./o V^ VH^^^J r' (J^-Ji^ ;ji>f <i/L\jajf jvww
y^y^ iX^vj:^ (j*-*^.! ^^^ cH ' y^' Y^-**^ o«Jyo
G^isj G,- , G^-- fr"' 2^1 ^"J T"?"* ^^i"' i "^
cXaJOo ^v.a*oJ^ J^"^^ Lb-yo ;^A4^ ^^-^i. vo'7^* S«XfX>
Go^ Go^ S o- G o^ ^,. , Q , Q J- o 6--
^^-^ Of ^ " G.-'J Gs-'j G " G^" G|^ G J
iiLcLbl^ ^>^LaJ ^^'^ y^^«^ H.^ )^-^^^i ri^ (HS^*^
o«i^ -.yuo v:>-y> ;'«^'*-<' cN-V-^^ r^^T^* xJuU.%«j
G -- G.^^- 9 > G /- 0 5 G o-^ ^l"-."! ^ "-
Exercises on the syntax. 35
jjLc iXxXjQ ^^xLft/) ELUi'l ^J^^♦^ ^c-*^-^ ^^^ (5^^^
^i t<^) B^Lft:^ ^vAoJ, vCtX>o ^JkJuLwww^ ^^JJ li]i>\Juo
^ .tX^ ,5-4^ ^^ CS-S"^^^ ^^^♦^^^ ^5*^*^
^^ j^Lw^.^ uU-£ J'*^^ L^^5^ e^W.<^' ^^^"^ ^^* ^^'
iLuAx! J^J i>lMJm> v«ft^P >^'^' ^"^ lJ'^ xX^]
(^^bLw aL^I ^bJJl v.::OsLIfc v.li> J^' J'-S^ s*-^^
9 > ''f s.^o^ G^ 5"' 9 *'. 9 ^j 'kw^-' ®iT "?
^j«wJ! |»Usj! (J'y^ i^y f*^ ^>-^*^ viUUjo sUax>!
9,. 9*> s^, 9> ^«>rr- ®»r«f ' r^
' »- - l^»^^ ®l^ ' .-- i ,^ - 9o, ^^ ff^tTxr -
9, rr^ ^ » s ^, ^
C. EXERCISES ON THE SYNTAX.
cW J^l^ 4^ JL^pi ij-^^^ ^^^^ i iLlJI
1 § 130. 2 § 99c.
36 Exercises axd texts.
^ ^jjjojU ^ItX^l^hJ^ 4|e ^s^Lv^l^ ^1 iLol ^si
abx^AJI ciJyjl ^ ^LftXj| oL§^ xLLc LT^r*^ ^r^'^^'"?
^jLkJLwiil (j-« ^W <^^l ^^ ^^iU^ 'iyMi^ vi>^"
diyu ^^^j diUJ! bl jyw |W x-AA^ ^L^-^i
1 §110. 149. 2 § 136c 2. 3 §124. 4 § ll3b. 5 §ii8c. 6 § 137 d.- j
7 § 121a. 8 § 101b. 9 § 113d. 10 §108. 11 § 126. 12 § 109. 13 § HO. ^
14 § 92b. 15 § 113a. 16 §141. i7 § 108. 18 § ef 2. i9 § 98ef. 20 § 116.
Exercises on the syntax. 37*
^o ^iiil^ (c^^ ^^'^■=^ 7^^ <J^^^^ \'^^^
__ 55 «o
ju^^ 1;-^ <^^^^^ l5; <J*«^^ iujVo Jouju! 1^^ "•
u-'; ^c5^ ^ ^ r^ 7^'^ »7^ (^ ^ ^^
G * J *| ' 5*''' *? 0_^0«O (I ^ , ^O-O^ y ^o-<o ^o ^
^u:=> dyjt # coy t y*s. ^ ^is^^ 5 ;'^' oy
■ixkj\ % ^U\ |vOi ^iit |.Uisi s^yi >_^ip;
1 § 147 a, 148 b note. 2 § 99 a, cf. note b. 3 § 1
23,
38 Exercises and texts.
' " f^ -r 5 '' 0^^ >
? . '- »9'
i^y S^ dUi ^ ^l'''^ ^LS^' ^J'i i ^^i"
» § 134. 2 § 152.
Exercises on the syntax.
39*
i^yJu] ^ ^ajLuo J^vi! iU)tXi* l^^r^' (•U-J
Jai^JLi 1,^<vJUJo jjJjyi^ L^Ui'l sLa^Jl^ ^^'
x^l ^j^ 'i^^v^ ^^ J^*^ ^ ^JLfti »v4.Aj JuLww
G.J
ijMjci^o. ^u^(> &Loj'^ aXmmJ! ^9^ ^^"^I ^'^LS' |0^
!.- I-' "ilC. ^ *f it- ' "At '"- CJ -"x-
io^Lxx) jLs ^ v^^^wxiaJ!^ ^i'^-H^i ;5y^. ^ 4^ ^r^
1 § 131. 2 § 101 a note. 3 § 152. 4 § ggd. 5 § 132.
6 § 144. 7 § 141.
100.
40 Exercises and texts.
2U2».L.O-« '^VS?? >lj-COyi HwwLjuo vI^aa:^ ,jI jjLLo^
j^^ ^ ^^^^ ^-i^^ ^^^^ 3 vd)JN3 ^ »La-f
^ ^^t aL»-fti 8>«oj J^Y-^i /^-y^. ;J^ ^-^^ ^T**'^
,j»^^ «JJ! ^4> ^ jv5cXO-5^ wAyJL^Jl^ ^-♦ii-f 3
1 § 151. 2 § 113b. 3 § 157.
Exercises on the syntax. 41*
of- oj-'o-r"^*- o oj-^ T- " '"?■' " ' -^ ** •
O J o . " ' o -^
Ur ^M ^IjJl ^ ^J-V^pt ;^l U I^Li* 154 ff.
H " ^1 ""^{f I - Of. O or. ,w- O J ^ " * -
,^^o-o C5^ .,.^-„:f-o'<o ^ J, ^o«o ' o ^ " ^1 ''
ULcpl Jly'b xlSlwL JjL> (^iXJI ^LUJ! Jiio
;^jJI i^l^b iOAJ ^ia-w ^j-daj ^tXJ! J1A4J
xj viLob Juiii <^M^ ji.s^Luo 1^1 ]|^ e)^j^
42 Exercises and texts
i^a ^ ^
^S-^ i 9 i^^
'Of- CI o_^
158 flF. (3JtX-o oiJI ^aX^uao ^. ItX^I. l^tXfi^ J.AA^i* ^
Exercises on the syntax. 43*
..... . ^^ ^ .. ^
f6|^ &AX4-0 J^LiJLi pilx^l J^l 16^ J^y! JLs
9^0^^
JJJlI! y-v^^ J'-^ [•La^ J^ 4Jf ^y*^ Vr*^.^
l^-^U**^!^ (JilwiJI jl^ jvXjJo!^ jvXpy:^^ ly^^Li
(v4^' cM^ ^^ ^6^^ ^i^i^; V^^^ 4 ^^^^
44 Exercises and texts.
y^i^XuM^J^Mj * *.A.^^ (.^I«K^I v.:>JLX£« ^L^mw-JI i«jt«.j|
^ ^4r^^^ ^^^ ij^^ ^"^^ J^tXi* jjl (^ viL
JJCP (V^A-oly^ (?^^y; l*-f^y ^ iJ'-Vti^^' ^>^
^5SS\i ^\^ Lo aJJI*.i v,J-l^yi (vS't^LL *j J^r?. J'^
,^^ xjLb-l^ syb JLfti ^iLo |v5\.a^L ^^ LLw
[tXi5 ^5^1^ ;5<^'^^ ^5tX^I ^jJyij J' # ^W
jJiJ J^^ aJuT iQ ^llj ji^^ xiif tijc^i
Exercises ox the syntax. 45''
^^ ^:i>tX.5u« xaxjjLw owajIj. ^UL.wA^ ooLb xiLLi*.
— ..J d*J UJ ^ iU>o j^^AaJI ^r'vAJ^ aU^ij ouol4>«
"T" n't T " "'1^1 1 ® ' " ^^^
'- « *:. J,
o ' " - " :; o
aLXxAJ'! jv^^^l ,j«« v:>J^ML.^Luwl Ui (jwUJI j^ Jol
,- o -r ^ ^ ^
'Jo ^^ O -SJ , > o ^ o
^|w£:^l JjtS? ;^^.XibX> (^tX:^ [•^^^ &Lftiil u4jU
46* Exercises a^d texts.
^1 ^;C^ oJUil ^LX3 L^^l (JwLu; ^ ^1<
i^Lxi ^4^:^ r-^-*-? ^y^l u^-*^ ^^^) ^'-^
^L=>-N J^ LgjCjLo*i ^*^.«m:SV^ &J 2L>^L:^ 2U:eLs? S^Lo.J I
J^Lc J^4> ^ »w&.^l sU ,^^ v'^-*^* ^-^^ LIjjJI
LyA-UUwuo SLX:^*i »-^ iO<j\ ^^s L-jUaii^! j^ ^♦xJ
S ^Ls JyCftl aJ JLfti (3^uJl v.:ijCv oJ^t>
^^«o J^4^ ^io ^3:?yi' ^-«4^ *^^^^ viL^lj (^^yi*
Exercises on the syntax. 47"^
lo aJU^ ^^)^) ^^))^ '-'4*^ ^yX^\ {JOJU JU
> ,.- »
"--^oJE J
*L^^ aLU-2^ (jjw Jou I auJI ^^.-TS^vJ n-^^3. xfti^v I
JU \b UJ JU ^t>;!^l i| JU sjuaiwj ^J v^lp!
>>-Laj Ux aJlIwI U^La. U^.;ys^ Lg-? (j^ (5^*^
^,>^|J| aJ JUi *ljiia-LI 'iyj^^S Juii* ^U ^ci^-^^
clJiJ I6| JU 1^ Li^ JU S^Li viJLllI^ J J^^
48*
Exercises and texts.
II.
AEABIC PROSE EXTRACTS.
Li^ LI3^xx) L^^t> t—is^ \^\ykl\ p^^U ^yr-'U
^1 ^A^tXiJI vilij ijjct jj^ J4>-; J^-i^*! <^i ^' t4-^
^iiJl L§j| id J Li* (W XJ V^)^ |vl-^ id ^v^
JUi ltX5& ^2%^. ^^ >iU s^gJc U^ Ui^A/) dKI j^j[
jj^^ 2Uj<>i.M » jje Ui o-U UXI ^1^ DL^tX4Jt ^
^xi a* L^KIw. •L-?>1^ »-*.j(>.xj »tX^ JLfti 1.^.^5 Uw
Arabic prose extracts. 49*
LgJuo v^ii:! ^^ UlLs^ L^ J^^i ^« Li-^^ L^^
aXr^ jlijwgJI L^ j^^JuCiLi R:$!o!> N-A-^isI ^. x^LLo
C»o >^^o-c ww.-e ^ ^ ^ \
^s. jLitX^M Ow.»ajli J^ljJf >4^l c)w>Li^r
2^,',.^ ^ul^} ijU iui XAJcXiJI ooLr"! t^Lix^M
(XJuo dU-Lb ^ ^-^^ oU^ ^^jI ULfti id J^.N. Jo
Socin, Arabic Grammar.- D
V
50 Exercises aistd texts.
^^- jTi^i £i>i^ £;yt ^yi^ u^i^ifi; j^w
jja^i iai- lylris |j ^^1 L^yi^ j/ut oL^
x^ ^^aIJ jL^tX^il ^<^!^ (j^-l dU/j ^.liUj iol^l
ullf lyti^ ^1 J^; J^* J^ U^r^' \:iOt4.:5^l
" ^- M ' »" I ' ^ """ "^ *• I ""f^ ' ' * "'^ * r "
Arabic prose extracts. 51*
X-Ul J^-w'^ /*-^ U^"T^* /*^Vt^ 5't>ljt4J 5^* jv^LjC (c^
^Lo"^ StXJLfc 0.3I5' ^^1 >*^t^yt '^Y^ ^^vi v^ H^^
ii/eU^ 5^y^ oui^-CifLC Jls. nULII oLj ,J^ l«-Ri^
J^-wwN tr-y^ l*iwOj!. tX^I ^LxJ! !j^ ^^ Lo ULfti
^.♦fljo Jkjj iu! (jioJJ o^i^*^ ^^.<^-^^ vij L^.Xo xJJI
aJJl J%^; JLi* i^i UjU iLsL-w 2UloI. i^v^ i^t
,jjLj «-Lii x^A^^i fvJ^^' cy«^LJLs xijlwww LLft5^l [*-g^M
JLi* N^-o-Uil xixiil y^j^Li ^Y-^^ jj^ (5^^
J^N ^^ uLL^ v:iA«\jf. LcoLs*. •bj> I ^^) ^«ii^M ^
D*
52 Exercises and texts^
^aJ ^IUI^ ^lo^ 5tU5 ^! ^ya^JI J^ x^ ^*^
N^.«aA4J! xi JLfti xaJ| aij>w.<d^li SsLd^^Lj ^w/oU Rax I
? . - -1. -- . ^0 -
vAxI L> JLfti L-A-w L^-^ [W^* S^^ L^ L^:^^li iLyol
^^^ &3 I^ JU Rax! ^-aaJ ^J^ ooII (JjOx^I -^
dlAJuLx Ui JU !il JU (V^t-?;^ ^^y"^^ d (^
^ — I
, C'O ? . -'^
|V-§JUxi| c^AAJ ^^ xii;^li XAi ^j,A^i-ww»-«JI !^-«JJi? Uo
&Jt>Lfc XaAJ RxjUI J,I -.^U^i ,.wAAX)^| wAxI Lj JLfti
Jf«-cl wCt Jl^xl A-g-i v.::/jb' t\i ^A/ot ^AJ ^U
iUwIs «is [V-> JLcLaw ^*.«C1A4JI ,W\.JbLi Jli j^A^A^4jl.
I — ^- . " - « " " * iT "f I " ^ ' I" "ri""
Uo. (V<Xo tXi jll •^A-Cw.jf ,^J Uo ^-^r) V. JvJ*^
T.. I*- -!"" ''fvf* 1"^-- I-- "7 T" * "
J.AS L^nfr •.AJtJ ^j! jJj^ U.**^ Uc. ^^c^ ^^y^ V^
1^ "1^ ""''Ti''.. "I" "^ n i"-' fi"*'. '"-
L> ^A^L^ |V*i JLr ie^La». -^ ^^ J^ J« rv-J &a£
Arabic prose extracts. 53*
4 t5*^ (J^ U^^ C5^ (^^-f^" ^ ^J^^y^^ ;^'
^ ^j.; I u ^ ill Ji Si ^jJr Jji^ v^Jt
j^ 5 ^ ^ ^ ' o-c '' ^ > ^ o — o-* ^ Ct ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ jj, ,o-o ^
^^xa«« »w5^j (^4-^^ JWi <X=-i xjf^ ^w^L^ aGb* ^'U
&J JUii ScXj ^^ >tib ^jf ,^ Li«^* ^-^y^ WtX? ^
>«^o.AiJ! 2J JUi XA.M L^i^^t ;^>-2»>l O^I I au^U.
j^^»AA/c •-♦.;! vA/ol L> ,^ JLs cN^yc ^j..^ v.:>Ajti Lo (^^ Uo
d^^ ^i dLo^^ xAjUaj ^ J^-4^ aJLT Ijoc ^1
^A^JI ItXsi J.X*^ oolv L.(0 Jyb 5j5j wAi". 2CU
54* Exercises and texts.
j^lJ^LhA*;*! X4-bix> jjD^ «jo! Jou ^Juo ^j^JijI
5^-- ^ ^— ''' O^*"*^ >O^0,<j__ >^c.«o jO^ ^"0-^ f 9 ^ Cj
&X/0 ^^ xiw*4.JI^ JJiaJI^ aUX^I i^Lil. iulia-Lww
;^f^ s^a5 jj! ;2i at^i^i> ^^ ^•♦^^ U** -5 ^tX:^ '
l^"/^ XJis^Uo j| |li;.£^tX^. ijli!^!/ I^^^L^^'i" ^^
XXlL+^il viLlj xJ^rL l^v^ u^r^^ ^I^f <i^W u5*)'
ZjuS Li-Li L^aa:^. ^^ viULiiJI v*^. LixtXi' fvis-c^
sLILi *^-^ ^^ iiX&Lb Jl^ S^tX^ L/')^ ^4^ "ii '
4Xa>0.^ U^T^^ viLL/0. JoLj (joJ ^ii /c^^ rtXAX**;^!
(j^ ^-f ;j^ <>^^ u^;*^ u^;' ^i ^'-^ i^-' ^^^'
^^o ^! Jot^ J^Lj ;ji.^! jl^ ^^ jvJ iXA^ii J^'
Arabic prose extracts. 55*
jvIa- 5"^^'^ lO^ U^*?:? ''^♦^ 2U-L& uyJJLwU JjCal
aul.^?! «4-^tr XJuO s^'vJ ^tVJ! «Jy^^ 3 ^4XJL^-u;J)|
"^-x c5 ', -x r « >l ^ > >a -- > ' c5 ^ - > ' ^ -;,^
i-fi3'^ |V-> v^5»k> ^j^ Sr'^?'^^* «i ^^5"^^^ 5yax:skj s^jLixi
^J> f*-^-^5 (^y*'^ J^ cMi^ eUXil wCi.Ji/0 Li JLfti
tX^i. J.5^ l»Liii lh&!i> xxliJJj oyjw R^U^ ij>^
56* Exercises and texts.
!^aJ<> |»^JI ,^-^^i (^4"-^ T-y*"''^ '^•^^v*-^ (•^-^•^^ ^>-^^'
dLj*U.AJ« oi^j* ^ vii.i*«^ ojb' tXi' JUii ^^S *li'^
tXi ^^y^ ^A,oLi L-ftA^fcA-5 JJ ^J*La^ lJ*V 'TT^*
^SSXjh ^ji5^ W^^Ow^ vilj'«-o ^jl^ tXi' J Lai v^i |»l5j
' lAJiiajt. xj^Xlw.j ncNjXa^NI US'*.^ JU"i ^1 ^Ls^
III.
TEANSLATION INTO ARABIC.
Note. The order of the words in the following sentences
has been adapted, so far as possible, to that required by the
Arabic translation. In addition, however, the student must bear
especially in mind the difference of order (§§ 135, 139 — 142)
which marks the cardinal distinction between verbal and nominal
sentences (§ 139 note). The square brackets enclose words
which in translation should be omitted, while those in curved
brackets give the form of the sentence required by the Arabic
idiom. — Past and perfect tenses are generally to be rendered
by the Arabic perfect, present and future tenses by the Arabic
imperf. The extensive use of the (generic) article in Arabic is
to be noted. All nouns not in the construct state should have
the (definite) article prefixed unless qualified in English by an
indefinite article. — So far as lexical the footnotes to the exer-
cises are only Supplementary to the Glossary. It is, for example,
only in special or exceptional cases that "oh" is to be rendered
by l^jj instead of by U, and the notes draw attention to such
cases. — The apology for violence done to the Queen's English,
in the interests of the learner, may be repeated from the first
edition, from which the following is in the main reprinted.
58 Translation into Arabic, a.
A. Nominal Sentences. ^
1. The glory of the man [is] his sons, and the
solicitude of the man [is] his dwelling and his neigh-
bour.— 2. The elegance of the man [lies] in his tongue,
and the elegance of the woman in her understanding. —
3. The liberal [man is] related to God. — 4. The worst
(of) repentance [is] at the day 2 of resurrection. — 5. The
love of the world [is] the beginning of every sin. — 6. The
promise of the king [is] a security. — 7. The learned
[men are] the heirs of the prophets. — 8. Wisdom [is]
for the character 3 like medicine for the body. 3 — 9. The
world [is] the prison of the believer and the paradise
of the unbeliever. — 10. Contentment [is a part] of^
the nature 3 of the domestic animals. — 11. The malady
of covetousness has no (not is s for it a) cure; and the
disease of ignorance has no (not is for it a) physician. —
12. The nutriment of the body^ [is] (the) beverages
and (the) viands, and the nutriment of the under-
§§ 139 ff. 2 § 113 (J. 3 plur. 4 ^^ 5 § 50.
Translation into Arabic, b. 59*
standing [is] wisdom and learning. — 13. Money has
(to money [is]) a difficult entrance and an easy exit. —
14. Yerily i God [is] forgiving and 2 compassionate. —
15. Yerily ye^ [are] in a manifest error. — 16. The
nobles of-* Pharaoh's folk said^, "Yerily this [is] surely 6
a learned enchanter". — 17. Yerily in that*^ [lies] surely
an example for the unbelievers. — 18. Flight in its
[proper] time [is] better than endurance in its wrong
time (in another than its [proper] time). — 19. There
is no (nots [is there]) strength and no (nots) power
except with 9 God, the High and 10 Mighty [One]. —
20. The best of gifts [is] understanding, and the worst
of misfortunes [is] ignorance. —
B. The Strong Verb.
21. Jonah went out from the whale's belly. —
22. Zaid killed Muhammed. — 23. They gave>5 (beat)
Omar a violent beating ^i. — 24. The direction of prayer
was shifted 12 from Jerusalem to Mecca. — 25. God
knoweth (knowing) what 1 3 ye are doing. — 26. Yerily'
God provides for every one his sufficiency. — 27. Learning
and money [they] cover up ^^ every fault, and poverty
1 § 147 a. 2 § 149. 3 suffix. 4 J^. 5 perf. sing. § 136.
6 §147 J. "§147 0. 8 §111. 9^. 10 § 122. 11 § 109. I2§i36fe.
13 l^, § 56 note a. 1^ dual. §"l36 d. is § 137 h.
60* Translation into Arabic, b.
and ignorance [they] uncover i every fault. — 28. They
took him away and put him in the bottom of the
well. — 29. The brothers of Joseph returned 2 to their
father. — 30. "Why hast thou 3 not^ washed thy shirt?
— -31. The most 5 of mankind are not^ grateful 2. —
32. They? believe not 8 in 9 the future life.— 33. We
made heaven [to be] a [well-]preserved roof. — 34. Do
not do good out of ^^ hypocrisy, and do not leave off
[doing] it out of 10 modesty. —
35. Why do ye render waste the cultivated coun-
tries ? — 36. Thereupon we sent Moses and his brother
Aaron with our signs to Pharaoh and his nobles; then
they declared the two of them 11 to be liars. — 37. The
angels said 12, "0 Mary! be obedient to thy Lord and
"prostrate thyself; verily 1 3 Qod giveth thee glad
"tidings of a word from 1^ him; and he ^^ [is on.e] ofi^
"those 16 who are placed near [to God], and he shall
"talk to mankind in the cradle!" — 38. It is not seemly
to hurry (not is good the hurrying), except in the
marrying of a i? daughter, and the burying of a i? dead
[man], and the entertaining of a is guest. — 39. Glorify i^
God in the early morning 20 and [late] in the evening 20.
^ 1 dual. § 136 d. 2 piur. 3 fem. * ^ § 101 c. 5 sing. § 127.
6 "5. " pronoun. 8 part. 9 <^>. lo § us d. n suffix in the
dual. 12 § 136 Z,. 13 § 147 a. ^ pronoun. 15 ^. 1 6 part.
17 § 118c. i^ § 118c. la.plur. 20 indeterm. accus. § 113a.
i
TrANSLATIOX into ARABIC, B. 61*
40. Verily the hypocrite has (to the hyp. [belong])
three characteristics; his tongue contradicts his heart,
and his speech his action, and his exterior his in-
terior.— 41. The men of his people used to sit with
himi on account of his learning. — 42. Yerily the
holy war [is] incumbent 2 on you. — 43. The vehemence-
of a (the) man 3 [is what] causes him to perish^. —
44. The head of al-Husain the son of Ali was brought
into the city^ of Damascus ^ and was placed before
Yazid. — 45. Yerily we" have become Muslims, so 8
become Muslims ye 9 [also]! — 46. Do not talk to one
another with disgraceful talk! — 47. Every thing has
(to every thing [belongs]) an indication; and the in-
dication of understanding [is] reflection, and the in-
dication of reflection [is] being silent. — 48. We started
off towards Bagdad to bring an action against one
another 10 before ^ its 12 governor. — 49. The most ex-
cellent [kind] of praise [is], "[there is] no i3 god ex-
cept God!" and the most excellent of [good] works
[are] the fivei^ prayers; and the most excellent [kind]
of character [is] (the) being humble. — 50. They, fought
with one another four days 1 5, then the Byzantines
1 vi3>^ sing., then subject, then the verb in the plur.cf. §§89 notee; .
136 d. 2 part, 'a 2^. 4 nominal sent. § 139 fZ a. 5 § 107. 6 § 128.
7 § 96 d. 8 J^. 9 pronoun. 10 part. § mb. ^ (j,\. 12 § 72.
13 § 111. 1* masc. determ. after the noun, § 92 a. ^s § 113 a.
b
62* Translation into Arabic, b.
were routed'. — 51. What is disliked in 2 the king [is]
the being devoted to (the) pleasures, and the hearing
of (the) songs and the spending of (the) time therewith
(with that). — 52. They said^ "0 our father! verily we 3
"went away, running races -*, and left Joseph with^
"our baggage; then the wolf ate him". — 53. Observe
what [is] in the heart of thy brother by means of his
eye, for^ the eye [is] the title-page of the heart! —
54. In the fourth year from the birth of Muhammed
the [two] angels ' cut open 8 his belly and extracted ^
his heart; then they cut it 9 [his heart] open and
extracted 9 from it a black clot of blood; thereupon
they washed 9 his heart and his belly with snow. —
55. They conversed 10 about the case of the Apostle. —
56. Yerily God hath (to God [are]) n servants
whom 12 he distinguishes (he distinguishes them)
with his favours. — 57. Restrain thyself from meatus
which 1^ causes thee to acquire an indigestion, and [from]
an action which i^ occasions thee regret i^ — 58. Thou
hast fallen in love '^ with a girl, a possessor of beauty i^
and elegance ^\ — 59. Muhammed said, "Help thy brother,
"[whether he be] doing wrong i' or wronged i^!" They
» fern. sing. 2 J. 3 §96 f^. 4imperf.inerely,§ 157 b. ^ J^^ with gen.
6^. 7 dual. Ssfng. §136a. 9 dual § 136 d lo § 137 «. ii§l47a.
12 without relative particle § 155. ^3 indeterm. 1* without rela-
tive particle § 155. »» indet. is § 98 e. i^ § m b.
Translation into Arabic, c. 63*
asked, "0 Apostle of God! how shall we help him,
"[if he be] doing wrong i?" He said, "By restraining
"him from doing wrong!" — 60. Do not turn away 2 a
beggar! — 61. A man (servant) does not believe, until
he love for his neighbour (brother) what 3 he loves for
himself. —
C. The Weak Verb.
62. A 'poor [man] begged of me, so I gave him
[two] pieces of money*. — 63. Be mindful of death, for
he 5 takes hold of your forelocks; if 6 ye fly from him,
he overtakes you, and if 6 ye stay, he seizes you. —
64. Music [is] like the spirit and wine [is] like the
body; then through their 7 coming together is born
joy. — 65. The Apostle used to^ preach to his com-
panions and to exhort them and to teach them the
beauties of character 9. — 66. Verily 10 our [true] friends
will 1 1 entrust to us their secrets. — 67. The lust 12 of the
world entails care and sorrow, and abstinence with
regard to it restores the heart and the body. — 68. Moses
said, "I have brought '^ you an evidence from your
"Lord; so let go i-* along with me the Sons of Israeli"
— 69. Depend on the Living [one], who does not die!
1 § 113 ^>. 2 contracted § 36. 3 l^ § 156 and note a. * dual.
5 pronoun with foil. part. 6 § 159. 7 dual-suffix. 8 see p. 61*
note 1. 9pl. determ. »o§ 147 a. ii^§99a. 12 (3. >3§98e. m sing.
64* Translation into Arabic, c.
— 70. He pleases me, who makes poetry to i show his
education, not to ^ make gain, and applies himself to
singing to i enjoy himself, not to ^ seek for himself [reward].
— 71. Demand help of the good (people2 of the good),
and of those that act well (and of the acting well). —
72. Choose 3 whichever of the pages thou wilt! —
73. Supplicate much (make much the supplicating),
for thou 4 dost not know when 5 answer 6 will he given
thee! — 74. Restrain your tongues and dower your
glances and guard your continence! —
75. A (the) kingdom is made flourishing through
justice and is protected by courage and is ruled
through [good] government. — 76. [Good] government
[is], that 7 the gate of the chief be guarded § in the
[proper] time of being guarded 9, and opened in the
[proper] time of being open 9, and the gatekeeper
friendly. — 77. Jalal-al-din used not to go to sleep lo
except drunk 11, nor (and not) to arise in the morning
except seedy and tipsy ii. — 78. It is not seemly for
the wise [man], that 12 he address the fool, like as
it is not seemly for the sober [man], that he address
the drunken [man]. — 79. People i3 of the world
[are] like folk in a ship, who ^^ are carried onwards
1 inf. § 113 d. 2 § 133. 3 fem. * § 96 d 5 ^X^. 6 impf.
pass, impers. ' § U8b. 8 ^^Jl^ with part. § 110. 9 61 c. »" see
p. 61* note 1. 11 § 113 6. 12 § usb. 13 § 133. !♦ §§ 155, 156.
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC, C. 66"^
whilst they are sleeping i. — 80. The evil-doer [he]
does not consider 2 mankind except [as] evil, because
he 3 sees them with^ the eye of his nature. — 81. God
elected Abraham [as] an [intimate] friend. 7 — 82. Every
aifair in the world [is] transitory. — 83. Wickedness
[is] to be feared^, and no one (not) fears it except
the intelligent [man]; and good [is] to be hoped for,
and every one 6 seeks it. — 84. [To] a man (servant) shall
not 8 be given [anything] more ample than endu-
rance.— 85. I looked into Paradise, then I saw the
most of its inhabitants [to be] the poor ; and I looked
into hell-fire, then I saw the most of its inhabitants
[to be] (the) women. — 86. He 9 whose counsel is
asked [is] onei<> in whom one confides; and he 10 who
asks counsel [is] one^o who is to be aided. — 87. Do
not put offi^ the work of to-day till to-morrow 12. —
88. Thou dost not ■ 3 find (see) in the creation of God any !•*
imperfection. — 89. Little which 10 continues [is] better
than much which ^0 is interrupted. — 90. Pharaoh said,
"We will IS kill 16 their sons and spare their women." —
91. A Bedouin looked at a gold-piece; then he said,
"How small i' is thy size and how great ^^ thy value!" —
^ 1 § 157 a. 2 § 139 d a. 3 suff. 4 ^_,. 5 § 60 c. 6 j!it.
7 \U1:L. 8 y § 100 end. 9 part. " 10 part. »i § 101 6.
12 indeterm. i3 [U. u ^ as used § 141. i5 ^, § 99 a.
16 § 19. 17 § 52.
Socin, Arabic Gramma^.* E
66* TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC, D.
92. The envious [man] is not well-pleased with thee S
until thou diest! — 93. Be [the] tail and be not [the]
head! for 2 the tail escapes whilst 3 the head perishes.
D. Various subordinate Sentences.
94. Muhammed said, "Do not anticipate (begin) ^
Jews and Christians by the greeting, but when ye
meet one of them s, (ihen) ^ force him towards the
narrowest place (his narrowest)". — 95. When comes to
thy knowledge concerning thy brother what is evil,
then seek for him excuse; but if thou dost not^ find
[one], then say, "Perhaps he has an excuse." — 96. If 8
thou eat little, thou shalt live long. — 97. Ifs ye talk
in a good manner (make ye good the talk), ye shall
enter Paradise. — 98. Ali said, — may 9 God be well
pleased with him 10 — "Q ' 1 mankind! do not hope except
for your Lord, and do not dread [anything] except your
transgressions; and be not he ashamed, who 12 doth not
know, to 13 learn, and be not he ashamed, who 12 knoweth,
to 13 teach!" — 99. The subsistence which thou seekest
is like the shadow (the likeness of the subsistence . . .
[is] the likeness of the shadow) which moves on along
1 verbal ^sentence. 2 ^^Ls. 3 § 157 nomin. sent.
4 plur. 5 S^\ with gen. § 133 end. 6 § lei c. J §§ 159, 101c.
® § 1.60 6. 9 § 98 d. 10 after the subject. ^ l^\ § 85. ^^ ^^.
3 ^\ with subj.
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC, D. 67*
with thee; thou i dost not overtake it in pursuing 2 [it],
then when thou turnest^ away from it, it follows
theeU — 100. A man said to the Apostle of God:
"0 Muhammed, give me thy cloak!*'; then he threw
it down to 5 him; then he said: "I do not 6 want it";
then he [Muh.] said, "May^ God combat thee! thou
didst wish to 8 declare me to be niggardly, but
(and) God has not made^ me [to be] niggardly!" —
101. Whoso 10 longs for Paradise, he is unmindful of
lusts 11. — 102. That a man 22 give in alms in his Ufe-
time a drachma (the alms -giving '2 of a man — a
drachma) [is] better for him than that ^3 he give in
alms a hundred drachmae at his death.
103. The Prophet — may God bless '4 him and save
him — said, "Whoso 10 drinketh wine in this world, [and]
thereupon do not^^ repent, he shall be forbidden it>6
in the future life." — 104. If anyone light a lamp in a
mosque, then verily ^^ the angels [they] will beg for-
giveness for him as long as^s that lamp continues ^9
kindled 20. — 105. The reed-pen [is] a tree, whose 21
fruit [is] the ideas, and thought [is] a sea, whose 21
» pronoun. 2 part. 113 6. 3 § 1_58 a. * perf. 5 ^J. 6 U
with irnperf. t % 98 d. 8 ^\ with subj. 9 § 101 e.
1^' § 159. 11 determ. 12 inf. i3 ^f ^ § 148 6 with subj.
11 § 11 end. 15 ^§§ 160 c, 101c. »6 § 108. i7§i6la. is § 158 6.
19 § 110. 20 part. pass. § 110. 21 § 155. 22 jAo.
^ E*
68* TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. D.
pearls [are] wisdom. — 106. Verily the dead [man] and
he who 1 has no religion (he who no 2 religion to
him) [are] equal 3; and there is no 2 trust in (to)
him who 1 has no 2 piety. — 107. Every woman
that ^ has no ^ modesty [is] like a dish that has no ^
salt. — 108. If anyone's 6 [whoso, his] tattle is much,
his erring is much [also]. — 109. The anger of the
nohle [man], although his fire flare up', [is] like
smoke of woods in which [there is] no 9 blackness.
— 110. To the ignorant [man] are forgiven 10 seventy 11
transgressions, ere to the knowing [man] is forgiven one.
111. Be not 12 like the needle, which 1 3 clothes
mankind whilst i* it [is] naked, nor (and) like the wick,
which 14 gives light to mankind whilst it is consumed is.
— 112. The believer does not escape from the chas-
tisement of God, until he leave off four things, lying,
and pride, and niggardliness, and evil thinking (evil
of the thinking). — 113. It is seemly for the younger
[ones] to 16 precede the elders in three places; wheni'
they travel by night ^% or wade through a stream, or
encounter horsemen. — 114. Do not drink (the) poison
out of reliance 19 on the antidote which thou hast
1 Cr*- ^ § 111- ' sing- * §§ 1^5, 156. 5 part.pass. § 110.
6 § 166. 7§159. 8 indeterm. § 155. 9§111. io§136a. »i§92Z).
t2 "J with energ. I. § 101 b. i3 § 155. u § 157 a. is § 157 a, pron.
with imperf. le § us. n § 158 a. '8 § 113^1. 19 § 113 d.
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC, D. 69*
(that which [is] with^ thee of 2 the antidote). — .
115. Paradise is desirous 3 of four [kinds of] folk; the
first 4 of them 5 [are] those who have fed** a hungry
[man] , and the second [are] those who have clothed 7
a naked [man], and the third [are] those who fast^
in 8 the month of Eamadan^, and the fourth [are]
those who read 10 the Koran. — 116. Socrates was asked,
"Why hast thou notn mentioned in thy law-code the
"punishment of him who kills 12 his brother?" He said,
"I know not that this [is] a thing which exists." —
117. Everything [it] begins smalHs, thereupon it be-
comes great, except misfortune^'*; for it begins great,
thereupon it becomes small ; and every thing [it] becomes
cheap, when 15 it becomes abundant, excepting education;
for 16 when it becomes abundant, it rises in value.
118. After Moses had returned to the Sons of
Israel with the Thora (and along with him [was] the
Thora), they refused to i" accept it and to do according
to what [was] in it. — 119. God commanded Moses to is
fast thirty is days and to purify himself and to purify
his garments, and to come to ^ ^ the mountain, that he
might talk to him and give him the book. — 120. After
1 y>^. 2 ^/ye, 3 part. * masc. 5 suffix in fern. sing.
6 perf. sing. " imperf. sing, s § naa^. 9 § 128. 10 imperf.
sing. 11 § 101 c. 12 § 159. jz § 113 2,. u accus. § 151. is § 158 a.
16 with suff. § 96 d. n ^\ with subj. is § us a. i9 Ji-
70*
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. D.
.Damascus was taken-, mucli folk 2 of 3 its inhabitants
joined Heraclius, whilst ^ he was in ^ Antioch. — 121. A
certain one of the wise men said, Nothing (not) repels
the onslaught of the conquering enemy like^ being
submissive and giving way, like as ^ green plants are
safe from the vehement wind through their pliancy, be-
cause they s turn along with it, as (how) 9 it turns. —
122. They disagree 10 concerning "Waraka; and of 1 1 them
[thereare] thosewho assert ^^ that 12 he died a Christian i3
and did not i4 reach the appearance of the Prophet;
and of 1 1 them [there are] those who are of opinion i^
that 12 he died a Muslim. — 123. 0 [ye two] companions
of the prison! as to the one of you^^^ he shall serve
to his lord wine i', and as to the other, he shall be
crucified, then shall is the birds eat of 12 his head; the
affair is decreed ^^ concerning which ye inquire! —
124. The Apostle wrote to chieftains ^ 7 ofn the tribes,
inviting 20 them to become Muslims 21. — 125. A wise
[man] was asked, "What [is] the thing, which [it] is
not good that it be said, although it be 22 right?" He
said, "A man's eulogizing himself23". — 126. Woe to
1 fern. § 136 ?>. 2 j^ coH. ^ c^t' '*§157fl^. 5 ^^. 6 JJu as
subject, § 145 h. ^ ^^l US' § 147 a. § sing, suff. 9 § 159. ^lo § 98 6 with
J5, §Jl37a. 11 cr*. i2§i47o. 13 §113 6. i4§ioic. 15 §98 6.
16 j^\ w. dual suif. § 133. ^7 indetenn. is fem. sing. § 136 c, 2.
" § 98 h. 20 § 99 Z). 21 infin. determ. 22 ^^ § 159. 23 § 131 w. Ace.
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC, E.
IV
[him] who converses with lying, that he may make the
people laugh by it! — 127. This (the) world and the
future life [are] as the East and the West; when thou
approachest one of them \ thou dost recede from the
other. — 128. Fear ye God in secret 2 and do not enter
into what is not lawful for you! — 129. The devotee without
learning [is] like the ass of the mill 3, who ^ goes around
and does not 5 get through (cut) the distance. — 1 30. The
eye of hate [it] draws forth every fault, and the eye
of love [it] does not find the faults.
E. Anecdotes.
131. An astrologer was being crucified ; then he was
asked 6, "Hast thou" seen this in thy star?" Then he
said, "I saw a raising upS, however I did not^ know
that it [was to be] upon a piece of wood."
132. A man knocked at the door of ^o ' Amr the son
of 'Ubaid; so he said "Who [is] this?" He said, "I." He
[' Amr] said, "I do not know (I am not I know 1 1) among
our friends (brothers) 12 [any] one i3, whose name [is] I."
133. (The) thieves came i^ in upon Abu Bekr al-
Rabbani, seeking i^ something (a thing), and he saw
1 dual suffix. 2 determ. 3 § 123, note. * § 155 note. » § 1576
)) w. impf. 6 137 a. ' with interrog. part. J^. ^ 73 c end.
9 § 101 c. io ^. 11 Jij3 § 50 and impf. 12 order § idi-b.
13
-\- 1^ § 136 a. '5 § 157 ^, imperf. alone.
72*
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. E.
them going around i in the house. Then he said, "0
young men! This which ye are seeking 2 in the night ^
we have 4 already sought 2 in the day-time, but have
not 5 found it!" So they laughed and went out.
134. It is related 6, that^ a certain one of the
polite scholars eulogized a certain one of the princes;
so he commanded [that] to him an [ass's] saddle and
saddle-girth [should be given]. So he took them^ on 9
his shoulder and went out from his presence 10. Then
a certain one of his companions saw him, then said,
"What [is] this?" He said, "I eulogized the prince
with the most beautiful of my poems, then he invested
me with [something] of ^i the most glorious of his dresses".
135. Al-Mugira, the son of Suba said: No one
(not) 12 has deceived me except (another than) a youth
of 13 the sons of al-Harit. For I mentioned a woman
of theirs (of i^ them), that is I should marry her; then
he said, "0 i^ Prince! [There is] no good is for thee
in her." So I said, "And why [not]?". He said, "T
saw a man kissing 1^ her." So I turned from her; then
the young man married her. So I reproached him
and said, "Didst thou not i^ inform me that thou is hadst
7 imperf. 2_with suffix. 3 § 118 a. * % 9S^e. 5 U §150 a.
6 § 98 6. 7 ?j\. 8 dual suffix. 9 j^. 10 «v>-lft ^. 11 ^.
12 101 c. 13 J. 14 l4^\. 15 § 111. 16 imperf. i^ p\ § 101 r.
18 v^l with suff.
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. E, 73'
seen a man kissing her?" He said, "Yes, 1 saw her
father kissing her."
136. Al-Dahhak the son of Muzahim said to a
Christian, "[How would it be] if i thou wert to become
a Muslim?" He said, "I have not 2 ceased loving 3
Islam 4, except that ^ my love for wine 6 prevents me from
it." So he said, "Become a Muslim and drink it !" So
after he had become a Muslim, he said to him, "Thou
hast 7 become a Muslim, so if thou drink it s, we shall
chastise thee ; and if thou apostatize, w^e shall have thee
killed 9, so choose for thyself. Then he chose Islam and
his Islam was good. So he had taken lO him by stratagem.
' 137. A Bedouin stole a purse in which (it) [were]
pieces of money ^ \ thereupon he entered the mosque
to pray 12; and his name was ^3 Moses. Then the
leader of prayer recited, "And what is that 1^ in i5 thy
right hand, Oh Moses ^'^P" go he said, "By God, verily
thou [art] an enchanter!" Thereupon he threw away
the purse and went out.
138. A man claimed the (a) gift of prophecy in
the days i7 of al-Rasid. So after he had appeared
< y § 102. 2 U with perf.^^ 3^§ 110 with indeterm. part.
^ § 132 end. 5 §§ 147 c, 148 ^\ "^1 with foil, verbal sentence.
6 § 131. 7 § 98c with Ss. s § 159. 9 § 17, note b. »o perf.
11 indetei-m. 12 § 99 J. n <^^, 1* fern, is ^. 16 gurah 20, 18.
»" § 113a.
T \'R ^ A R
74*
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. E.
before him [the Caliph], he asked him, "What [is
that] which is said of thee?" He said, "that I^ am
a noble prophet." He asked, "But what 2 indicates
the truth of thy claim?" He said, "Demand what 3
thou wilt" 4. He said, "I wish that ^ thou make theses
beardless slaves, [who are] standing 7 [there] this
moments [to be furnished] with beards »" Then he
looked down for a while 10, thereupon he raised his
head and said, "How is it lawful that I make these ^
beardless [ones to be furnished] with beards ^ and
alter these 6 beautiful 12 forms? buti3 I will make the
bearded ones (owners of beards) beardless in one
twinkling." So al-Rasid laughed at him and pardoned
him "and commanded a present [to be given] to him.
139. A person pretended to prophecy 1^5 then they
besought of him in i5 the presence of al-Ma'mim a
miracle. So he said, "I will cast for you a pebble into
the water, then it will dissolve". He [al-Ma'miim] said,
"We are 16 content." So he brought out a pebble
[which he had] along with him^', then cast it into the
water; then it dissolved. So they said, "This is is a
1 § 96 (Z. 2 fe^ ^\. 3 § 5, note b. 4 perf. § 159. s ^\.
6 § 120 cZ; the dem. in sing., the adj. in broken pi. ' determ.
§ 120 a. 8 § 118 a. 9 indeterm. lo § 113 a. '^ plur. 12 § 120
fern. sing. " UJ^^. i4 § 22. is <_; 16 § 93 c. '- <^^^ § 121 a.
18 § 143.
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. E.
trick; however, we will give ^ thee a pebble of our
own 2, and let^ it dissolve!" Then he said, "Ye are
not 4 more illustrious ^ than Pharao and I am not (and
not 1 6) mightier in wisdom ' than Moses, and Pharao
did not 8 say to Moses, 'I am not 9 content with what
thou do est lo with thy staff, so that ^ i I will give thee
a staff of my own ^', which i3 thou shalt make [into] a
serpent.'" So al-Ma'mun laughed and let him pass on.
140. It is said i-i that Abu Dulama i^ the poet was
standing 16 before al-Saffah on^^ a certain day (a
certain one of the days). Then he said to him, "Ask
of me what thou dost want (thy want)!" So Abu
Dulama said to him, "I want a hunting-dog". So he
said, "Give ye it is to him!" Then he said, "And I want
a horse, oni9 which I may go forth to hunt." He said,
"Give ye it to him!" He said, "And a page 20, who 21
will lead the dog and hunt with him." He said, "And
give ye him a page!" He said, "And a slave-girl 22,
who 23 will prepare the game and give us to eat of it."
He said, "Give, ye him a slave-girl!" He said, "These,
1 imperf. 2 li^x-U ^. 3 imper. of. ^>^ w. suff.; then iuipf.
^O-^"§110- '§63&. 6 lit ^5. 7 § 113c. 8§ioic. 9 p.
10 § 156. 11 ,^^;;^ with subj. 12 ^v>J^ ^^. 13 §§ 155—56.
14 § 98 c. 15 147 (z. 16 ^U" ^vith part. § 110. i7 ^3. is with
4.^, which stands last, § 54 6. i9 ^ (after the verb) § 155.
20 accus. 21 § 155. 22 accus. 23 g 155.
76=*
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. E.
0 Prince of the Believers! have need of ([there is]
no 1 escape for them from) a dwelling, which 2 they
may inhabit." So he said, "Give ye him a dwelling,
which 2 will contain them !" He said, "And if they have
not (and if not is 3 to them) an estate, then wherefrom
shall they live ?" He said, "I grant * thee ten cultivated ^
estates and ten w^aste estates V He said, "And what
[are] the waste ^ [ones] 0 Prince of the Believers?"
He said, "In which 6 [there are] no plants 7." He
said, "1 4 grant thee, 0 Prince of the Believers, a
hundreds waste estates of 9 the deserts of the Sons
of Asad." Then he laughed at him. and said, "Make
them 10 all of them lo cultivated! lo"
141. It is related ii, that Harim al-Rasid had (that
to H. was 12) a black slave-girl, of ugly mien i3. Now
he scattered one day gold-pieces i^ among (between)
the slave-girls; so the slave-girls set about i^ gather-
ing i6 up the gold-pieces, whilst i" that slave-girl stood
still, looking is at the face of al-Rasid. Some one
asked (it was asked), "Dost thou 1 9 not pick up the
1 § 111. 2 §§ 155—56. 3 ^ p. 4 § 98c with ^.
^ § 87 a. 6 L^ and prep, with pronoun at the end of the sentence.
7 § 111. 8 § 92 c. 9^£r^. lofem. sing, n § 98c. 12 J <j\S ^\
§ 147 c. 13 determ. § 134. i* indeterm. is § 136 o. 16 §§ 152
note 6, 136 d (impf^ pi. fern.) i" § 157 a with part is § 157 h
impf. alone. i^ ^\ av. impf. fern.
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC. E. 77*
gold -pieces?'' Then she said, "Verily what i they
seek [is] the gold-pieces, but (and) what^ I seek
[is] the owner of the gold-pieces." Then her speech
pleased him; so he placed her near [to him] and
brought good upon her. Then the report got to the
grandees, that 2 Harim al-Rasid was enamoured 3 of
a black slave-girl. So after that had come to his
knowledge, he sent for the whole of the grandees,
until he had assembled'* them in his presence ^ Then
after he had commanded the bringing in^ of the
slave-girls, he gave every one of" them a goblet of^
chrysolites and commanded it to be thrown down 6.
But they declined [doing it] in a body (as a whole 9).
Then the turn came to (the affair got to) the ugly
slave-girl; but she threw down the goblet and broke
it. So they said, "Look 10 at this girl, her name [is]
ugly, and her manner [is] ugly, and her action [is]
ugly". Then said to her the Caliph, "Why then didst
thou break 11 it"? Then she said, "Thou didst 12 command
me to break it^^; so I was of opinion that^^ ini^ its
being broken [lay] a detriment ^^ with regard to the
1 part. pass, with s affix. 2 ^^b. 3 imperf. * § 152, note c.
5 ij^. 6 v--> with infinitive § 131. "^ cr* § 119 a.
8 determ. 9 §^113 5. 10 plur. " 2nd. pers. fern. perf. w. suflf.
§ 53 a. 12 § 98 e. is <_> with inf. i* ^\, 15 ^^, le § 147 a.
78*
TRANSLATION INTO ARABIC.
treasure of the Caliph, and in its not being broken
(in the lack of its being broken) a detriment ^ with re-
gard to his command ; and the detriment with regard
to the first is fitter to keep intact 2 the inviolability
of the command of the Caliph. And I was of opinion
that in its being broken [lay] my being called (qualifi-
ed 3 as 4) the crazy [one], and in keeping it intact my
called being (qualified ^ as^) the disobedient [one]; and
the first [is] more agreeable to me than the second."
Then the grandees found ^ that^ to be beautiful of her
and praised her forS it and excused the Caliph for 9
loving her. And God knows best ([is] most knowing ^o).
1 § 147 a. 2 § 113^^ indeterai. inf. with foUowing J § 131.
§ 61 c. 4 ^_j. 5 § 136 a. 6 at the end. 7 ^. 8 ^,
^. 10 elative.
GLOSSARY A.
pi. = plural, see §§ 88 — 90. The numbers within parentheses after
the broken plurals refer to the forms as numbered in these sections.
Aaron j..wjo. Siiter prep.
Abraham (va^j-?^* agreeable to elat. y^^]
abstinence <Uj. "'"^ ^h
AbuBekr al-Rabbani ^T ^'"^ (*°) cJ^ '"^''- ) ^^
i ,c5o '* «,^ with ace.
Abu Dulama i^Slo ^|.
abundant see much. \ all ^}S' rvith determ. noun
^ accept (to) Jui /wp/: «. ^^ ^"//^-^ § H^ ^•
^acquire (to cause to) ....^ ^^"^^ (*^ g^^'® ^^) 0^>-^
IV with two accus.' ^' "^'^^ ^ of the gift.
^ act well (to) ,j-wwua^ /r. along with jt?r6'j9. li.
^ action JJti. See also bring, already Jj? § 98 e.
address (to) ^^ III, ^^^er (to) ^U med. ^ //.
^ affair pt ' although ^^|^^ § 159.
after, after that conj. L^^ among ^^.
§ 98/: ample L^!^ ^/a/. § 63 &.
80*
Glossary A.
\
'Amr ^y4s- ^ 90n.
^and I.
G^o
arise (to, in the morning)
as see like.
as to Loj with nom. and o
in the apodosis.
Asad tXlLl.
ashamed (to be) ^^ X
§ 49 c.
^ask (to) JU* med, . with
J. — to ask something
of JLw /mp/! a, with two
ace. § 38 &.'
ass J t^-
assemble (to) 1^:^ //wjt?/". a,
assert (to) l£,\ impf. u.
6 w ^ 5
astrologer ^^Xjo.
^ o
at (one's house)^r^^. Jojt.
Bagdad 4>|jou.
baggage cL^-
apply oneself to (to) Ihc be, exist (to) ^\S' med. y
VI with ace. — not to be yllj § 50.
approach (to) Csi* /^i?/*. / beard llU. jo/. JJti (3); cf.
!/, W2Y^ jj^. ' § 71 &.
"^ angel J^p/.RJL&Ui (28).
9 ^ ^
anger v.,^.0^.
animal (domestic) il».A.^
i?/. JoLii (25).
Go -'
X another than ^^.s. with fol-
lowing gen.
answer (to give) to »oL^
X med, . with J.
antidote ,vLj)'>-
Antioch iu5^Uij!.
apostatize t^x VIII.
G ,^
apostle J«.^y
appear (to) J.:uo.
appearance ^^^b.
Glossary A.
8r
beardless SJo]pI. JjU (1). beseech of (to) v^^-Lb ///
rvith ace. of person and
^ beat (to) i^wo impf. i, inf.
^ beauty ,j-ww^:=»- — beauties
\
beautiful
ij***^^
fern, k_;
elat. § 63 &. — to find
to be beautiful jj-ww^^ X
because ^^ § 147 «.
Bedouin ^-jIv^L
before (of place) = be-
tween the two hands
of (dual stat. constr.).
v^ of thing,
best elat. of good,
better elat. of good.
between /^^.
beverage v^wCiuo j?/. jLftLLo
(23).
birds CO//, oyb.
birth jjjo.
black jilt fern. § 74&.
blackness oll*I».
bless (to) ^Lo // with jLc.
beg of (to) jU 2>wi?/. a, ^o^y ^^^-^ -P^- JLjLiI (17).
«;e7^ «cc. -^ Mt)o (no. 67).
beggar j9«r/. «c^. of JLw. book <^u5".
begin, begin with (to) I Jo ^^^^ (to be) jj^ F.
mj?/. «, with ace. bottom SbLIi.
beginning jj*,|^ (lit. head), break (to) i^impf i.
believe (to) ^1 IV; — bring (to) ^ ^TL med. ^.
believer id. i?«r^. act. _ to bring an action
belly ^^Jaj. against one another
Sooin, Arabic Orammar.* F
82'
Glossary A.
*X^ VI. — to bring in
^^ IV, — to bring
into jLa.4> IV. — to
bring out ^ y£^ IV. —
to bring upon ^'1 IV
V with J^.
^ brother ? T § 90 «, c : pL
§ 88, 5; pL when =
«friends" § 88, 21.
bury (to) ^t> impf. i, inf,
S o ^
but o.
by, by means of o; in
oaths = ^ ^t'. /^^ gen.
§ 95 e.
Byzantines (the) coll. ** Jt-
Caliph xi-LXii..
care liD.
carry onwards (to) sL«
m^^. j^, with o.
case *-{b^.
cast (to) Jd impf. a.
cease (to) Jk ;w^(?. . {for
J.) §42^, §44).
certain one (a) (jdju w^'^^
pi. of follow, noun.
Go, G j,:^ >
character i^JLa- i?/. JLxil ^
(17).
G^ ^ ^
characteristic iU^Lr..
S3 —
chastise (to) tX^ impf. u.
G ^ ^
chastisement (^lt\^.
cheap (to become) {jar>^
impf. u.
G ^ _-. ^ ,
chief jj^^ ;?/. ^^Ui (20).
choose (to) .L^ med. ^
F77/.
chrysolite ^^isli'
Christian ^\1^ pi. jLjii
(29); ^^"Lii.
claim (to) U<^ F/// § 25,
note.
claim ^^ItS.
cloak g|<5v.
/ G —
clot of blood aLftJLft.
Glossaet a. 83*
clothe (to) Lww.> impf. u, — to command any
Q with vo ^nd infin,
cognizant of ^ AjJLi. "^ ^
1. X /i. ^ I . rrr command yol.
combat (to) jLXi ///. >
,^ V rf . ^ . companion vI^-^Lo p/.
come (to) ^! impf. t, — s\,^^ • -
to come to one's know- ^ r
1 J , • X "T" compassionate -U^v
ledge (concerning) iJb ^ n^
m;?/-. I., with ace, {and concerning ^.
J^). - to come in ^^^^^^ ^^ (*^) U^^ ^^^^•
u^on^"^ impf. u, with conquering i^^r^ ^c^. 0/
Jk£. — to come out 7^
from _ '^ impf. u, wiih °°°^i'^«'^ ^^ (*°) ^J^ ''"P^'
^^ u, with ace,
" consumed (to be) . 1:^^
come together >,t-^ VIII. ^/
\ command (to) ^| aVw;?/: u. contain (to) 1;^ emj?/. a,
-to command anyone ^^^^^^^ ^^^ ^^^ '^^ .^^^
to do a thing, id. w;e7A *^'^
:g^ «. — to be content with,
aec. and .%| with the
^ id. with ^^.
5w&y. — to command - 0^ ^^
anything to be given contentment j^Lo.
to anyone, id. with J continence -l.li (pL of
of pers. and ^^ 0/ thing, ^) .
84* Glossary A.
continue (to) II 3 med. . ad-Dahliak dL^stlj.
§ ^^^' Damascus ;^j^4>.
contradict (to) ^.oJLi:. III. . , , ® ? o ha • //
^ ^ daughter o^jo § 902. ^
converse (to) ii>tX^ r. — g„. g ^^
to converse about, id. ^^^ r^.^^' r^-^ §§ ^^' ^'^' ^
w?7^ JO. 90 5. — one day Lo^.
counsel (to ask) X^ med. to-day |»^il.
y ^' day-time ^L^. /
country jJLs i?/. JL*i (9). dead v:i^uuo. ''^
courage aLcL^ui. death i:i>yo. ^
cover up (to) j/i^ impf, u. deceive (to) cJ^ i^pf- «•
covetousness ^jols»,. decline (to) mJuo VIII,
cradle J^gjo. decree (to) ^^ja3 impf. L
crazy js^rr^ pass, of \^ demand (to) a thing JLw
^^^^ H^^ impf a, with ,j^ § 38 &.
G o ^ depend on (to) Af^ V, with
creation ioXh^. ^ ^ ' >
crucify (to) .^JLa impf L
cultivated part. act. of
desert iXjtlipl. JLki (26);
'^ desirous of (to be) ,^Lcc.
cure gU.co.
t (to) ^
to cut open ^^^impfu. detriment uah
med. . VIII, with J^or
cut (to) Jnjs impf a. — j^.
Glossary A.
SS'*
devoted to (to be) dU^ dog s^JLT; hunting-dog
\
VIII with ^.
devotee part, act. of Ju^
r.
die (to) oLo med. ..
6
difficult wLAWLft.
disagree (to) v^jiJLa. F7//.
disease e|3.
G
disgraceful
^^•
dish j.ljLb.
dislike (to) t^S irnpf, «.
disobedient j9«r^. «c^. 0/ early see morning.
domestic 5^e animal.
6
door j^Lf.
drachma (Ci)4>.
draw forth (to) \o /F.
dread (to) .^-ci^ imp/. «.
dress ^^^.JLoi?/. JJLxi (23).
drink (to) C^y^ impf. a.
drunk, drunken ^iJCu;.
dwelling J 5 (fern.).
dissolve (to)
»|6 med.
East
easy
I^^aSuO.
distance RiLwwuo.
distinguish (to)
impf. u.
(jg ^
do (to) Jl^ impf a; Jiii
eat (to) J^j impf. u; imp.
§ 38 &. — to give to
eat of j^xh IV with ace.
pers. and ^^.
impf a (no. 139). — to education^^^l.— to show
do according to Jl«^ one's education 04>! V.
with
elder ^ri pL JlcUI (23).
86*
Glossary A.
tk^KS. impf. «, with ace.
enchanter wa-LI/.
elect (to) ^AXD VIII. escape (to) li impf. u.
elegance Jl^^. escape Jo.
enamoured of (to be) estate xilo pi. JLxi (9).
eulogize (to) " Juo impf,
a.; id. VIII (no. 134).
evening (late) ^l^i.
every Ji^' with indeterm.
noun. § 119 &.
evidence iLuo.
evil (to be) :eUu me<?. ..
— to do evil id. JV. —
evil-doer part act. of
id. IV.
evil
encounter (to) £} III. -
endurance ^jJa.
enemy ^tX^.
enjoy oneself (to) ^^JoV.
entail ^b)-eu^/F;
enter (to) JlLS impf u.
see § 107 note.
entertain (to) ^^3 impf. i.
inf. %\Ji.
example h1x&.
entrance JJi.Juo.
G
entrust (to) anyone with excellent JwoU elat. § 63 &.
gO^ X w^Y^ ^w;o «ccw5. except l^H (= i ^^ji) § l^^-
envious j9«r^. «c^. o/ Juw^i*..
equal g)^.
ere, co/y*. ^Jl JlI^ § 100.
err (to) JaJLi^ 2^/. iaJLt.
0 / ^
error JI^Le.
— except that ju! ^1
§ 147 c.
excepting ^^ Lx) with ace.
excuse (to) Cj^ impf i.
excuse ^d^s.. /
Glossaby a.
87*
exhort (to) Jail impf, i,
§ 40«.
exist (to) ^iS'med. ..
exterior xlj^i.
extract (to) ^y^ X.
eye ,^^ /<?m. § 72.
face 2t:^«-
fast (to) ILo me^. ..
father ii § 90 a,
fault v^^^A^ j9/. <o«-^^ (10).
favour i4.*j i?/. Jkjti (3).
fear (to) oL^ med. . mj^/l
«, § 42 i?.
feed (to) ^ JV,
five
n^M^^
§§ 91, 92«.
flare up (to) _.| F.
flight (^w^ft.
flourishing (to make) lii
impf, u.
fly (to) from ^i ^mp/". /,
folk p^-;?/. § 88, 17;^
coll. (no. 120).
follow (to) LfJ imp/*, tf.
fool part act of Jl^j^.
for prep, J § 95 A; cow/.
^U§96rf.
forbid (to) a thing to any-
one Iw^i*. //w/?/. I, with
two accus.
fight (to) with one another « /.. x ^ Trm- d oc
* ^ ^ force (to) wo VIII. § 25
JJ3 F/
note,
find (to) J^; ^W. i, § 40a. ^^^^j^^^ o^^,^, ^^_ J^,-.
fire^L. (24).
first J^l. forgive (to) lit mj?/". e.
fit J^^ ^/«^. Jjl. forgiving J^.
Glossary A.
G o ^ ' ^ ^
forgiveness (to beg) ^ac X, gift v^^yo i?/- J^U>o (23).
form »\^ ^/. JJii (4). 5^e a/50 prophecy.
four l^^l §§ 91, 92«.
fourth i^ir.
s ^
friend v^^^Lo (see p. 85*).
— of God = Abraham
G
— intimate ^jt\.o i?/.
iSUiT (18).
G ''
friendly L-LdaJ.
girl xj^Lc^. -^
give (to) Lkc /r w;e7A two /
ace. — to give way inf.
G 9 ,
glad see tidings.
G ^0-
from jsr^jt?. ^/».
fruit 5
>^.
glance 1^ ;?/. JLiiJ (17).
glorify (to) ^j^ II.
glorious y^Li elat. § 63 &.
glory J^.
go round (to) 'TIS med. ..
— to go away Cf^c>
impf. a. — to go on
^^^iuo impf. i. — to go
future life see life,
gain (to make)
G o ^
game Joua.
Go" ®
garment o*i* pi J\jLi (9).
gate voLj.
gate-keeper ^->Lj.
gather up (to) iaJLl VIII.
get to (to) ^J F/// W27^
J|. — to get through gold-piece .Uj^ ;?/. §90 A:,
•la a e/Wj9/. «. good /?omw «w<? adj\ l^k
out " Ii». impf u. —
to let go J^^. IV.
goblet " ji.
god^l; God kill, by God /
5JU1;.
G. ^
Glossary A.
89*
elat. id. — to be good
Jwww^^ impf. u. — to
make good toLb med.
IV.
government
a
or
\
2LwV
governor
grandee viLU pL § 88, 10.
grant (to) JiaJi IV rviih
two accus.
grateful (to be) jCi impf. u,
great luJ. — to be, be-
come great ySimpf, u.
green (fresh) Zj^y
Q ■^ ^
greeting j.iLw.
guard (to) ^L.o med. ^;
inf. ^yO.
Go -
guest <wft-co.
hand J^S § 90r.
9 - --
al-Harit ^d)>Lil.
Harun ar-Rashid
u^;
Li
hate ijaJU'
have (to), 25 expressed by
the subject in the dative
{with J) followed by the
object in the nom. (as
G
JLo aJ he has money);
occasionally a form of
/.li^to be stands before
the subject (as gj ^\y
G
JLo he had money). —
not to have either as i?i
the last example, but
with jjIJJ (§ 50) instead
of ^ly ( jl; ^ ^0
or y with following ob-
ject (§ 111) and dative
of subject (aJ JLo ^).
he IjD § 12 «. — he who
G^-
head \jt^\y
hear (to) i^ wz;?/. a, inf
:Lma'«
CT"
G * - ^ 5 >
heart ,.^' ;?/. J^*i (10).
90^
Glossary A.
I
^\
heaven gU**- P^-
§76 6.
heir part. act. of vd>x« pi
&j
V
(6).
hell-fire jllil
help (to) l^aS impf, u. —
to demand help of ^Lt
med. , X with l-j.
Heraclius J^*j^.
high ^i.
holy see war.
hope for (to) Li.r mjo/. w,
72;«Y^ ace.
horse ab|j.
horsemen co//. Jui.
house ouo.
hunt (to) 5Lo »«^^. ^. —
to go forth to hunt id. V.
hunt, chase Jy^^. ^
hurry (to) J^^scr: //.
al-Husain jj.lwwwi|.
hypocrisy (religious) ^Lj..
hypocrite part. act. of
ILil.
///.
how yJu^.
however ^j^^. i^ith follg
verb.
humhle (to be) *^. VI.
hungry part. act. of cU^ in prep. ^^
Ignorance J ^^-
ignorantj9«r^. «c^. o/'J^:^..
idea ^jixi J9/. Jk^LAXj(23).
if ^1 § 159; in hypothe-
tical clauses J rvith the
perf. — if anyone ^
§ 159.
0
illustrious Jl-a-A«:^ elat.
§ 63 &.
imperfection inf. of viyU
me<Z. ^ r/.
me^.
^•«.
incumbent on (to be) ^^jj^^
hundred ibLo §§ 91, 92<?. .ewp/: i, with ^ § 40«.
Glossary A.
91-
c^ ^ -r CI "^
indicate (to) JS impf. u, Islam *^Lu/^!.
with J<£.'
indication JuJ5.
s - ^
indigestion jv*^-
inform (to) waS. /F.
inhabit (to) jjXw mj:?/. w.
inhabitants Jkjcj.
inquire concerning (to)
Israel JuoillL
Jalal ad-din ^jj jJI J^L^.
Jerusalem jj^^JuLfj.
Jews (the) coU. oJ^S.
join (to) (^i 2/wjt?/. «, 7i>?7^
^Ci X with ^.
Jonah
LT*^^.-
intelligent part, act. of Joseph
interior »
UAaa/0<
joy
'T^-r'
)^r:
justice Jj^.
interrupted (to be) JaS
j^jj ^ keep from (to
VIl.
intimate see friend,
into prep. ^^.
) «Lc impf.
«, with ace, and ^jo.
keep intact (to) Jh IV.
invest (to) anyone with kill (to) JiS impf. u.
lU impf a, with JS kindle^ (to) Ji^ impf i.
ofpers.and ace. of thing, king viXLc.
inviolability jLol4-. kingdom iXX^.
invite to (to) Li<> impf kiss (to) J^o //.
u, with J I. knock (to) at the door of
92*
Glossary A.
^i'4> impf. u, with J<^
of per s, and ace. of door.
know (to) IXd imp/', a;
olt imp, i (no. 132),
^rS impf. i (no. 73).
knowing ^«r^. «c^. of^J^;
elat. § 63 &.
Koran ^jLiiJ!.
lack j»Jl£.
lamp t\y^'
laugh (to) dl^ /mjt?/. a. —
to laugh at id. roiili ^^
— to make laugh id.
IV with vo of means.
law-code i^y^.
lawful (to be) Jl^. impf. i,
lead (to) S\j med. ..
leader see prayer,
learn (to) JL& V.
learned (CaJLc pi i-'^Jtl
(20).
learning IjL^.
leave, leave off (to) ^3
impf. u.
let (to) c 5 • impf tt § 40 «.
liar (to declare anyone to
be a) ^^dS 11.
liberal ^^ .
lie, tell a lie (to) 04>i^
fm/?/. 2'; 2w/'. to Jo.
life (the future, next world)
'7^
^!.
life-time sLvi.
light (to) ^ IV. — to
give light to -Ajo med.
IV, with J.
like (like as)^re/?. ^; conj.
\^(withvb.sent.),^\ uS
{nom. sent.).
likeness Jouo.
6
little JoJU.
live (to) yili we^. ^.
living ^.
G
long Ju^.
Glossary A.
long for (to) (J Li med, .
OF THB
"O-NiVERSI']
VIII, with Jl.
look at (to) Jh^ impf. u,
with J|. — to look down
ijjo IV, — to look into
JLb VIII, with ^ § 25,
note.
lord Cjy
love, fall in love with (to)
J„^^ IV, with ace,
love v«^u&..
loving inf. au^-
lower (to) ijai. impf. u.
lust »jJ:.y — lusts oll-g-cb
antith. to woman (nos.
2, 43, 102), § 90 e.
manifest j^flrr?. act. ^L
m^</. ,c /F.
mankind coll. y*<UJ!.
manner a^-.
marry (to) ^jv me<?. ^ F.
Mary j^pi.
meat li.
Mecca iUoo.
medicine v^^^*
meet (to) ^aJ 2>w/?/'. a,
mention (to) Sb impf. u,
mien JaJLx). "*
make, make to be (to) Joii. mighty jva^ ^/«t § 63&. .
impf.a. (with two accus.). .„ s^ ^ , <:
mill Rjy^Lb.
-to make (poetry) JU^ mindful of (to be) SS
G, ^^
med.
malady *L^.
al-Ma'mun ^^LJI.
G G
man ^. pi. JLii (9); gljo
ji^^o^
emp/. w, /t'?^^ ace.
G^ o J
miracle sC^sjo.
misfortune aU^^.^
J^US (25).
;?^.
94*
Glossary A.
0 " i
Muzahim rv^lyo.
naked j^^r^ /^^*
modesty eL^.
moment (this) R^LUt.
money JU. — piece of name ^.^t
money ^^.j pi. JJlati narrow (^jyo (= (Jj^a-o)
(23).
elat.
9 0
Go-
month w.g-Cw.
morning (early) S^Xj.
morrow, to-morrow Jlc.
Moses ^y^'
mosque tX:^iU).
most elat, of much.
9^^
mountain JJ^.
much ,^^ elat, § 63&. —
to be much, abundant ^^^^^ J^;
^Ir ^m;?/. t/. - to make ^^^^^^^ r^/
much Ja^IV. ^•
al-Mugira 5wa*4.J|.
Muhammed tX^.^.
music cU-l.
Muslim (to become a) JLw
/r. — Muslim id. part.
act.
nature «lb ^/. § 88, 9.
near (to place) ^ JJ //.
needle s^l.
neighbour ^Li-.
9
niggardly Ju^.. — to de-
clare anyone to be n.
So,
niggardliness J^si.
nobles coll.
not 5^e § 150.
now conj. o-
nutriment v:^) J>.
0! G § 85; «/50 \j^\,
obedient to (to be) v:iis
impf. u, with J.
Glossary A.
95^
observe (to) yj^ VIII,
occasion (as a conse-
quence) (to) v-aa^ jy,
with two accus.
Omar S^..
on acount oi prep. J.
one as pronoun or adj.
J^L fern, i ; with
pron. suffix J^|.
only Lis I.
onslaught ^^b.
open (to) ^Jl impf. a;
inf. ^^Xi.
opinion (to be of) ^\\
impf. a, § 49 &.
or ^|.
other lil.
overtake (to) J.t> IV.
owner v«^Lo pi. JLiil
(17).
page boy ^'%^.
Paradise eUi|.
pardon (to) Li^ impf u,
with jLc.
part (= some) u^jl?
(§ 133).
pass on (to let) vL^ med.
pearls coll. J J.
pebble SLa^.
people JL5^|.
perhaps JjJ § 147 «.
perish (to) viiLo impf. i;
— to cause to p. id. IV.
person (man) ^Luil.
Pharao ^Icwi.
9 "
physician v^aaaIc.
pick up (to) iail impf u.
piece, see § 73 c.
piety xSL^.
place (occasion) ^j^po ;?/.
jL^lii (23).
place (to) «^r /mp/. a.
§ 40 «. i-.
i
96'
Glossary A.
plants coll viLo (masc).
please (to) v-,*.^'^ ^^' —
to be well pleased with
"IaoT imp/', a. with ,j^.
pleasure H jJ pi § 76.
pliancy ^^^
(§ 83). direction of
prayer xJUs. — leader of
prayer JJo\^
preach to (to) CJoL^ impf,
u, with ace.
precede (to) j.Jo V,
poem, poetry ^i^p/. jUit prepare (to) ^^ IV,
»-4.s i^ i?/.
Vo
(17).
poet j-fcLii-
poison jvwu.
polite scholar
i%il (20).
poor lOi i?^. i^'^Ui (20)
possessor .6, /<2»J
§ 90 /.
poverty Jii.
power sJ}.
praise (to) tX^^ ernp/'. «.
praise (God) J^3.
pray (to) ^Le //.
prayer s^Lo (= H^-Lo
6 »'
§ 43 note) pi ^\Juo
presence Sw*d^.
present (gift) aULo (2^/*. of
preserve (to) ia^L impf. a.
pride JS.
prince y^S pi i>'^kx9 (20).
prison jj«^JLw.
G o^
promise Jc^..
prophecy (gift of) S^. —
to pretend to prophecy
to V.
prophet ^AJ i?/.. f^^^il.
(18).
prostrate oneself (to) d^
impf u.
Glossary A.
97^
protect (to) jIC^ impf, u, u reflection itif, of Jo V,
provide for (to) ,iCr impf. refuse (to) ^| impf. a. -
w, with two accus.
punishment abJit.
purify (to) . (^ U //. — to
oneself id V.
purse 'iy^.
pursue (to) mj3 VIII.
^ y ^
put (to) Jljl^ impf. a. —
to put off till ^T //.
with J.
qualify (to) inf. k^^
raise, raise up (to)
r
impf, a; inf.
G u^
&
Ramadan ^Ld^Sr.
ar-Rashid Joui J|.
reach (to) e),^ IV.
read (to) |^* impf. a.
to r. to do, id. with ^ |
and subj.
regard, with r. to ^.
regret *Jo.
relate (to) ^J^ impf. i,
related to v_>Jw5 rvith ^jo.
reliance inf. VIII, see rely.
religion ^^.3.
rely on (to) Jl5^ VIII, with
JS §40^.
repel (to) S\ impf. u.
repent (to) CjLS med. ..
repentance iLoljJ.
report yxL-
reproach (to) l^f »»«</. ..
, ^ ^ ^ ^ restore (to) -^1* med. , /F.
recede from (to) Jul? 2/w/?/. C ^ ^^ -^
restrain from (to) JjiS'impf.
a, with Jwxj.
recite (to) Q* m^/. «.
reed-pen jJLr.
Socin, Arabic Grammar.*
u. with ace. and ^i. —
to r. one's self from id.
with
u^'
98*
(tlossary a,
resurrection X/jLii'.
return to (to) iiT impf. i,
with J, I.
right (due) (S-i-
9
right, right hand jjjy^j.
rise in value(to) ^£ mjo/*. w.
root v-ftA*w.
routed (to be) *yc F//.
rule (to) (j^Lw me^. ..
run races (to) ^^j^ VIII,
saddle (of an ass) ilcOwj.
— saddle-girth *lw^.
safe (to be) IJLl mj?/! «.
as-Saffah \juJi\.
9 f
salt ^>J^.
save (to) jvJLav //.
say (to) JU »i^^. .. — to
say of anyone, id. with
^jx. — to s. to anyone,
id. with J.
scatter (to) *.aj impf. u, i.
sea
7^-
second ^b.
secret^ jp/. JL*il (17).
9 -^
security ^\^.
see (to) ^^\Umpf. a, § 49 ^.
seedy part, pass, of ^^is^.
seek (to) vj^lij 2^^?/. w. —
to seek for one's self,id. V.
seemly (to be) ^ VII.
seize (to) Os^S impf. u.
self jjliS § 12 e.
send (to) Jlu/^ /F; for
ujLLss-,* with v^.
serpent ^Loii'.
9 o ^
servant (i. e. of God) jJx
;?/. jlii (9).
serve wine to (to) ,-£1
impf. 2, w;?Y^ ^w'O ace.
set about (to) ^Lo med. ^,
with impf. § 99 note a.
seventy ^yju,^.
shadow JlIo.
Glossary A.
99^
shift (to) \S Jc impf. i.
ship iLUJ^.
shirt u^flj^j*.
shoulder ._<?><
sign ibi jt?/. § 76.
silent (to be) inf. v^^^^o.
9
sin x^jlU^.
singing (art of) gllc.
sit with (to) (jjJLai- ///,
. .?-. r.
size 2ocb.
slave vJ^Xi^ ;>/. Ja^Ux
(27).— slave-girl LsLi
;>/. ^\yl (24).
sleep, go to sleep (to) ILS
me^. ., impf. a; part. act.
pL § 88, 9.
small jj^^o. — to become
s. ykuc impf a.
smoke ^^LLt>.
snow Jo.
so conj. o-
sober j9«r/. act. of lis?.
J -- O 5
Socrates t^Lffw
solicitude iUiC.
son ^j § 90 & (pluralis
sanus with names of
tribes).
songxAAili?/.^Ul(Jk^Lil).
S o J
sorrow j^y^.
spare (to) "^ ^, § 49 c.
Go'
speech J^'.
spend (to) {of time) inf.
spirit ^^y
staff Lai.
stand (to) Ili m^^. . ; part,
act. pi. § S^, 9. — to
stand still \Jii\ impf i.
star 1^.
start off (to) &s^^ V. rv.^\.
stay (to) *U* med. . /r\
steal (to) iVv.! //TJs;?/'. /.
g:^
stratagem iiJLya..
100*
Glossary A.
stream JlLw.
strength J^:^.
Su'ba iujUw.
w
submissive (to be) J 3 V-
subsistence ^\y
sufficiency xjLa^
supplication g.LcO.
surely J (after ^p.
tail ^b,
r ^ *
take (to) tX^I impf. u. —
(of a city) Ij3 2>w/?/. «.
to t. away ^^b impf. a.
with <^. — to t. hold of
tXis.| imjpf. w, with ^.
talk to (to) ^)6 II, with
ace. — to t. to one an-
other, id. V.
talk lis.
tattle ihJii'
teach (to) JLd //, with two
accus.
ten ^A.c §§ 91, 92 a.
than J^ § 63 &.
that j9ro;2. siJUo § 13 c.
that (in order that) J with
sulj, § 100.
that conj. ^\ {he fore a
verh) § 148&; ^.j {before
a noun) § 147 a.
that which Lo.
then o.
thereupon j^*.
thief (jLl j9/. j^ (10).
thing g^ jy/. JLiil (17)
but without the nuna-
tion illcil.
think (to) J^ii impf. w, w;/^^
two accus.yinf. j^wiij.
third Ijb § 93 a.
thirty j^j^'^i §§ 91, 92&.
this Ij^ § 13&.
Thora (the) sljyd
those who ^ § 14 &.
thou viol.
6 "
thought Jo.
Glossary A. 101*
transitory ;?ar^. act of ^i,
travel (to) TLL med. ^.
treasure iUjj^.
tree Sw^^.
tribe iiJLuJ'i?/. JoLii (25).
trick iiJL*^.
three ^^ §§ 91, 92«.
through (by means of)
prep. ^.
throw away (to) ^J impf, ^^^^^ I^Lif;
i. — to throw down , JlI ^ ^, s o
*^ truth , vJco.
tidings, to give glad tid- turn (to) JUo med. ^
ings to anyone of a
thing yj^ 11^ with ace.
VL
of pers. and \^.
time^^lJov. — (proper) time
to turn from ^y^
with Jwft. — to t. away
{act.) t>r impf. u. — to
t. away from (neut.) ^^
//, with ^jc.
twinkling xU-L.
'Ubaid Juu.£.
9 ^ G
Ugly ^.o A^- ii— •
tipsy ,j!^.
title-page ^lyi-^.
to {direction) prep. Jl^;
(52>;i of the dative) J.
tongue ^UJ;?/. xl*il (1&). unbeliever p«r^. <zc^. of ysS
towards prep. J[, i?^. § "76.
transgression ^1^3 3 p/. uncover (to) UiMimpf. i.
JjAi (10). understanding Jkii£.
102*
Glossaky a.
unmindful of (to be) ^Lw.
V, with ^^.
until conj. ^^ generally
with subj. (cf. § 152 c).
upon prep. ^y.
used to ^\\y med. . with
follg. impf. § 99(7; subj.
gen. betw, ^\S' and impf.
value 'L^.
vehemence HlX^.
vehement v«L^Li.
verily ^(§§147, 96^.
viand Jdiii?/.aUULLo(28).
9 -^
violent JotXw.
wade through (to) ,j^L^
med. ., w^iY^ «cc.
want (to) oK wc<?. . -^^.
want ki^Li.
. 6 I -^ ^ 9
waste woLd /<?»». X_l_. — to
render waste
'7^
II.
water eLo § 90^.
well sl^s*..
well-pleased 5^e please.
West Cjyiuo.
whale (oj^s*..
what r^/. inter r. Lo.
when re/, interr. Joo ; cow/.
iSt § 158.
where?
c>^.
j. — from
where, whence ^^o I ^j^.
. *-'
which re/«^. ^5 jJI«
whichever ^c,\ § 14c.
9 ^ ^
while (a) xcLL.
whilst cf. § 157.
who rel (^tXJf ; interr. ^jjo.
war (holy) m/. JLii 0/* whoever, whoso ^jjo§§ 14 &,
0^ /i/. ' 159.
Waraka Si
whole
';r
2^-
wash (to) Julc ?;wi?/*. /. why? IJ; why then? I j UJ.
wick iJLj j.
wickedness ww.
will (to) ^LaO med.
wind ^s fern, § 72
Glossary A.
word aUJL^
103*
wme
wisdom aUX^.
work Jux /?/. JLiil (17).
world (the, this) UjjJI.
2 "
worst wCi § 63 note,
write to (to) .^^^impf. u,
with J I.
wise jCxXi pi' i^^Jii (20). wrong (to, to do) lUo'
wish (to) ols /w^^. ^ ^^- ^'wp/'. i; inf, jJLJi?.
with «jo (in company w.) ;
(^ (in union w., by
means of),
without yjJu {with gen.).
woe to! ij Jo.,
wolf
Yazid
9f^o. 9fo-
woman slyol, si
plur. gLlj § 90/:
9 J St'
wood 4>yt. — piece of youth J^ks.
9 o^
Zaid tX->\.
zid Ju'o.
ye (wOl.
9-» --
year xju*, i?/. § 90 m.
yes |US.
young luLo ^/«^. § 63 b.
pL Jl^uT (23).
young man ^Xi p/. ,j^^
(21).
wood Sjuww^.
104*
Glossary B.
GLOSSAEY B.
I pari, inter r. often before
the first half of an
alternative question.
4>l s^. c.^jf(§ 90 «) father.
Jol impf. i to stay, remain.
I Jo I adv. always, for
ever; with neg. never.
^^1 impf. i to run away.
^^
^i impf. i; c. ace. come,
come to. c.acc. p. et\^
r. to bring, to give
somethg. to some one.
r
5 1 impf. w to make an im-
pression.
^'1 ph sli'l trace, sign,
mark.
7^
&►! wages, hire, reward.
i^^Sfem. ^tX^I^ one, some
one.
^\ (§90c)i?/i^prother,
neighbour.
tXi^l /mjo/. w to take, to
sieze, catch hold of.
VIII io make; w. 2 Ace.
to adopt, regard (as).
yc^\ //to put off, postpone,
end
i.| the last, second,
9 , -^o-
Hw^!^f I the next world.
r'
fern.
^r-
I other.
.;>| V to conduct one's
self with propriety.
i^4>| good breeding,
politeness, education,
polite reproof.
Glossary B.
105^
'iJ^^\ vessel for holding ^JjjCw^l I (the Arabs have
water, made of skins.
j^<>| // to pay (tribute).
61 lo! see! when lo!
131 conj. when, if; adv.
lo! see!
treated the first two
letters of the name as
the article) Alexander.
jbsJoJCw^f! Alexandria.
^ol/mi?/. «; c. Jpers. et ^f ^^e root, the chief
v^ ret to allow, permit.
X to ask permission.
^'o\ pi ^\'o\ ear.
j.<>l m/. /permission.
^^61 /rto injure, molest.
,^c>N^I Jordan, the Jor-
dan district.
jujjJLbUa-wxl Aristotle.
^. I /<em. earth, land, coun-
try, ground.
LT
Lll foundation.
,1 /mp/'. 2 to tie , bind,
take captive.
yA.M;
I a captive.
thing.
^\ pl. ^Ul region, di-
strict.
jvxiii pi (vJUl (xXT(xa)
region, country.
J^l rto gather strength,
become confirmed.
J^l zmp/. If to eat; to get
to eat.
/// to eat with some
one.
Go*
J^ I inf. I eating.
^ ' ^^
J^Li various kinds
of food.
y I part, composed of ^\
and Sf.
106*
Glossary B.
'(§ 151).
^SJirem.^ii^Ua) he
that ; whoso, who,which.
^ftjl impf. a to become
familiar with . . .
VIII to be on intimate
terms , familiarly ac-
quainted (with).
<^li?/. o!^l! or 0^1
thousand.
^ J |intimate,f amiliar .
IJI /m/?/*. « to feel, suffer
pain.
(^1 painful.
iJl^jt?/. x.^1 a god.
'jd}\ ex jfe^ Jl (the
true) God, Allah. Ju.^
ill <«
^JJ| name of a man.
^^ijf 0 God!
^1 prep, (§ 96 &) towards,
in the direction of, to,
till, ns far as.
*! part, interr, or.
*| //wj?/". u, to direct one's
course by something.
*! j3/. cjLgjoi mother.
x/jj the people of a
(particular) religion,
nation, people.
yjo\ impf. w, c. ace. p. et o
r. to order, command.
pl command, power ;
affair, matter. ^,^^\Jo
1^1 commander.
i| commander.
prince.
jjjOx)^! *jl« I the prince
of the (true) believers,
commander of the faith-
ful = the Caliph.
^joj m;?/*. «, c. ace. to be
safe from . . .
IV io believe.
kaS pi. |l;ol female slave.
iiUjo|Umayya(man's name).
Glossary B.
107*
. i
^1 (§ 100, 148&) that. J^t Aw. J^l ^rst {determ,
'r(§§ 147, 148 «) that. «^^^ beginning.)
^i (§§ 159, 160) if. y^lgen.andacc. J^|t;.^j.
^1 (§147) lo! truly, verily ^f^«^^. where? whither?
(often untranslatable).
bl pron. (§ 12) I.
v::AJli?^o/e.; fern, ool, thou.
^j^l impf, a to have fami-
liar intercourse with.
^J^\ coll, ,j*.b man.
1.^1 nose.
Ujt j9flrr^ (composed of
^.1^ and Lo) only (refers
in this sense usually to
last word of sentence),
but.
^\ part, whence? how?
IS.
,,^\ V c. J ret to equip
one's self, to be prepar-
ed (for any thing).
Jjcl coll. one's kinsfolk,
family, people (cf.§ 133),
inhabitants.
• jjol ^Xl whither? ^
^1 (from) whence ?
where ?
abl sign, revelation.
-a*
L^l (§ 85) particle of ex-
clamation.
^j prap. in, on, at ; with, by
means of; for (of price),
by (in oaths). i»_5 1;d | jl
lo! there was ...
JuLj Babylon, Babylonia.
U-^ iT^pf' u to be brave,
courageous.
yj^b courage,strength,
power.
y^s.2 sea, great river.
Ijo /tw;?/*. « to begin.
108*
Glossary B.
J Jo lie ace. to exchange,
alter, change.
X e. ace. et \^ to take
something in exchange
for (something else).
1, ^ impf. a to go away,
cease.
y^2 II. e ace. pers. et u^
r. to tell some one
something as a piece of
good news.
Z^ or 'ij^al to glance,
perceive; to understand
something thoroughly.
yj>£L^ pl >Lojf glance,
intelligence.
.U"^ to come too late.
IV to delay.
X to find that sthg.
comes too late.
^jjaj belly; bottom (of a
valley).
iUkj repletion.
(^.bLj J9/. ^j-ifip the
lowest part; the heart
or secret thoughts of
a person.
J impf. a to arouse,
awaken; to send.
tXxj impf. u or tXau impf.
a to be distant, far off.
VI to be far distant
from each other.
jLjiI prep, after, after
the departure , death
of . . . tX«j ^ after
the death of.
(jojl: one (§ 133), part,
portion; some (of).
ijdJu impf. a io hate.
(jcju hatred.
S - o*
iiL«dij ?^., state of
being hated.
iLoju hatred.
^ impf. i to seek, strive.
Glossary B.
109^
VII to be necessary, ^jS impf. i to build.
^iL inf.
meet, behoove.
JfilJij Hippocrates.
^iu impf. a to remain, re-
main over, continue in
life.
s U; inf
126) pi, illlt son.
XjJl, v.:iL (§ 90 0 daughter.
R^y^^^^ p/. |wL^ animal, a
brute beast.
jG ^1 Abu Bekr, name ^\^pl.^\^\ gate, door.
of the first Caliph. viUIji^^-^LAj!,viUjliouse,
^^ /m;?/: 2 to weep. family. ^Ql
Jjj i?/. ^Sk^ country, vil- treasury.
lage(plur. CO//. country). £Lj irnpf. i to sell, buy
iJLj ?Vwj9/. w, c. flfcc. to reach,
attain to; to come to
one's ears.
y^guLftJb Bilkis, queen of
Sheba.
^ impf. u to try, afflict.
^j j9«r^. certainly; nay,
on the contrary.
j^j (^vT Uj) wherewith? by
what means?
inf I selling, sale.
^\S med. ^
IV to be evi-
dent.
^ (§ 114) prep.
o - ^ ^ c-
between. . . • ^tXj ,j^
prop. bet. the hands of=
before, in presence of.
Lijo conj. with a nom.
sentence: while, whilst.
iuli evidence, proof.
110*
Glossary B.
cy«jLj> masc. coffin.
^to be well arranged,
be in good order.
l^impf. «, c. ace, to follow.
IV c. 2 ace. to make
sthg. follow, to attach
sthg. to, some one. -x - ^ ^ i i i •
^L> X to ask help in se-
VIII to follow, en- > .._:„„ /u^..J^ „
deavour to aquire.
li* impf. i to be finished.
*Uj' perfect.
Hw^jj nom. unit, a date.
ab^^xJI (§ 2 ^ note.) the
Torah (five books of
Moses).
curing (blood) revenge.
Ji^* prep, under. ^^
^^* id.
koiyj" earth, morsel of
earth.
c)3 /^wjt?/". 1^ to aban-
don , leave , give up,
omit.
^^iu (cf. ^^) fern. (or.
^yAi msc.) piety.
vdUb fern. (§ 13 c) that
(woman).
Go G ^ -. -.
iX-^ij i?/. 5 js^^" pupil,
disciple.
ouJ /mjo/". w to be or stand
firm, to be fixed.
IV to fix, establish.
viiob Elat. ^^^j<^\ con-
stant, fixed, firm.
Jc^' /m/?/. «, to lose a child
(fifcc.) by death (said of
a mother).
M ^ ^ ^
G ^ ^ _
yi>!^j /(?»i. iu^* three.
«?
Sy^wX
cij^' thirteen.
jvi* «^y. thereupon, then.
Jo em/?/". 2 to bend.
X to make an ex-
ception of.
Glossary B.
Ill
_>5j garment.
jil^strength of character.
9
jo<\:^ new.
i^iXss^ kid.
vJitX^ VIII to draw to
oneself.
y^ impf. u to drag, pull.
impf. i to run, flow.
^n
ib^U;?/.^!^ (§89)
female slave, young girl.
island ; 5 ^j;^ I Meso-
potamia.
^C^ impf. i to reward,
requite.
///to pray God to re-
quite some one for sthg.
G ^ ^
iXZ^ the body.
JoL^ to place ; make, pre-
pare; c, 2 ace. to make
to be sthg.; to begin
(§ 99 note a).
._Q^ impf. i to become dry.
LI^ impf. u to be rude.
%\j^ inf. tyranny.
j^ impf. i to be great,
powerful, exalted.
JuJLs^ great, illustrious,
sound (in judgment).
aLlX^ might, majesty.
jJJLi mj?/". 2 to sit down ;
c. J to give an audience.
/// c. ace. to sit down
by some one, sit with.
9 ' }
j^^JLs. inf. sitting.
companion one sits
with.
9 „ .
a live coal.
'r^
cr
impf. a to bring to-
gether, gather, collect.
with 2
,:y^
to bring
about a meeting of two
parties, to have them
both come into one's
presence.
112'
Glossary B.
(also without ii,^U and
with ^1) to decide upon,
resolve to do sthg.
VIII to come together,
to assemble.
If ^
%ju^ the whole, all
(L*jL«.^ as ace. of con-
dition: all together).
xiUi a number,
party (of people).
Jl^ to be beautiful.
G
J.A4^ beautiful,hand-
some, elegant, kind.
"w^ m/?/. ?/ to cover over,
conceal.
J9/. ^U:^ garden
of trees, Paradise.
.U^ interior, heart,
soul, character.
^L^ belonging to the
demons, a demon.
.j;i:i VIII to avoid.
G "^ o
v^^As^ side, v^a:^ ^^
in comparison with.
8\U:5:. pi, wUs* corpse,
funeral bier.
(^^^^impf.aioi take trouble
about sthg., exert one's
self.
/// to fight, do battle,
esp. w. unbelievers i. e.
non-Moslems.
Jl^ impf. « to be igno-
rant. xiL^ inf.
G G a ,
Ju^L^- pl, jLg.5^ igno-
rant.
Ga
iUJLsoLi. the state of
ignorance, i. e. (pre-
islamic) heathenism.
hell.
U^
coll. demons, Jinn.
c^Ld. rned.
IV c ace.
Glossary B.
pers. et ^\ r. to give or
grant an answer, an
audience to some one,
listen to, promise, con-
cede sthg.to one, comply
with his request.
Xto hear, in the sense
of answer (a petition).
5Li. med. . to be generous.
vLi med. . c. ace. to pass
by.
in c. ace. to pass
beyond, exceed, trans-
gress.
cLi med. . to be hungry.
x^-^ {nom. unit. §
73 c) hunger.
tL^ med. ^, c ace. to come.
e. o to bring.
2^ inf.
^jioe^ army,
^^o^ /r to love.
JS^ love.
Socin, Arabic Grrammar.*
{elat. v^il c.
jl j9ro </«?/2;. pers.) pi.
ilx^l dear to some
one, beloved, friend.
iujs? love, friendship.
^-wi^JCi Abyssinian.
LLi 2^^/". w c. f/cc. pers. et
vo re« to present some
one with sthg.
^i^ until; so that; for
the purpose of; {some-
times = finally).
^..a*. impf. u to make the
pilgrimage to Mecca.
aUs\^ jt?/. ^^3L^ the
pilgrimage to M.
2C^^ J9/. ^^ good
reason or excuse.
vJXsv^ 2/WJ9/*. a to prevent,
exclude.
(^Lsx^ curtain, veil.
H
114=
Glossary B.
sl^:i^li porter, gate-
keeper, chamberlain.
cjtXi mpf. u to be new.
II c. ace. pers. to in-
form, relate.
Zto newly adopt, get
stbg. new.
oocX^ a story, nar-
rative (applied esp. to
the traditions respect-
ing Muhammed).
r(\£> m-pf. «, c. ace. vel ^jjo
to be on one's guard
against . . .
9 '' ^
X jcs. inf.
i%d<^ inipf. a to be clever,
skilled.
IiO;I>) vi) iinpf. « to be free.
lLi?^.xl^! free,noble.
s^^^ /// to make war
upon, fight with some
one.
VI to carry on war
with each other.
Sli impf. i to strive eager-
ly after.
i^y^ eagerness, zeal,
anger,
^w^ // c. J.£, r. to
incite (to), stir up (to).
^IL IV to burn, singe.
^1^ II to move, to stir
up, agitate.
I'i. impf. u , c. Js^ to be
forbidden to one, to be
legally prohibited one.
II to pronounce un-
lawful, declare to be for-
bidden, to prohibit.
J.'^ to be troubled, sad.
IV to trouble, make
sad.
^^^^S^ impf. u to reckon.
^U^ reckoning.
OJ^ impf u to envy.
Jwl/^ impf. u to be beauti-
ful, good.
7Fto do good.
Glossary B.
115*
X to find to be good.
^^u^^j^ beauty, good-
ness.
-~3 ^ ^
elat.
beautiful, good.
G -^ -
i^xi.^ coll. suite, servants,
escort.
-, ^^ impf. u, c. ace. pers.
vel j<£. to be present
with or at.
IV io bring forward,
esp. to bring before a
sovereign or ruler.
VIII c. ace. to come
upon one (said of death).
Pass, to be near to
death.
jLa. impf. u to surround.
IXa. impf. i to dig.
VIII to dig for one's
self.
fe.o^ impf a to take care
of, to guard, to be atten-
tive.
VIII c. <^ r. to take
care, give heed.
^^:^ impf i to be right.
j£i truth, certainty;
right, claim.
Jii impf u to be despised.
X to despise.
yfji:^ despised.
IXla. impf u to decide, give
judgement.
x»C> wisdom.
|VS^ P^' ^UX::*. wise,
learned.
f^U^ i?/. j.LX^ go-
vernor, ruler, judge.
^la. zm/?/. i io relate.
Jki impf u to loosen,
untie; impf i to be al-
lowed.
IV or X to pronounce
sthg. allowed, declare
lawful, to allow.
Jc^ Fto adorn one's self.
H*
116^
Glossary B,
|vi (1. pers. v:iM.^) impf, a,
to be hot.
^♦:^ fern, fever.
I^aK^^ pigeon.
d^L. impf. i to praise.
S.^ Muharamed (the
praised one).
^^t"-- impf. w to be foolish.
(i4.cb.| foolish, stupid.
Jl*.^ impf. ito load, carry ;
bring ; transport, c. J^
Till c. jl^ to require,
be in need of.
^^».L^ c. v«3 need, want ;
c. ^^\^ request.
J^ prep, round, round
about.
Jl:^ state, condition,
situation.
(^1^ impf. i, to gather
together, take posses-
sion (of everything).
to attack; c. ace. pers. " impf. § 49 c. to live.
et J^£. r. to make s. o.
sit upon sthg.; to in-
cite to some action.
to commit sm.
F to purify one's self
from sin.
Lj^ // to embalm.
oUsi.^1 al-Ahnaf, (a man's
name).
^L^m^^.^/r^p.t(§44
note b) c. Jt to compel.
-^ tribe, clan.
'iy.f^ life.
impf. u to be bad,
wicked.
vi^uuX bad, vile,
vicious, profligate.
IXi // c. 2 ace: io relate,
tell some one sthg.
VIII to test, try,
prove.
Glossary B.
117*
1^^ pi ^Llis-! infor-
mation, news, affair.
r^
well informed,
forward, to produce, to
expel.
^ bring out, draw out.
^ tribute.
^SL impf. i to make bread, ^yL impf, a to be dumb,
to bake.
wise.
bread
a cake of bread,
I£L. impf. i to seal up, put
one's seal to.
jL^pcX^ Hadiga (Muham-
med's first wife).
Ijki impf, u to serve.
2(x)J^ tnf.
G ^ --
*tX^ coll. (tbe staff
of) servants.
*t>LL a servant.
I^ impf. i to prostrate
one's self, to fall down.
I,li impf, u to go out,
come out, go out from,
depart from.
IV to bring forth or
, iw^ impf. i to make a
hole in, to pierce.
VII to have a hole put
through, be pierced.
VIII to break through,
flow through.
^Li impf. u to store up.
ii fy^pl.^ Ci treas-
ure , treasure-house.
^.Oci impf a, c. ace. r.
to fear sthg.
[jaL^ impf. u to be some
one's special property.
^jfiL^, coll. iuflLb. an
intimate friend; persons
of distinction.
^^^^J^dJ^ impf. i to dye (esp.
the hair).
118*
Glossary B.
v«A-ydj^ dyed.
wwiik IX to be or become
green.
^J^'^ impf, a to sin.
oLkil al-Hattab (a man's
name).
v-di. 2wp/. 2 to be light
(opp. of heavy).
i^ftAAjb- ^/. ^.jLi.1 light.
jJ-i^ impf. u to be ever-
lasting, to remain.
cr^-i"- ^-^^/ to appropriate
to oneself secretly.
^jaXh^ II c, ace. pei-s. et
\j.^ to rescue, to free.
<J.Xh. impf. u to be behind,
to succeed.
// to leave behind.
2^AUi^ pL ilAX^ Ca-
liph.
(J-U. impf. u to create,
form.
C3-^ 1) one's out-
ward form; 2) coll.
people.
^^X^pl. (^-^is^f one's
(natural) disposition,
character, mental and
moral traits.
J^ impf. u to go out (of
fire and light).
JJ^ escape, way of 7^,*°^ ^"™""*-
w.4.is. /<?m. fermented
drink, wine.
escape.
SaX^ Vlllprop. to become
commingled; to come
on (said of the darkness
in which objects can
no longer be disting-
uished).
^LL med. ^ (§42^; 44)
impf. a to fear.
// to put in fear.
\^^ tear,
six med. ^ to be good.
Glossary B.
119=
VIII to choose, select Tj coll.^ nom. unit. H^o,
for one's self. pearl.
wx^ (also as ^/«^.) good ^J^^> IV to attain, reach,
(adj. and noun) , pro- comprehend.
sperity.
JLL- med. (^ //to imagine
something.
iri3 Darius.
v«>t> /wjo/. 2 to walk slowly.
ib!t> p/. ^I«t> beast of
burden and for riding.
o<S IV to turn one's back,
go away.
jL2».t> c. f/cc. to enter, to
come; c. JLd to come to
see one, to consummate
marriage with (coire) ;
c.^^jj to interfere.
IV to bring into, in-
troduce.
Jy.s^C> inf. I.
|Ci;4> i?/. Jv?f;3 a dirhem,
a silver coin.
^^.j impf. i to know,
/r cans.
Lct> /mj?/". w to call, to call
upon, invoke, c. v^ to
pray to God for some-
thing, to call to one's
aid, to name ; c. ace. et
Jl to induce s. o. to do
sthg., invite, summon.
VI to call to one an-
other, c. io to bring a
complaint against . . .
'iy£.C> prayer.
«i5 impf. a to push; hand
over, deliver up.
jLfi».|i>entering,future, LS5 impf.u, c. ^ to come
next. near.
120*
Glossary B.
^4> elat, ^jol low,
humble, trivial, near;
pi' jo^4^' ^^^ nearest
parts.
LliJ fern, world.
15 med. , II to subdue.
j^^<S debt.
G , s ,- of
^jJ i?/. ^bt>l re-
ligion.
nUj*> denar, a gold coin.
13 pron. (§ 13 «) this.
tSU(§ 15) what (then)?
s it
5 wolf.
C- 5
J 3 ?w^<?. • c. J to surround.
9 -- G > - ^ ^
sl4> J3^. wi> dwelling- w^3 ^^i/?/". a^ c, ace. to
place, house, abode, frighten.
court.
j.lt> med. . to remain, con-
tinue, be durable.
^^O prep, on this side of,
below, beneath; other
than, exclusively of, be-
sides, before. ^54>;j»f id.
^.4> impf. a to be indis-
posed.
IV to treat medically.
g|j5 medicine.
^13 med. ^ to be in sub-
jection.
^5'3 impf. w, c. ace. to think
of, mention, name,
speak of. Inf. ii.
J 3 xVwjt?/*. e to be insignifi-
cant, feeble.
G ^
JuJ3 miserable, *
feeble.
^yc>fem. ^3 pron. (§ 13 c)
that.
s^^bimpf. a to go,go away.
IV to cause to disap-
pear.
^i3 gold.
Glossary B.
121=
.6 the (man) of, possessor *j. pi. cLn house, pi real
ofcf.§§90/, 133. estate.'
:I3 Tned.
to become
known, spread abroad.
IV to make public,
publish.
(j^K J9/. [j>^^y head, the
chief thing.
(j**jojj»/. iUw5j leader,
general.
Jj zm/?/. ^^, (§ 49 h)
to see, be of opinion,
think, believe, consider
advisable, c. 2 ace. to
regard or esteem a per-
son or thing as, hold
to be.
IV ^Ac. 2 ace. to show.
^^K insight, counsel,
advice.
aaJII! ar-Rabr, (a
man's name).
5oJ /"<?»«. xjunI four,
/m/?/'. i to turn back.
return.
So S , t,:^
Jl:^. fern. pL Jk^-. I foot,
leg.
G G
J^^ /?/. JLis a man.
Ii.» /mp/". u to stone.
(vAii^'I stoned, accursed.
L^'l /twj?/. w, c. ace. to hope
for sthg.
,.^^-^« to be wide, broad.
77 c. t^ to bid anyone
(^^ lord, God. welcome (Lxi^i).
ill impf. u to tie, fasten. "^ impf. a, c. ace. pers.
to have pity on, com-
Jajos ^/«^. iaoJ se-
curely fastened, firm.
passion for, some one.
122*
Glossary B.
VI to take compassion
on each other.
i^As loving kindness
(esp. of God) , deed of
kindness.
^r fern. mill.
'iL.^^ vel "^"I to be flaccid,
soft.
iSs impf. u to bring back,
give back.
VIII to turn back.
3r inf. I giving back.
^^v impf. w, c. 2 ace. to
present, grant, furnish,
bless with, give food.
^•.. food (esp. as given
by Allah), sustenence.
^XJo Marziik, (man's
name).
(^^s IV io send.
6 > ^ G , ,
senger, apostle (esp. of
God).
«.on // to set (of jewels),
inlay.
i^. impf. a to suck (at
the breast).
IV to give suck.
l^r impf. «, c. ace. to be
content with, acquiesce
in, take" pleasure in.
2U£: x-UI ^x God be
gracious unto him!
IV to satisfy, render
content.
j^K in/. I pleasure,
delight (in sthg.).
j^" VIII to shake, tremble.
^' impf. a to watch, tend.
c!) i?/. 'i\.s.s herdsman,
shepherd.
kic. pi \2S's subjects
(also sing. coll.).
isLc^jo J9/. cSyjo pasture-
ground. ^
Glossary B.
123^
^^* impf. a to have a
strong craving for; c.
^£, to give up the
Graying for sthg., to
shun, relinquish.
i^i?/. Xiisl (flat) cake.
iiT impf. a to raise, lift
up (the voice); c. jl to
bring sthg. before the
judge.
«Ai^ high, noble.
/Ji'T IV c. (^ to be kind,
gentle with . . .
^yApl^^Syjo elbow.
^<. impf. i to be or become
thin, abject, mean.
/w\ bondage, slavery.
<i-*" i?npf. a to mend, patch.
ajLr> patch.
v_^ impf. a, c. ace. to
mount on horse-, camel-
back &c., to ride.
^y^s W- stepping
into, aboard (a ship).
^\J6jOy name of a month.
ir impf i, c. ^^ r. to
throw, pelt with.
vS?; 2WJ9/*. «, c. ace. rei
to be afraid of sthg.
v^^C monk.
1,\\ IV med. y c. ace. et
c^^
to rid . . . of.
ffi ^^^^ z?>} ^^^''
pi. «^L3> wind.
k^L smell, scent.
o\s med.j IV c. ace, to will,
wish, intend, endeavour
to.
IC med. . to seek, desire,
attack.
j^I^ /mp/*. 2 to relate.
\Jls^\ impf. « to advance
slowly.
c*\ /mp/*. a to sow.
124^
Glossary B.
c Ns coll. seed, green
corn, green crop, differ-
ent sorts of grain.
cCc\ to shake violently.
// (reflexive).
ivi\ impf. u to assert, re-
late.
o\ impf. u to conduct a
bride to her husband's
house.
l^v w//. . to increase, to
be good, pure.
K m^</. J 7/ c. 2 ace.
i;^/ c. ace. et ^^ t;^/ J
to marry some one to,
join in wedlock ; c. ace.
to take in marriage.
V c, ace. reflex.
riv med. • impf. u to visit.
5xL}\ inf.
Jk ?we<?. . ew;?/". a to cease.
JL V inf. cessation. Noon
or afternoon,
^'^ elat. ^^ \ pure, ^i)
impf. i to remove, clear
delicate, dainty.
JJv to shake (trans.). II
to shake (int.), tremble.
Idmpf.u to fasten securely.
*Lx)\ bridle (nose-rein).
^Uov time, space of time.
Lit 2W/?/'. ?^ to shoot up, to
flourish, prosper.
y\ mf
away,
^^iv;?/. LSl^v corner.
i>|C w^e^. (^ ewp/". 2, c. 2 «cc.
to give more, to add to.
Joyo ^'^A; increase,
addition.
::.part. § 95<?; 99flf.
Ia-1 impf. a to be or remain
over.
^Lw^ remaining, the
rest, all.
JLww impf. «, c. 2 ace. to
ask one for sthg. c. ace.
pers. et ^^ to enquire
for, ask respecting.
JoL« beggar.
iULwwuo the asking, a
question.
Juub-w m«5c. or /(?/w. way,
right way, road.
ocAw /^'w. jUaa* six.
e/wjo/. u or i to hide,
Glossary B.
9 o^
125=
-. ^ p/. ^^ Y^ saddle.
cwl /^ to be in haste, c.
^ to make haste with . . .
d-r-
elat.
tr
I,
quick, swift, speedy.
7^
SillAA; Suraka, (a man's
name).
eia^ zVwjy/". a to spread out.
^ U... the flat roof of
eastern houses.
Jut La*- p/. JlcI^ the fore-
arm.
shield (e. g. from the j^ ^^^^ ^^ ^^ ^ ^^^ ^
gossip of the people). . , , ^ ^
p^r5. to lodge intorma-
Jl^u*/ xVwjf?/". w, c. J, to
prostrate one's self
irpoaxovsiv.
0^-s3u*; inf.
tion against, denounce.
9 -^ -^ 9 -^ " ^
wftA« ;?/. nUaw! journey.
9." .^ 1-
iOjULyw snip.
oJCw impf. u to become
or be silent.
cX;sDL.ww^ mosque.
LI IV e. (Jl^ p^r5. to tell
s. 0. sthg. as a secret. ^jCl mp/. « to he or be
vAA/ J3/. ;'j-ww! secret.
come drunk.
126*
Glossary B.
drunk.
^SCm impf. u to dwell, in-
habit,rest, be quiescent.
jj jCw rest, quiescence.
^j.S'Lw p/. ,jl5Cuw in-
habitant.
jL.4-yJLww to put in chains.
Ja-Lw impf. w to be or be-
come powerful.
//to make, install as
ruler.
|vi^ ladder.
G ^ ^
l*^L>gw immunity from
ills, prosperity, wel-
fare. ^iCiT &IJU
peace be with him!
(parenthetically placed
after the names of high
religious personalities).
G^ ^ ^
'sjo'^kjM peace and pro-
sperity.
G / o
pfc^L^I^ {inf. IV) Islam.
•j ^ O 3
^jLkJLww c. Js£. autho- [V-w impf. u to put poison
rity over, ruk; ruler, into any thing, to poison.
sultan.
1X1; impf. a to be whole,
intact.
// to bestow health
and prosperity; c. J^
to greet, salute.
IV c. jsJJi to declare
one's self resigned to
to God; to become a
Moslem.
jVA*. poison.
impf. a to hear.
viU-A*/ pl' RXl-wi fish.
L4.AA/ // c. 2 flfcc. ?;^/ c. ace,
et (^ to call by name,
to give a name to.
G o
f^j^\ (§ 56 a) name.
eU-1 heaven.
Glossary B.
127*
Jv^ impf. uX)\o sharpen,
2) ordain, institute.
^^ tooth, age.
'i.kjM pl. ^jX^ regula-
tion, institution, tradi-
tion (of the Moslems).
4>jl1 IV to support.
IsHipl. nom, l^y^ (§ 76 &;
90 ni) year.
I.^ impf. « to keep awake.
^Lwm^^.«tobebad,wicked.
IV to spoil, corrupt,
to do ill.
^Llw wi^^. . to sink into
the ground.
5L1 med. . c. «cc. to be-
come lord, ruler, over...
^yJ\ fern. i>\Oy^ pl.
^b^^, t>^ black.
G w ^ G ^
Juuv i?/. sjLw lord,
ruler, chief.
siLl hour, short space
of time, moment.
^Jju part. § 96 d; 99 a.
^Ll /w^^. • to drive.
^•^A« pl. ^\y^^ mar-
ket, bazaar, lane.
[iy^ Vlllto be equal, alike,
simultaneous with.
%\y^ c. J^ (quite)
the same, indifferent to.
ri*w m^</. ^ impf. i to jour-
ney,goalong,go. ^-1 ^.
to follow one's track.
Hw>ywwuo distance travel-
led.
G o ^ G^ > > G. ' o^
sword, sabre.
*Lcc. F/ to find a bad omen.
f*5^ a bad omen.
9^ impf. a to be satiated.
IV to satiate, satisfy.
aLyi // to compare.
128^
Glossary B.
I:sc/i impf. u to be intri-
cate, intertwined.
J^^ nom. u?iit. s^ijow
tree, shrub.
jL^ impf. u to bind, tie.
// c. J^ to press hard
on one.
r/// to become strong,
powerful, heavy.
powerful; vehement.
^ (1. pers. ^sjj^) impf.
a to become bad.
li, (g/«t id:) pi. ;^v^^
bad, wicked. Mischief,
woe, war.
Cjv-»i x^;?/". CL to drink.
AJv^j9/. olw^l noble,
aristocratic, respected.
^•y^ tmpf. u to rise (of
the sun).
(V'v-cioo place of the
sun's rising == the East.
ii)w*x< impf. a c. ace. to be
one's companion.
JwCi net.
s
viJbw.ci companion,ally.
(^ww mj^/". i to buy, sell.
VJII to buy, negotiate.
be deeply struck with.
&Xw p/. sLft^ lip.
---- -- '' "
laJi.^ IV c. Jsx. to be ten-
derly solicitous for . . .
wXli< impf. u to thank, be
J!i 2^jt?/. w to be high. thankful.
IV to be high, lofty. \Xl impf u, to complain.
drink.
wine, strong
nobility.
height, fame,
VIII to complain.
i //c. ace. to say "God
Glossary B.
129*
bless you" to a person
(e. g. sneezing).
i fern. sun.
Juj^ left (hand or side).
tX.^ 2^^/. a c. ace. to be
present at sthg., to wit-
ness, to give evidence.
/// c. ace, to see, be
an eye-witness.
JjcLi pi, 4>«-g-cb wit-
ness.
8t>L^ testimony,
guarantee, security, a
bearing testimony.
yj^ pl. .^ '•>■! month.
L§^ F/// to desire, wish.
s« ^xij sensual desire,
appetite.
--^ G ^
?.Li CO//, wo/w. ww^Y. gUw
small cattle, sheep and
goats ; nom, unit, a single
head of these.
TLw med. . /r c. J I to
point to.
Socin, Arabic Grammar,*
[^y^ impf. i to roast.
■^Lx,med. ^ impf. a to will,
wish.
%^ a matter, thing,
something.
voLci med, ^ to become
gray-haired.
v^^AJui gray hairs.
^Lw m^^. ^^ to become
an old man.
^.^yi old man.
^Uajui i?/. ,jj^Lui devil,
Satan.
cL^ med. ^ to spread a-
broad, become public.
// to accompany, to
follow.
y^jJc impf. u to pour, pour
out.
IfjJc impf. w to be attrac-
tive, good-looking.
IVio enter the time of
130*
Glossary B.
early morning, c. ace. be-
come sthg. early, soon.
x^La^ beauty, love-
liness.
1^1
associate; friend, com-
panion ; owner, inhabi-
tant of (cf. § 133).
Sm impf. ^, c. JS to have ksu^ pi. kJ^ leaf,
patience with, to put ^ -
up with, endure.
^ " ■^
k/u£> impf. u or a to dye.
Uio impf. u to be foolish;
youthful.
^Ici pi. jjLL-o little
boy.
e^ mj?/". i to be in good
health, sound.
e^
i?/.
-iL^ g/df^.
<s ^
I right, correct.
Cj.^ impf. «, c. ace. to
keep company with,
have to do with.
HI to take for com-
panion.
<Xo impf. u to turn away
from, alienate.
(Vjco im/)/'. u to speak
the truth, be truthful,
sincere.
// to consider sthg. to
be true, right, to believe
one.
V c. Jld pers. ei ^^ rei
to give one sthg. as
alms.
friend.
olo impf. i to turn from.
VII to turn, go, away,
return (home).
XacLo thunderbolt.
X to take with one oLo 2m/?/'. w, to be small,
as an associate. little.
Glossaby B.
isr
>y4^
silence.
yjuo inf. littleness.
^.JLo impf. u to place in a
row, draw up.
VIII to arrange (them-
selves),to stand in a row.
yft-r IX to be yellow.
jsuc\ pi. Juc yellow.
Juc VIII to choose.
oU^jfl man s name.
^JLo impf. a to be good,
be in order.
IV to put in order,
set right.
ii^jJLo apious action,
good deed.
^Lo // to pray, perform
divine service, to wor- t>Lo med. ^ to hunt,
ship. xjJU aJuf ^Jjo tXli«V.liunting,what
iLo impf. a to make,
prepare, to do.
wg-o p/. )L4^I relation
(by marriage).
CjLo ^^t?. . IV to befall,
fall to one's share.
JLijufljo misfortune.
9 o ^
v:i>«-o voice.
5j^.oi?/. *^ figure, shape,
form.
Isjuoyc cell.
"Li med. ^ to cry out.
VI to shout at each
other.
P^:
^-? -
contracted to
,UJLfl§ 11.
S^Lo, s^JLo divine
service,worship,prayer.
is caught, game.
TLi mg</. ^, c. ace. to be-
come or be sthg. ; to
repair to.
II to cause to become;
impf, u to be quiet. to appoint, to place.
132^
Glossary B.
»^iJd VIII to lie on one's ^^Li med. ^ IV to press
side. hard, hem in.
^^^^ straits, distress.
forenoon.
^^ jt-
Cj%^ «^J3/'-« to strike, heat. LbLb to sink (trans,.).
VIII refl. to heat ^ ^^^f^ ^ ^^ ^ to treat
medically.
.^^ouJs physician, doc-
against each other.
OwO 2w/. / striking,
heating.
tor.
L^ a single hlow, J^: /F to cover with a
a heating.
d impf, u to he weak.
v-ftA*^ weak.
Jlo /^jt?/. ? to err.
aJ^Lo erring, error.
55 ^
|V-o 2mj9/. w to put close
to, press against, to
gather.
^L2 med. . to he clear,
hright, shining.
%J6 light, hrightness.
^ULo hrightness.
v-ftA^ j»/. oUajI guest.
lid.
F// to he covered up.
^sx^ impf. a to grind.
J^AisUo flour.
4>w^ impf. u to chase away,
drive away, pursue.
ijjo IVto cast down one's
eyes.
jvxio impf. a to eat.
/F to feed (trans.).
^Ljtio inf. I eating,
taste, a meal, food, a
(particular) dish.
Glossary B.
133*
v_jLb impf.u to seek, search
after; wish for.
v^.JLb inf. I seeking,
a search.
v^LL JT Abu Talib
(Muhammed's uncle).
«JLb impf. u to stand up,
get up, rise (of the sun).
VIII c. Ji to look
at, see.
^^jJLb // c. ace. to set free,
give divorce to.
IV to set free.
VII to go away,
depart.
«tU) 2>wj9/'. « to strive to
obtain, to covet, sthg.
«t^ 2/?/'. covetousness,
greed.
y^ impf. w to be clean,
pure.
II to cleanse, purify.
cUo med. . to obey, be
compliant.
/Fid.
k^Lb m/"., obedience,
subjection.
oLb m^<?. . to go round.
^Li«-b flood.
JLb med. ^ IV to lengthen,
protract; to be long
over sthg.
6
Jo^-b long, lasting
long.
j^lb impf. i to fold, fold
up or together.
oLb med. ^ to be good,
pleasant, excellent.
Elat. ^^^\goodi,
excellent, nice to the
taste, sweet (scent).
iujLb something good,
a dainty.
TLb ;w6^. ^^ to fly.
134^
Glossary B.
^Lb med. ^ II to plaster
with clay or mud (^^lo).
jjlij impf. i to treat unfair-
ly, injure, do wrong to.
IV to grow dark.
ii^JUb darkness.
A^Us darkness, dusk.
A^Uij one that acts in-
juriously, oppressor.
y^ impf. a to appear, to
come in sight.
IV to bring to sight.
0^ ^
St>L^ adoration, wor-
ship.
ICc^ mjo/*. 2^ to cross, to
pass along (a certain
road).
hIxc an example (from
which to take warning).
y^ljlfc impf. i to look stern,
black-browed.|
y^LliJ! al-*^ Abbas,
(man's name).
H*Lld mantle, cloak.
w^ib the back, upper (^ic mj9/. 2 to be or be-
part, surface. come free.
yS^Ub elat. ^ (f io) pro-
minent, striking.
jjlc ^Wjo/". w to worship.
G 0 ^ G ^
tXxc coll. J.AX& slave,
g" ^
servant; pi. t>Lx& man
(as the servant of God).
IV to free, liberate.
Go
j^A.D nobility, high
rank.
jLoi free, noble, old.
^Ua£. Utman, (mans
name).
aJUl tXxD 'Abdallah (a Cf^ ^ ^- ^ to wonder
man's name). at sthg.
/<! > O ^
Glossabt B.
135"
a wonder, miracle.
jLSJLt //to expedite.
Jcc^ mj9/*. Uy c. 2 «cc. to
count, reckon as . . .
\J*d^ lentils.
JtXfr impf. I to be just.
J;>Lft just, impartial.
Iji impf. a, c. ace. to be
without sthg.
ijLfc Fc.flfcc.to cross over,
go beyond.
/// c. ace. to treat
as an enemy, attack.
^Jc&i?/. Itjcftt enemy.
s.ljLt enmity.
G jcft //to torture, punish.
l-j! ji torture,punish-
ment.
rjca F/// to excuse one's
self.
sJl£ excuse (in the
sense of a refusal).
Oy^ coll. the Arabs.
jtwfti a Bedouin.
\jdZs, impf. i to interfere
with, thwart, offer.
Fto come in one's way.
I jr ^ //w/?/. / to perceive,
know, recognize.
Xiwjtxj knowledge.
o.lii a favour, kind
deed.
^slyxJI name of the count-
ry known to the an-
cients as Babylonia.
ye impf. i to be strong,
powerful (often paren-
thetically after aJUl:
he is powerful).
wyt elat. ytj strong,
powerful.
J'y£. impf. i to depose.
VIII to take one's
leave, be deposed.
136*
Glossary B,
^yt c. acc. et »^ rei II
to console, comfort.
aUk^ ;?/. bUbi gift.
present.
jiLs^ pL y\^ a body "^ ^^^f^ ^ to be
or be-
of troops, army.
IjiLft II to build a nest
Iciw^ /// to associate with.
wAa /<?/w. HwwLc ten.
i- . - ; V| -r -
tribe, tribesmen.
y^ujuo assembly , the
whole; those present.
^^o_ft impf. i, c, acc. to
resist, not obey some
one.
iU^juo p/. ^JolJw re-
sistance, revolt, sin.
ydk member.
fjjJas. impf. i or u to
sneeze.
Uxfc IV c. acc.pers. et rei
to give sthg. to some
one.
come great, large ; c. Jkx
to appear to be great,
insolent.
I»,ta.c inf. greatness.
jvAlor elai. Jgs- 1 great,
of great account, august.
c:o>La£
jjjjx pi. ojsLa^ a
wicked, clever demon.
Lii e'^wj?/". w, c. jj^ to
pardon (a person), be
gracious to.
s ".?" 7 ' I .r-
LjwO^ /?/. v_jsUld scor-
pion, a bitter enemy.
Jkift mi?/. 2. or jLft^ impf. a
to be intelligent.
JJlc intellectual abi-
lity, intelligence; pru-
dence.
Ji F/// to fall ill.
Glossary B.
137=*
&
SJLfi illness, sickness.
/// to treat.
lv-JLi impf. a perceive,
know, learn (that), c. \^
to know something.
IV c. 2 ace, to acquaint,
inform one of sthg.
Go 0 > >
jJLc pi. j»^JU know-
ledge, science.
13 ^ -- ^
Suo^Lc mark, sign.
6., -
IJLi elat. |V-UI pi.
i^UJLft possessing know-
ledge, a learned man,
savant.
*^L& very knowing.
j^Ajtjo teacher.
^Lfr i/wp/. w to be high.
VI to be highly exal-
ted, esp. parenthetically
after^//«^: He is exalted
(§ 23).
j^ prep. (§ 96 b) over,
on the ground of, on,
upon, at; with verbs of
entering : chez ; against,
in the direction of, to-
wards.^^^ J^ yo to be
in a state of, to be ac-
customed to sthg.
JS elat. J^l high;
also man's name 'Ali.
JLi elat. J^\ high,
prominent, excellent.
f^ impf. u to be or become
common; to increase.
riuncle(on the father's
side); ^\ J^J cousin.
x/)L& the common
people (plebs), large
crowd.
SI, II to furnish, provide
handsomely.
1^^ life; in the oath
^^ by my life.
lii 'Omar (man's
name).
138^
Glossary B.
• ^-♦i(§ 90 n pronounce
^Amrun) 'Amr (a man's
name).
Jl4»c impf. a to do, make,
construct.
X to employ one for
for some purpose, to
apoint governor.
J^4-^ V'^' JU^I work,
act, deeds of piety,
province.
J^Ld pi. JUx a func-
tionary, vicegerent,
prefect.
l^i impf, a to be or be-
come blind.
IV to disfigure, make
unrecognisable.
" * ^ Go?
^5^i i?^- ^54J:^ blind.
^^prep. away from, from
(hinderance) ; about,
concerning ; according
to, on the authority of.
Luai
(o
vine,
grape.
iXic J9r^p. by the side of,
near, with, by (one).
^La med. . IX to be bent,
E
croo
led
5Lc »?^^. • to return, c.
ace. to visit.
<^Lt w^t?. . c. ^ to take
refuge in . . .
X to ask for protec-
tion;tosay: xJUb 3^1
(Surah 114) "I take
refuge in God", c. ^
from.
"Li med. . /F c. tfcc.
to help, support.
X to help one's self,
to help on, succour.
xj.Uuj Mu'awiya, the first
Omayyad Caliph (661
—679).
^ii^jy^ Jesus.
Glossary B.
(OTNIVERS]
jJ^Ld med. ^ to live.
aLccwLC life, way of liv-
ing, (§ 64 c).
ItXi ult. , to come early.
F to breakfast, to
refresh oneself early.
j^wft impf. u to set (of
the sun).
v^wjbe place where the
sun sets, the West.
^y£. IV to make to sink,
drown.
J Li gazelle.
Jusfci a/wp/. i to wash.
^Ai iVw/?/". a to cover.
iU.wlxi?/.yi;|^saddle-
cover, horse-cloth.
■J]- ^^ impf. i c, ace. rei et
Jti. impf. i c. J pers. to
pardon, forgive.
'ilsJuo pardon, forgive-
ness.
^ ^ ^
Jkii impf. u to neglect.
G -- o ^
SJLsx inattention, neg-
ligence.
v^^JLi 2m/?/. e to be all-
powerful, victorious.
j^jjli II et IV io bolt, bar,
shut.
G - > G ^o
l»^ pi ;jUJLc a young
man, lad, slave.
^IjLt /Twjt?/*. «, e. ^.^ to be
rich.
^^ pi. iLoi! rich.
^^Lc //to sing.
JLo jy. to take sthg. ;Li m^ef. ^ to penetrate
from one unlawfully. ^^^ ^^^^^ go down. ^
t /m/?/*. a to get angry, ^
be angry with.
vLi a cave.
^L^ w^^. . to dive.
140*
Glossary B,
>L£ med. ^ to be absent,
c. jj^ to disappear.
S o^
pl. L_>.j»^ a
secret.
iuA^ absence , stay
among strangers.
s
v^Axxi inf. sunset.
JLd med. ^ II to alter,
change.
wi^ (§ 133 with gen.)
another,somethg.differ-
ent from, no (with neg.),
except; before substs.,
adjs. and parts, it ren-
ders the converse, like
our prefix un- or in-; Ax
yjS without.
Jco;y-.(§§95^; 152;161)
and so, then, and.
impf. a to open,
to open (intr.).
VIII to conquer, ac-
quire for one's self.
^^ im
^ VII
G 0^
i^Jii inf, /.
,-XxkApl. >sjoLix) key.
^
VIII c.
to be
struck with emotion,
bewitched, by.
.JUs a young man.
nUi a young woman,
girl.
y^ impf. u to transgress,
act viciously.
G ^ 0 es ^
yssXi pl. sLsJ evil-
doer.
wi zwjt?/. flj to boast of,
glory in.
/// to give oneself
airs towards some one.
Go^
y^ inf. I.
^ impf, i to flee.
9 (I io^
JJ^^JI
the Persians,
G-^
ijw.Li Persia.
jjwii a horse, esp. of a
good breed.
\J^f
i impf. u to spread out.
Glossary B.
141'
(ji/lvj pi. jiyi carpet, J^^di bounty, kind-
cushion, bed. ^ess, favour,
^y impf. i, c. JU pers. ^ ^^^Pf' « *« be clever,
to impose sthg. on one |r^ intelligence,
as a duty.
2^ /wp. M, c. ^jQ to be
empty, disengaged,
finished with sthg.
jJIi ?>wp/. w, to separate,
part.
/// to leave.
VIII to become sepa-
rated, to disperse.
c yi 2/wj?/. a to get a fright,
be afraid.
jcU impf. u to become
bad, wicked.
jLui m/. the doing
of mischief, evil, wrong.
LLs IV to divulge, publish,
betray.
jL«di impf. u to be or
remain over, to be ex-
cellent.
Juti impf. a to do.
Go G ^ct
Juti ;?/. JL*il deed,
act, mode of action.
juJi r to miss, enquire
for, some one.
wLfti J^/. ilJii poor.
dli F7/ to free oneself,
to become disattached.
Jo F to reflect.
aLgi^U i>/. x5 l«j fruit.
>^ IV io become happy,
^successful, to prosper.
G« > G> >
viUi, viUi a (large) ship.
/j^ so and so, Mr. Such-
and- Such.
H^ pi. ui)l Jli desert.
!i mouth (§ 90 o).
viLi »i^^. • c. ace. to pass
142*
Glossary B.
by, to expire (of the
time for some one to
do sthg.).
^U med. , to excel, be
excellent.
^S prep. above,
higher than.
8«i (§ 90o j9/. sl^l) mouth.
^ prep, in, into, at, on,
among, accompanied
by, by; with (before a
quality), in relation to,
with regard to.
G>-o^ G^ ^ ^
o^-vw^Lxi pl. IsJuJ^h phi-
losopher.
^^* X to find detestable.
G o^ G J >
yj3 pl. syj3 grave.
(j»dXi impf. i to take hold
of, take into one's hand.
Jlo mjt?/. « to accept.
IV to approach, come
nearer; be susceptible
to.
rto receive.
X to be opposite.
Jui* adv. vel Jlo ^j^
before.
Jlo jor^-jt?. before.
Jlo prep, in the
presence of, in the
sphere of . . . xiii* ^j^
on his side, of his party.
G j^
Jj.Ai* m/. / acceptance.
G^ -
XJLujJ tribe, family (in
wide sense).
G^- ^9
RjbLJLo comparison, re-
lation.
Joi' ^Vwp/. w to kill, make
away with.
/// c. acc.^ to fight
with, fight.
G o^
JjCi* m/. / killing, exe-
cution.
G ^ ^0^
Jou3 ;?/. JsAi killed.
yy y 9 9f-
XiLsxi' 5-3 1 Abii Kuhafa,
the father of Abu Bekr.
Glossary B.
143*
ji (§ 98 e, 99 d) particle,
J Jo im'pf, i to be able to,
can, could (also with
folg. impf.). c. Jlc to
have power over.
IV c. JLd to make one
more powerful than . . .
. 4Xjj worth, value, due,
power. vJJb in rela-
tion to, in proportion
to . . .
*Jo impf. «, to advance,
approach.
// to place before,
set sthg. before s. o.
IV to approach.
V to go before, pre-
cede.
ft^,(Xii P^' i'LoJo an-
cient,old, of a past time.
^ impf, i to stay, persevere.
IV to render stable, c.
{^ m to confess to sthg.
X to stand fast, hold
good.
AyS continuance, rest.
I Jj impf a to read.
-1^* Kur'an or a
passage therefrom.
CjS im'pf. u to be near at
hand.
// to place near, to
take as intimate friend,
to offer, set before one.
F7to be close together.
s_ju>J> pl. :^b J>l ; elat.
ph (o.Ujl(subst.).c.^
near, close(to) ; related.
iu^Js the tribe of the
Kuraish, the Kurai-
shites.
"l^jj nom, rel.Si Ku-
raishite.
^Ji horn; ^j^yA}\ ^b the
two horned (Alexander
bicornis).
144*
6^ ci^
Glossary B.
'^^ P^' ^^ place, village. Iki impf. a to cut
Lwli^ ult. ^ to be hard.
off.
VII c.
^^
to become
jv-wwii' /F to swear.
<Xoi* impf. I, to make for,
repair to, some one.
JuflXo the end of a
journey.
wo.i* to be short.
F/ to shorten one's
self, to shrink.
yCLi pl. \yj^ castle,
fortress.
goi* F// to let one's self
down, dart down (of a
bird).
^.♦dS impf. i to decide judi-
cially; to accomplish,
finish; to discharge a
claim.
parted from ; to o^se.
tXjti) impf. u to seat one's
self, sit down.
iJJLi pl jLfti*! lock, pad-
lock.
Jj> m/?/. 2 to be small, few.
IVto make small, take
little of.
Xto deem small, think
little of, despise.
s
Jui-i* small, few, scant.
^ -» ^
v,^^* impf i to turn round,
to change.
F7/to alter (intr.), to
change one's mind.
s^jj3 pl. oJU heart.
VII to be finished, c!^^ ^^-^/^ to tear away,
brought to an end.
iLdi' inf. I payment.
take away.
[jaJ3impf i to hunt, catch.
iajj adv. ever, with negat. US VIII io procure, pur-
never. chase.
Glossary B.
145*
S\j med. . to lead, guide.
VII to let one's self
be guided.
JU* med. . to say, tell;
often = ask. c. J to
name.
Jj> pi JlJj| speech,
utterance, apothegm.
JULo speech.
J.U' med. . to stand up,
proceed (to).
/rtofix, setup, estab-
lish; halt, stop, stay.
X to be upright, faith-
ful.
^ys coll. people, one s
dependants , nation,
subjects.
SjoLlr resurrection.
i^\j pi ^\'^ foot.
AJjo place, occasion.
^^yji impf. a to be strong.
^ GiS *
Hjjj strength, force;
Socin, Arabic Grammar.-
c. ^ the means to do
sthg.
^^ (c. JI) strong,
powerful.
J(§§95/'; 145 & prop, subj.)
as, like as.
s; ^.
^L5^(it is) as if . . .
yjSimpf. u to be great, large.
V to vaunt oneself,
be proud.
G^ J
ySinf. /to be advanc-
ed in years.
yfjS^ elat. ySS great,
old.
y^^ijS'impf. u to write.
/// c. ace. to corre-
spond with.
Q y G > >
^b^fpl. w».x5"a writ-
ing, scripture (= writ-
ten revelation), letter,
book.
^^xS^impf. u to conceal.
K
146*
Glossary B.
^L^X^inf. concealing,
keeping close.
^ to be much or many.
JV to make many,
take much of.
X to consider ^ much
or many.
yf^'xS elat. wa5 I much,
many (often rather as
a subst. in apposition).
i^dSifnpf. i to lie, tell lies.
77 c. ace. pers. vel ^o
rei to charge one with
falsehood, discredit.
^dSinf. I, lying, a
lie, falsehood.
i^S impf, w, to cause one
trouble, pain.
KiS grief, distress,
anxiety.
^^oS pl ^j».^i^\S divi-
^S impf. u to be noble,
generous.
^S pL iLo^ noble,
high-souled, highly
esteemed.
'iLoSjopl. -xLjCoanoble
quality, generous ac-
tion.
•^Simpf. a to dislike.
.^^j^ VIII to acquire, to
attain to sthg.
^^JlmS impf. i to eclipse.
v_i.^< mjo/. /, c. ^ to
uncover.
F77 to be uncovered,
be carried off.
s^^jjiS^ ankle-bone, a die
(pi. dice).
\jiS^ III c. ace. pers. et J^a
r^/ to requite, recom-
pense one for sthg.
sion (of cavalry), squad- ^impf. u to be unthank-
ful, to deny.
ron.
I
■ X
Glossary B.
147*
yi^ pi. ^Lft^unbeliev- \jjSimpf. a to hide one's
ing.
self.
^^^impf, u to wrap in a yi^P^- ^yi" treasure.
shroud.
.JC^impf. i, c. ace. pers. et
r, to do sthg. in some
one's place; to protect
s. 0. from sthg.
Jr (§ 119 &) totality; be-
fore determ. subst., all;
before indeterm., every.
LJl5^as often as . . .
.jJL^ // c. ace. pers. to
speakwith, address one.
V to speak, talk, make
speeches, e. ^^ to pro-
nounce, utter.
aLiJli^word.
A^^J^speech, talk, con-
versation.
j^(§ 15) how much?
U^(d + U) as.
G
JuL«y perfect.
\jS^ impf. u to give one a
s ^
surname contg. ^^f.
^^l^ m^^. . to be, exist.
(Sometimes the perf. of
this verb is to be trans-
lated by our present).
c, ace. (§§ 110, 149) to
be something, c. J to
be translated by "to
have".
6 ^ ^ G^ o*
^\>^ pl. &jLCo| place.
^.Ax^how?
j(§§95^;147&)acorrobo-
rative particle.
J prep. (§§ 96 h; 117;
130; 131; 132) for; is
sign ^f the dative ; on
account of, for . . . sake
(giving purpose, mo-
tive); at (the time of).
J conj. c. subj. (§ 100)
148*
Glossaet B.
in order that; c. mod.
because.
y (§§ 101 &; 111; 150c)
not, no. '^ prep. c. gen.
without. By means of
3 a preceding negation
is very frequently re- ,jt^ impf. w to be fine,
Jo jj elat. jJI tasty,
delicious, sweet,
lyj impf. a, c. ace. to
remain in . . .
^LJ jt?/. ^jU\ tongue.
ij^j^ VIII to cling to.
sumed.
i^
^% ^ (often ^^)
nevertheless, but.
d^ (also di^)i?/. IjG3G
angel.
vK^ 2/w/?/*. a to tarry,
delay.
j^ x/wp/l « to put on.
IV c. 2 ace. to clothe.
(j^aA/oJ!?/. j*o!^ cloth-
ing, dress.
^\Ximpf.a c. (^ or c.acc. to
overtake.
jj, 1. pers. 06 jJ, mjp/. «
to be tasty, sweet.
slender, kind.
Go J
^ o\n\ c. o kindness,
graciousnesSjtowar ds. . .
G
<J.Ail kind.
v^^^jlI /m/?/. a to play, sport.
Ji*J(§ 147) may be, perhaps,
^jtj m^/". « to curse.
JUjJ a curse.
y^^jjai II c. ace. pers. et ^^
to surname, give a nick-
name to.
jvaJ impf. a to swallow,
gulp down.
G ^ o>
aL«jU a morsel.
Glossaey B.
149'
^j impf, a to meet, meet
with.
IV c. ace. to throw.
X to throw one's self,
to lie.
p (§ 101 c) not.
UJ conj. after, when.
p j9«r^. if, introduces a
condition, which is not
likely to be fulfilled.
*y med, . to blame.
U^ ^^* ijiyi colour, sort,
kind.
U not (of. § 150).
L^vLo Ma'rib, a town in
South Arabia.
G o
jLt5 resemblance , like-
ness ; the like, same ; one
(pers. or thing) like, cf.
§ 145 &.
Jjuo resemblance, na-
ture, quality(of athing),
^^^ impf. a to put to the
test.
aJ^ inf.
G > 9
'iXj(\x pi. ^i\jQ , ^j^\d^
9 ^ ^O^ 9 ^ ^
town. aUj4Xjt = iUjJuo
^^aJI Medina.
^(§§50; 110; 144) not
to be^ to be non-exis-
tent.
iJSj, xilj pi JLJ (§ 90;?) ^ impf. uc.^ to pass by.
•♦ ♦♦ at •• y > ^
Swjo "time . gwx once.
pi Clio often.
5n!^ bitterness.
night.
Lo, 16 Uo^ro/i.(§15)what?
(§ 14) that which, what,
somethg. that. %, ^ ^ >
•vol (§ 90^) man.
Lc conj. (§ 158 &) so ™s^_
long as. «lj^l woman, wife.
150*
Glossary B.
b-^^yjo manliness, vir-
tus, manly virtue.
jjU\jjo pi. au\!j^ mar-
grave, prefect.
\jdJo impf. a to be or be-
come sick.
(jaj)yjo sick.
cj^ Fto roll (in tbe dust).
^uQ Miriam, Mary.
>^.A<guo impf. a c,\^to wipe,
wipe off, away.
^.ju^l Christ, the
Messiah.
vJ.Aw^ / to take hold of,
si^^e.
V to hold on by sthg.
Lwuuo IV to enter on the
eventide; to do some-
thing late.
^ci^^ impf. i to go, walk;
^^^&fjo inf,
^J^ impf. i to go, betake
one's self to.
G^ ^^ G ^ c^
Jojo pi. sUaxil rain, shower
of rain.
^ y ^
JJ2X> impf. u to defer (a
payment).
G o ^
«i ^r^j9. with; besides;
alongside of.
HJoiJo stomach.
v-aXo mj9/*. w to hate.
oJLo hatred.
iUCo Mecca.
oJoo 2m/?/*. u to tarry, stay.
^xi 2m/?/. <?, c. ace, ei ^^
to fill sthg. with . . .
VIII to become filled.
dUUo impf. i, c. ace. to
rule, govern, possess.
II to appoint as king.
viJiXo dominion, sover-
eignty, reign, riches.
Go
dUU possessions,
riches.
Glossary B.
i5r
viJLLo pi. ^yXjo king. jowo (/rom ^6 ^j^) since.
J^ ceremony of ^ ^^Pf' ^' ^- ^ «^^- to
debar one from sthg., re-
marriage.
iUCl^x) j!>/. dLJUx) king-
dom, sovereignty.
9 ^ ^ 9^0 ^
iiSULo for d^ «^. under
l^ = ^xj + J^ (§5
note &).
^j^ who? (§ 15); he who,
they that; one that,
whoso, whoever (§§ 14,
154, 159).
^^ prep, of (= some of,
in partitive sense § 1 14),
belonging to; with the
negation it has a streng-
thening effect, § 141 ;
consisting of; away
from, from (separation,
fuse, prevent one doing
sthg.; c. ace. et ^ to
defend one from or
against sthg.
VIII to protect one's
self.
Igjo impf. «, c.
to be
skilled, clever, expert,
wellversed.
y^ wedding-present,
price of the bride (paid
to her father).
c^Uo med. . to die.
// to put to death.
o ^
S o ^
tc^vo ^^A death.
C5^y
^^Ji dead.
Moses.
point of departure); JLx> pi. Jlyj! goods and
hence in comparison = chattels, property,
than;through(passage). flocks.
152*
Glossary B.
gU (§ 90 q) pi. 1\1a
water.
8jol/> pl. Jol*jo table,
tray.
/ CLo med. ^ II c. ^j^ to
.\J distinguish.
\u^ II c, acc. pers, et {^
rei to give one informa-
tion regarding.
Fto give one's self out
for a prophet.
iiS VIII to awake up.
or^
prophet.
sILo the office, rank,
of prophet.
tX^ impf. u to be brave,
courageous.
StX^ courage, magna-
nimity.
[V^* i?/. i*.^ constellation.
La^ impf. u to become free,
to save one's self.
IV causative.
^^^ pron. we.
L^ Fto turn aside, to draw
back, retire.
So^ 0 •ox
J^ c<9//., ;zo;w. wmY. jUL^
palm.
Ijo m/?/. fl!, ^. j^ to re-
pent of sthg., feel sorry.
*Jo /// to be one's boon
companion.
*j Jo pl. iUotXj boon
companion, mess-mate.
\SS III call out, c. acc.
to call to some one.
s JO IV to warn.
cyS «>wp/. ? to remove.
VIII to strip off, dis-
place.
Jyi ?w/?/^ i to descend,
alight, stop, lodge,
encamp, c. Jkx to alight
at, lodge, stay with. . .
IV to send down (in
Glossary B.
153*
particular , a revela-
tion).
G o^
Jyuo pL JvUuo dwell-
ing-place, abode, halt-
ing-place.
e" ZjS irrvpf, a to copy.
&^X3 i?^. ;^»^ a copy.
^^mo 2/WJ3/. tf to forget.
,jLju*o«w/*. forgetting.
eLIj (§ 90/) women.
tX*go /// c. 2 «cc. to ad-
jure by God.
Ja^j «>w;?/. a to be lively,
in good spirits.
9 ^^
^Lio inf.
^,,^^0^ impf. u to set up.
v,j.^uuaj share, portion.
^j>rij impf, « to be a true
friend.
y£Li impf. u, c. ace, to
help, succour.
V (denom.) to become
a Christian, to live as
a Christian.
^I^-«3J pi,
a Christian.
^;
LoJ
^^-«aJLJI al-Mansur,
the second Abbaside
Caliph 754—775.
LdS VII] to draw (the
sword).
^Ja3 ^mp/*. « to butt with
the horns.
jjjaj impf i to talk.
/r to make, compel
to talk.
Jfeij impf. u to see, look
at, examine, reflect.
1x3 impf, a to be soft, well
off, affluent.
Aju CO//, a herd of
camels.
aUjtjaffluence,welfare.
IjtS part, yes, yes in-
deed.
154*
Glossaey B;
IaS impf. u vel i c. ^j^ to
flee from, avoid.
(jjJu II to cheer, relieve.
n^Ju fern., pi. ^yjLi\,
ijw«-ftj soul (anima ap-
petens), self (§ 12^);
me. yxxj ij^Jlj Juci»
^jwAi the taking of a
life not for a life^ i. e.
without a murder hav-
ing been committed.
ifti 2>wi?/. a to be of use.
VIII c. ^ make use
of, profit by . . .
isjLtuuo pi. ifcsUjo use,
useful qualities, benefit.
i^^A^ into play the hypo-
crite.
Ia3 iwp/. if c. ^ pers.
to reproach one with
sthg.
VIII to avenge one's
self.
aU^j an act of revenge.
y^^Xi ewjt?/*. u to afflict,
hurt, injure.
iuXi affliction,trouble.
>sJo mj9/. i to marry.
Xid., to wish to marry.
oJUil -^l5o marriage
with one's stepmother.
tXXi V to be hard, strait,
troublesome.
jXi /F to deny. c. ace. r.
et J^£. to find strange,
to take offence at sthg.
Jl^ impf. u to be fat, large.
d^ large, aspiring,
generous.
j-^ i?/. ;L^I stream.
^^ mj^/. <3f to forbid.
VIII to arrive at, come
to an end.
z.y'
i Noah.
Glossary B.
155*
J05J a mans name.
^bAm.^/.^l^ fire, hell- \d^, fern, sj^ (§ 13 &),
fire. this, here.
jjj light. Vr^ «»«i?/'. u to flee.
clS p/. ^Ip i kind, species, ICi «wp/. i to put to flight,
different (sort of). ^// to turn and flee.
jv^Li Hasim, man's name ;
A-CwLi jJU Muhammed's
clan.
J^ part, interrog.
*jft, ^ pron.S.pers.pIur.
msc. they (§12 «).
S3 ^
ivs» imjo/. w to intend to do
sthg.
9 a
&4J0 energy.
ja.^1 India, the Hindus.
liD pron. he.
rUe w^^. , F// to collapse.
^^\sb impf. i to lead by ^^ ^ ^
,1.1. , .1 ,.*Li med, , to be easy,
the right way, to guide U ^ ^
aLsU ^/. ^••.i female camel.
ILS ?w^<?. •, impf. a to lie
down, sleep.
1^ impf. u to part from
some one.
\3^ O
7 ^ a «--
Sws^, 8^4^ I the re-
moval of Muhammed
from Mecca to Medina.
oL^Jl^I Hadhad, name
of a king.
aright.
j^iX^I al-Mahdi,
name of the third Abba-
side Caliph, 775 — 785*
X c. »^ to despise.
^.|li insignificance.
^J^ impf. a, c. ace. to
fall in love with.
156*
Glossary B.
EJIS air, sky.
^ pron. Ill fern. she.
. conj. and, also, even.
Asseverative particle
w. the genit.: xJUK by
God (be it sworn), c,
ace. with (§ 112).
^^ i?/. ^Lj;I an idol.
v^^, impf. i to be neces-
sary; to be legally in-
cumbent on one.
IV to necessitate.
:^yo vei iU:i.«jo
(part. act. IV) pi.
y^^js^ \yKi that which
brings about sthg.,occa-
sion, cause.
jL^. impf. i to find,
at:^* V to take the direc-
tion of . . ., set out.
2^^ pl. ^y^j lace,
countenance.
9
JL^L one, single.
^J IV c. Jj^ ^^r5. to
reveal to one, inspire.
^. impf. a to love.
r/ to love mutually.
H Jyo love, inclination.
pi^ytmpf.c^ to set, place,
leave, let.
// to deposit.
IV c. ace. ret et J(
;9er5. to intrust sthg.
to some one.
2uuc>^ jt?/. >4tc>^ pro-
perty given in trust, a
deposit (of money or
its equivalent).
;d>s^ impf vij^ to inherit.
VI to receive as one's
portion.
^X^ heir.
Ssy impf i to go down,
arrive.
5u>\« Waraka, man's name.
Glossary B.
157'
s ^
nister.
vizier, mi-
^^^ impf. a to be dirty.
p^^ tnf,
Lwl impf. mZjl to be pos-
sible, be open (to one).
IV to bring one into
a comfortable position;
to get riches for s. o.
JwA«r impf, a to be sleepy.
y^ucl impf, i to describe.
ijuo description.
Jufi. impf, i to connect,
arrive at.
VI to be mutually
attached to each other.
.Jol IV to bequeath by
will.
s
".o. executor (of a
will).
'Lb"^ impf, «^ to lay.
VI c. J to be humble.
to appear humbly be-
fore . . .
VIII to be humbled,
powerless.
*A^^ low , ignoble,
mean.
Mj/i pi' /•^'vo place,
position, dwelling-
place.
4>^j impf. i to make an
agreement, promise.
VIII to accept a pro-
mise, to promise one
another.
iijLfjo rendezvous,
appointed time.
Jax. impf, i to warn, ex-
hort.
VIII to suffer oneself
to be corrected.
^L^. pi. au£ • f vessel,recep-
tacle.
jjr 2m/>/. i to go forth
158^
Glossary B.
to a prince, c. J^s. to
come to.
j^^ /// c. ace. to agree
with, correspond to.
j^^ imp/', i to be complete.
/// c. ace. to come to,
arrive at.
F^^^j, ifdJt sUy? God
has taken him (the Mos-
lem) to himself, has
brought him to a bless-
ed end. Pass, to die a
blessed death.
SU« dying; a blessed
end.
time.
iiSr ^mj?/. «^ to fall, fall
upon, light upon ; c.J^
to find some one.
IV to excite.
S. m^/*. 2 to stop, stand;
c. J^ to go up to one.
^•r V c. aec, to beware,
be afraid, of sthg.
VIII to be afraid.
JlT . 77 to appoint as over-
seer. Fto trust (in).
9
Jui^^ representative,
vice-gerent, agent.
4XJ. impf. I to bring forth.
IV c. ace, to beget.
X e. ace. to beget (a
son) by a woman.
iy^ pi c>ii\ child,
son, lad. (In the sing,
also eolleei.),
aLijJ. feast, marriage feast.
^I impf, 2, e. aec. to be
near.
77 to turn one's back,
to turn round; e. ^i
to turn away from.
^J^ pi. iX^^^S near;
esp. 'near to God' =
saint, helper.
^Jyo pi. (J|y» client,
slave.
Glossary B.
159*
v^^' impf. u>^ c, 2 ace.
to present some one
with sthg.).
\S part, of exclam. (§ 85)
0!
(jlo impf. a, c. ^jjo to
despair of . . .
*jUj i?/. *Lol orphan,
o jL> Yatrib, name of Me- ^yj> pi. *Gl (§ 90 5) day,
dina before Islam. i?^. length of reign. ^.^
on the day that... (§129).
Li-j one day; w^//^ 5w;f.
e. g. dLo^ thy day
(§ 125). f:pi(§ii8«)
to-day. (X^jo^ (= "j*^^
6t) in that day, then.
iaib //wp/. « to be awake.
IV io wake.
X to have one's self
waked, to awake.
^jL*J on the right, the
right side, right hand.
t>«-^l colL the Jews.
i^^ Joseph.
o^
Ju Aw., jp/. J^j (§ 90 r)
hand,power,possession.
IJo zmp/. i to play (either
with arrows, by wh. lots
were cast, or with dice).
Iwjyc play, game,game
of chance.
^LSo a Greek.
CORRiaENDA.
pp. 56, 57 for headings as printed read: § 65 Nomina Kelativa;
§ 66 Nomina Deminutiva.
p. 68 heading read: § 78 Nom. Diptota.
p. 93 1. 4, for 'you' read 'them',
p. 40^ 4, read j^^J^A^^.
X
p. 42*, 15 read C^yo.
p. 42*, 7 read f\>,.
^ o
)*
* ^ ^9 <t
p. 54% 2 read j^JUjUo-,^!.
p. 55*^, 7 read ^^1.
PBINTED BY W. DRXJGUIilN, liBIPZIG.
OF THB
IT KT TtnP T3 O T T'-V"
REUTHER & REICHARD, PUBLISHERS, BERLIN.
CHRESTOMATHY
OF
ARABIC PROSE-PIECES
BY
DR. R. BRUNNOW.
Crown 80, Cloth pp. 334, price 8 s. 6 d.
DELECTUS VETERUM
CARMINUM ARABICORUM
Carmina selegit et edidit
THEOD. NOELDEKE.
Glossarium confecit
AUG. MUELLER.
Crown 80. Cloth pp. 256, price 7 s. 6 d.
AN
ARABIC BIBLE-CHRESTOMATH.Y
WITH A GLOSSARY
Edited by
DR. GEORGE JACOB.
Crown 80. Cloth pp. 64, price 2 s. 6 d.
LONDON: WILLIAMS & NORGALE, 14, Henrietta Street.
NEW YORK: B. WESTERMANN & Co., 812, Broadway.
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LT"RARY
HOME USE
CIRCULATION DEPARTMENT
MAIN LIBRARY
This book is due on the last date stamped below.
1 -month loans may be renewed by calling 642-3405.
6-month loans may be recharged by bringing books
to Circulation Desk.
Renewals and recharges may be made 4 days prior
to due date.
ALL BOOKS ARE SUBJECT TO RECALL 7 DAYS
AFTER DATE CHECKED OUT.
JUL 2 H 1974 2 5
MCtt gwie laai JUL 1 >74
i
LD21— A-40m-5,'74
(R8191L)
General Library
University of California
Berkeley
^ M ^- .
H:'^
o^<*
IS ^^L
UNIVERSITY OF CAIvlFORNIA LIBRARY